Home

ZyXEL P-2812HNU-51c User's Manual

1. When a request times out it may mean your computer is not connected to the network e your Internet access device is not connected to the network e or the device which you are pinging is not connected to the network If you think the destination is active but responding slowly you can try increasing the ping timeout value from its default of 4 seconds 4000 milliseconds to something like 8 seconds or 8000 milliseconds C gt ping w 8000 www example com Pinging www example com 192 0 32 10 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 0 32 10 bytes 32 time 157ms TTL 238 Reply from 192 0 32 10 bytes 32 time 154ms TTL 238 Reply from 192 0 32 10 bytes 32 time 152ms TTL 236 Reply from 192 0 32 10 bytes 32 time 162ms TTL 236 Ping statistics for 192 0 32 10 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum 152ms Maximum 162ms Average 156ms C gt A long ping response could indicate network problems on your side of the connection e between the start and end points of the connection e on the receiving end To determine where the slowdown is you may need to use traceroute P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting tracert The tracert command line utility allows you to determine the network path between your computer and a host you specify When you communicate with other devices on a network the data i
2. Use the following Static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server Select the configured WAN interface for IPv6 DNS server information OR enter the static IPv6 DNS server Addresses Note that selecting a WAN interface for IPv6 DNS server will enable DHCP 6 Client on that interface Obtain IPv6 DNS info from a WAN interface WAN Interface selected ipoe_0_0_1 123 ptm0 123 v Use the following Static IPv6 DNS address Primary IPv6 DNS server Secondary IPv6 DNS server P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 WAN Configuration DNS Server PPPoE PPPOA IPoE or IPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Selected DNS Server Interfaces Available WAN Interfaces Select a WAN interface through which you want to obtain the DNS related information Select a WAN interface in the Available WAN Interfaces box and use the left facing arrow to move it to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces box to use that interface as the DNS server To remove a WAN interface from the Selected DNS Server Interfaces box use the righ facing arrow The interface on the top of the list gets the highest priority Use the following Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c u
3. cccecseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 79 Chapter 4 SHINS SCIOONG seccivcsstctic sssesavicinersactaredins icida ieira pinis kiiri yaddan rania Tiida disipi arin enisi Ninis 81 E OOO oaie A 81 Ae See SE rn A A 82 det aa oane HGR IN uriini 87 4A AI aS NSCOR aicina a eee ee 88 daS WAN Sorice HSUS naa taaa core gy aaia rents re ener ii 89 eea a eE ee INC E EE EE E E A E E E E E E E A aetie 90 By aIl aere E E E A E E T E A EEA E EEA A NS 92 e E OM LISD E E E T A A T E OET 94 AIA LAN AUS SG sec a cas aana a a aes 95 pcp ae lah Oo Sereeen type teeenee Ere TPP Taye eer ee Tree Terre eee ey err ret teee rrr rt rere cern rrr errr ree rrr 96 Chapter 5 WAN SOU ciscscccciscsccicciesccivadectesceisaamieicaivecscratsccaasctienssieasaiuesrevaasaiseriaeatanasecsesnanocaciascanaueaneias 97 LONON N caciiss ciadancassiadeanaacs ylasancacs tadmmaesialadndass biaiuntnceiadaneuneiaidden st add ns tadmeun leaden nadmeneiildd 97 S11 Wiat You Can Do TS Grape cece see eres is aparece aatedicras saat vellin A 97 Sa NDAL YU Need O lye suiii a a E terre 99 Sad Beloa VOU Bg saccra E EEES 101 a The Layer 2 interac Seea pariuriiriiosii iit aN 101 541 Layer 2 menace ConigurIhon sesicsacidsssciccacteccasdsosdigeatnesinccsbrsaeuiacdenetetacadectaanicanavests 102 Do The hitemet Convecion Gereg cnni a A Eaa e Na 105 5 5 1 intemmet Connection Configuration assisi eset nasi iecondeuivina eda diet sede uae 107 Go TG Ga Bakun i R R Te 122 o PSE MME RATO a A uasaagen
4. e In the Configuration list select Static I P address if you have a static IP address Fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen 7 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided co Network setungs wea Location gt l E Connections General DNS Hosts DNS Servers 10 0 23 dp Add Search Domains 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking System gt Administration gt Network Tools and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices tab The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly Figure 205 Ubuntu 8 Network Tools Devices Network Tools Tool Edit Help Devices Ping Netstat Traceroute Port Scan Lookup Finger Whois Network device IP Information Protocol IP Address Netmask Prefix Broadcast Scope IPv4 10 0 2 15 IPv6 fe80 a00 27ff fe30 el6c 64 Link 255 255 255 0 10 0 2 255 Multicast MTU Link speed State Interface Information Hardware address
5. 2 4 1 Configuring Multiple WAN Connections Follow the steps below to configure two VDSL connections 1 Make sure you set the DSL WAN switch on the back of the P 2812HNU 51c to the DSL side P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 By default there is a PTM layer 2 interface in VLAN MUX mode configured already on the P 2812HNU 51c Layer 2 Interface Internet Connection Interface PTM v Current Mode PTM ATM WAN DSL PTM Interface Configuration Choose Add or Remove to configure DSL PTM interfaces Titerface connection Node 068 Remove ptmo VlanMuxMode Enabled Ww DSL Connection for Internet Access 1 Goto the WAN gt Internet Connection screen Click Add Layer 2 Interface Internet Connection 3G Backup Wide Area Network WAN Service Setup Choose Add or Remove to configure a WAN service over a selected interface Current Mode is PTM ATM WAN Active WAN Mode is selected with the switch on the back of the device EE A NC EC A atm0 ipoe_0_8_35 ATM IPoE N A N A N A Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled g iif ptm0 100 ipoe_0_0_1 100 PTM IPoE N A as 100 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled g mi eth4 100 ipoe_eth4 100 ETH IPoW N A 1 100 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled g fi 2 Select ptm0O 0_0_1 as the layer 2 interface Click Next WAN Service Interface Configuration Select a layer 2 interface for this service ptmo 0_
6. P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 15 Static Route P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Policy Forwarding 16 1 Overview Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the P 2812HNU 51c takes the shortest path to forward a packet Policy forwarding allows the P 2812HNU 51c to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Policy based routing is applied to outgoing packets prior to the normal routing You can use source based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing 16 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Policy Forwarding screens let you view and configure routing policies on the P 2812HNU 51c Section 16 2 on page 297 16 2 The Static Route Screen Click Advanced gt Policy Forwarding to open the Policy Forwarding screen Figure 152 Advanced gt Policy Forwarding Policy Forwarding Policy Forwarding maximum 6 entries can be configured test 192 168 1 99 TCP 23 ptmO_1 iTi Add P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 297 Chapter 16 Policy Forwarding The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 Advanced gt Policy Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Policy Name This is the name of the rule Sourcel P This is the source
7. P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 7 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION VoIP Status Click this link to view status of your VoIP usage See Section 4 3 1 on page 94 WLAN Click this link to display the MAC address es of the wireless stations Station List that are currently associating with the P 2812HNU 51c See Section 4 3 1 on page 94 LAN Click this link to view packet specific statistics on the LAN and WLAN Statistics interfaces See Section 4 3 2 on page 95 Client List Click this link to view current DHCP client information See Section 4 3 3 on page 96 Registration Account Status Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the P 2812HNU 51c Service This column displays the service provider name and SIP number for Provider SIP each SIP account Account Number Action If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server the Account Status field displays Registered e Click Unregister to delete the SIP account s registration in the SIP server This does not cancel your SIP account but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server the Account Status field displays Not Registered e Click Register to have the P 2812HNU 51c attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server The button is grayed out if the SIP account
8. The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Remote ID Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail address The domain name also does not have to match the remote router s IP address or what you configure in the Remote I PSec Gateway Address field below 12 5 7 1 ID Type and Content Examples Two IPSec routers must have matching ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN tunnel P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 273 274 Chapter 12 IPSec VPN 12 5 8 12 5 9 The two P 2812HNU 51cs in this example can complete negotiation and establish a VPN tunnel Table 81 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example P 2812HNU 51C A P 2812HNU 51C B Local ID type E mail Local ID type IP Local ID content tom yourcompany com Local ID content 1 1 1 2 Remote ID type IP Remote ID type E mail Remote ID content 1 1 1 2 Remote ID content tom yourcompany com The two P 2812HNU 51cs in this example cannot complete their negotiation because P 2812HNU 51c B s Local I D type is IP but P 2812HNU 51c A s Remote ID type is set to E mail An ID mismatched message displays in the IPSEC LOG Table 82 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example P 2812HNU 51C A P 2812HNU 51C B Local ID type IP Local ID type IP Local ID content 1 1 1 10 Local ID content 1 1 1 2 Remote ID
9. The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 93 Trusted CA Import Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name Enter the name that identifies this certificate Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the P 2812HNU 51c Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 15 1 15 1 1 Static Route Overview The P 2812HNU 51c usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the P 2812HNU 51c send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway use static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN interface The P 2812HNU 51c routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the P 2812HNU 51c s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN Figure 149 Example of Static Routing Topology What You Can Do in this Chapter The Static Route screens let you view and configure IP static routes on the P 2812HNU 51c Section 15 2 on page 294 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 15 Static Route 15 2 The Static Route
10. Active Network Name SS C Enable Wireles q Note BSSID Security Mode MAC Filter See Section 7 4 C Hide Network Name SSID Only IGMP v2 report message is supported for wireless multicast forwarding function ID Guest1 s Multicast Forwarding WMF No Security on page 153 for more details about the fields in this screen 7 6 The WPS Screen Use this screen WPS allows you having to config between two de to configure WiFi Protected Setup WPS on your P 2812HNU 51c to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without ure security settings manually Set up each WPS connection vices Both devices must support WPS P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS The following screen displays Figure 69 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS WPS Setup V Enable wes PIN Number 40757841 q Note 1 This feature is available only when WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or No Security mode is configured 2 The Auto Generate Key would deactivate when Unconfigured status WPS Status WPS Status Configured Release_Configuration 802 11 Mode 802 11bg SSID ZyXEL Security No Security The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Setup Enable WPS Select the check box to activate WPS on the P 2812HNU 51c PIN Number Th
11. Otherwise select User Define to open the Rule Setup screen where you can manually enter the port number s and select the IP protocol WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled Server IP Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service Address External Port Enter the original destination port for the packets Start To forward only one port enter the port number again in the External Port End field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External Port End field External Port Enter the last port of the original destination port range End To forward only one port enter the port number in the External Port Start field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Port Start field above Internal Port Enter the port number to which you want the P 2812HNU 51c to Start translate the incoming port To forward only one port enter the port number again in the Internal Port End field For a range of ports enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated Internal Port Enter the last port of the translated port range End Protocol This is the transport layer protocol
12. IP Pool This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP Starting address pool Address Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool DHCP Relay Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c forward DHCP request to the DHCP server Relay Server DHCP clients DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server The P 2812HNU 51c passes DNS Domain Name System server addresses to the LAN If you do not configure DNS servers the P 2812HNU 51c uses its LAN IP address and tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that itself is the DNS server When a LAN client sends a DNS query to the P 2812HNU 51c the P 2812HNU 51c forwards the query to its system DNS server you configured in the WAN screen If you select DHCP Relay enter the IP address of the DHCP server Obtain DNS info Select this if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information from a WAN interface WAN Select a WAN interface through which you obtain the DNS related Interfaces information Use the following Select this if you want to configure the DNS server addresses Static DNS IP manually address First DNS Enter the first DNS server IP address the P 2812HNU 51c passes to Server the DHCP clients P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Table 32 LAN gt IP IGMP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Second DNS Enter the second DNS server IP address the P 2812HNU 51c passes to Serv
13. LABEL DESCRIPTION Integrity Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop down list box MD5 Message Algorithm Digest 5 and SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA 1 for maximum security Select Diffie You must choose a key group for key exchange in SA setup 768bit Hellman Group refers to Diffie Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number 1024bit for Key refers to Diffie Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit 1Kb random number Exchange Other options include 1536 2048 and 3072 bit Diffie Hellman groups Key Life Time Define the length of time before an IKE or IPSec SA automatically Seconds renegotiates in this field It may range from 60 to 3 000 000 seconds almost 35 days A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected Apply Save Click Apply Save to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c and return to the IPSec screen 12 4 Viewing VPN Status Click Security gt IPSec VPN gt Status to open the screen as shown Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections A Security Association SA is the group of security settings related to a specific VPN tunnel This screen displays acti
14. 15 2 1 Static Route Edit Click the Add button in the Static Route screen Use this screen to configure the required inform ation for a static route Figure 151 Static Route Add Static Route Setup IP Subnet Mask Use Interface Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 O use Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 ipoe_0_0 1_1 ptm0_1 v Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 Static Route Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Address Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask here Mask Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent You must have the WAN interface s already configured in the WAN screens Use Gateway Select this option and enter the IP address of the next hop gateway The IP Address gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your P 2812HNU 51c s interface s The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh
15. Chapter 14 Certificate Note You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filename before you can import it Figure 143 Import Local Certificate Import Local Certificate Enter certificate name paste certificate content and private key Certificate Name Certificate BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY lt insert private key here gt END RSA PRIVATE KEY Private Key The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Import Local Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Type up to 31 ASCII characters not including spaces to identify this Name certificate Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 14 Certificate Table 88 Import Local Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Private Copy and paste the private key into the text box to store it on the P Key 2812HNU 51c Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the P 2812HNU 51c 14 3 3 Certificate Details Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates to open the My Certificates screen see Figure 140 on page 282 Click the View icon to open the Certificate Details screen Use this screen to view in depth certificate information and change the certificate s name P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide
16. NOTE The update process takes about 2 minutes to complete and the DSL Router will reboot Please do not access any web pages during the update process Current Firmware Version 1 02 BLL O b2 File Path Browse The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 133 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This is the present firmware version and the date created Firmware Version File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 28 Tools After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen wait two minutes before logging into the P 2812HNU 51c again Figure 189 Firmware Upload In Progress The P 2812HNU 51c automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 190 Network Temporarily Disconnected Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following scre
17. Outgoing SIP Dial Plan WARNING 12 Wrong Dial Plan rule setting will cause wrong VoIP behavior C Dial Plan Enable Dialing Interval Selection 3 Second Dialing Interval Selection Immediate Dial Enable Immediate Dial Enable Cancel jaa any A im P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Each field is described in the following table Table 58 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Select the SIP service provider profile you want to see in this screen If Provider you change this field the screen automatically refreshes Selection s Select ADD_ NEW to create a new SIP service provider profile on the P 2812HNU 51c Delete Click this button to remove the SIP service provider profile selected in the Service Provider Selection field This button is not available when you select ADD_ NEW in the Service Provider Selection General SIP Service Enter a descriptive name of up to 63 printable characters for this SIP Provider Name service provider profile Spaces are not allowed SIP Local Port Enter the P 2812HNU 51c s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value SIP Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VolP service provider You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters It does not matter whether the SIP server is
18. v Phone 1 CAUTION ServiceProvider 1 SIPO 12345678 12345678 changeme v Phone 2 If both SIP accounts apply to the same phone the SIP account priority for that phone is SIP1 gt SIP2 URI Type URI Type Voice Features P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 197 Chapter 9 Voice Primary Compression Type G 711a v Secondary Compression Type G 726 32 i Third Compression Type G 711u Speaking Volume Control Minimum Listening Volume Control Minimum Enable G 168 Echo Cancellation C Enable VAD Voice Active Detector Call Features Send Caller ID Cl Enable Call Transfer C Enable Call Waiting Call Waiting Reject Timer 20 _ 1060 Second CAUTION If you enable Call Waiting Busy Forward will be ignored C Enable Unconditional Forward To Number p Enable Busy Forward To Number C Enable No Answer Forward To Number No Answer Time 2o 10180 Second CAUTION If you enable Unconditional Forward Busy Forward and No Answer will be ignored C Enable Do Not Disturb WARNING If you enable this item you will not get indication when somebody call you C Enable Call Completion on Busy Subscriber CCBS NOTICE If you enable CCBS activate this feature by pressing phone key 5 after attempting a call on busy O MWI Message Waiting Indication Expiration Time Second O Hot Line Warm Line Enable Warm Line
19. 374 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 28 Tools Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your P 2812HNU 51c Table 134 Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process Do not turn off the P 2812HNU 51c while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a restore configuration successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the P 2812HNU 51c again Figure 193 Configuration Upload Successful The P 2812HNU 51c automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 194 Network Temporarily Disconnected Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address 192 168 1 1 See Appendix B on page 417 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide
20. 43 WAN Configuration PPPoE PPP U PPP PPP PPP M a enter the user name and password that your ISP has provided to you PPPoE Service Name Authentication Method v NAT Type Symmetric NAT Port Restricted Cone NAT Restricted Cone NAT Full Cone NAT sername and Password usually requires that you have a user name and password to establish your connection In the boxes below Username Password Enable NAT Dial on demand with idle timeout timer Inactivity Timeout minutes 1 4320 0 T Use Static IPv4 Address IPv4 Address 0 0 0 0 O O o Get IPv6 Address Automatically C Get IPv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server Use Static IPv6 Address Enable PPP Debug Mode Bridge PPPoE Frames Between WAN and Local Ports Multicast Proxy Oo Oo Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy Enable MLD Multicast Proxy The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 WAN Configuration PPPoE or PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION PPP User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 23 WAN Configuration PPPoE or PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION PPPoE Service N
21. Enable O Prompt E3 Scripting of Java applets O Disable Enable Prompt Llenar Aubkhankieskinm Figure 214 Security Settings Java Scripting Reset custom settings Reset to Medium fd Reset cms Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window Figure 215 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings Disable Enable E Font download Disable Enable p Prompt 5 Microsoft YM 5 Java permissions custom Qora Jay High safety O Low safety m Reset custom settings j Reset to Medium x Reset ces JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools I nternet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for lt applet gt under Java Sun is selected P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 216 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use sm
22. Figure 145 Load Certificate Load certificate Paste signed certificate Certificate Name Certificate Back Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 Load Certificate LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate This field is read only and displays the identifying name of this certificate Name Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the P 2812HNU 51c Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the P 2812HNU 51c 14 4 The Trusted CA Screen Click Advanced Setup gt Certificates gt Trusted CA to open the following screen This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the P 2812HNU 51c to accept as trusted The P 2812HNU 51c accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 14 Certificate this list as being trustworthy thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities Figure 146 Trusted CA Trusted CA Trusted CA Certificate Authority Certificates Add View or Remove certificates from this page CA certificates are used by you to verify peers certificates Maximum 4 certificates can be stored The certificate file must be in one of the following formats PEM Base 64 encoded X
23. If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen You may still configure and store keys but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 475 Appendix E Wireless LANs Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 156 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity No No Yes Yes No Protection WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user
24. LANI Criteria Automatically Add Clients With the following Criteria ra iter Criteria nemana P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 24 Interface Group The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 125 Interface Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Name Enter a name to identify this group WAN Interfaces Select a WAN interface to be used in this group used in the f f grouping Select None to not add a WAN interface to this group Grouped LAN Select a LAN or wireless LAN interface in the Available LAN Interfaces Interfaces and use the left facing arrow to move it to the Grouped LAN Interfaces to add the interface to this group Available LAN Interfaces To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN Interfaces use the righ facing arrow This shows the index number of the rule Filter Criteria This shows the filtering criteria The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received will belong to this group automatically Remove Click the Remove icon to delete this rule from the P 2812HNU 51c Add Click this button to create a new rule Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 2812HNU 51c 24 2 2 Interface Grouping Criteria Click the Add button in the Interface Grouping Configuration screen to open th
25. Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 W Click the lock to prevent further changes 4 From the Configure list select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure list select Manually e In the IP Address field enter your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field enter your subnet mask e In the Router field enter the IP address of your P 2812HNU 51c e00 Network Location Automatic Hd e Internal Modem Qe Not Connected Status PPPoE EN e Not Connected N Ethernet AEN Not Connected SK Configure e Pree Ked IP Address ot Connected 2 Subnet Mask AirPort A x oa g Router DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X n W Click the lock to prevent further changes 6 Click Apply and close the window Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but your computer does not have an IP address wea 26104 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab Figure 204 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Utility Network Utility Netstat Please AppleTalk Ping Lookup aterface for i
26. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help fa FCC Radiation Exposure Statement e This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter e EEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 e To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna
27. You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced 6 Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided 7 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 8 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional
28. e Port Restricted Cone e Symmetric The following table summarizes how these NAT types handle outgoing and incoming packets Read the following sections for more details and examples Table 17 NAT Types PORT FULL CONE RESTRICTED RESTRICTED SYMMETRIC CONE Incoming Any external Only external Only external A host on the external Packets host can send hosts with an IP hosts with an IP network can only send packets to the address to which address and port packets to the specific mapped external the internal host to which the mapped external IP IP address and __ has already sent internal host has address and port that port a packet can already sent a the NAT router used in send packets to packet can send sending a packet to the mapped packets to the the external host s IP external IP mapped external address and port address and port IP address and port Outgoing The NAT router maps the internal IP address and port The NAT router maps Packets of all outgoing packets to a single IP address and port the internal IP address on the external network and port of each outgoing packet toa different external IP address and port for each different destination IP address and port The examples in these NAT type sections describe NAT translation between internal private and external public IP addresses IPv6 IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address siz
29. 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Dr eye 7 0 Professional E Media Player Classic gt All Programs O Aa 7 wo g gt Control Panel Edit Tools Help File View e Control Panel Home System and Maintenance Classic View 5 i Get started with Windows Back up your computer Security Check for updates Allow a program through Windows Firewall etwork and Internet Connect to the Internet View network status and tasks Set up file sharing User Accounts Change account type Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Change display language 9 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon CION ha gt Control Panel Network and Internet p File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home System and Maintenance View network computers and devices Security Network and Internet i pitkos niina Internet Options Connect to the Internet Delete browsing history and cookies Hardware and Sound Y Programs Add a device to the network Change your homepage uM Network and Sharing Center m nnect to a network Set up file sharing Manage browser add ons P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Click Manage netwo
30. Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address When the Connection Status KNetwork Manager window opens click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly Figure 208 openSUSE Connection Status KNetwork Manager Connection Status KNetworkManager a Device Addresse Received Bytes 2317441 MBytes 2 2 Packets 3621 Errors 0 Dropped 0 KBytes s 0 0 C Statistics Transmitted 841875 0 8 3140 0 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device e JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable Pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 209 Pop up Blocker Mail and News Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the
31. Automatically Add Clients With the following Criteria Add P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 5 GR2 has been added successfully to the interface group list The screen should look like the following Interface Group Interface Group Group WAN A anae d enaerraces entene femore atmo LAN4 ptm0 100 WL_ZyXELO10001 1 Default eth4 100 WL_Guest1 pppo3Go WL_Guest2 5 q Note 1 Interface Grouping supports multiple ports to WAN interfaces and bridging groups Each group will perform as an independent network 2 When creating a new group you can select a LAN port manually or use criteria to group a LAN port automatically 3 If a criterion is configured for a specific client device please renew or reboot the client device attached to the modem to allow it to obtain an appropriate IP address 4 If you group a LAN port which your PC is attached to please re attach to other ports belonging to the Default group and configure LAN information for a new group 2 3 3 Configuring Interface Group IP Follow the steps below to configure the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN IP address and DHCP settings for each group P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 1 Click Network gt LAN Select GR1 from the GroupName drop down list The IP Address 192 168 2 1 and I P Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 are obtained automatically Select Active DHCP and DHCP Server to have the ZyXEL Device
32. Chapter 12 IPSec VPN Table 75 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec Setting gt Manual continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Local ID Type Select IP to identify this P 2812HNU 51c by its IP address Select DNS to identify this P 2812HNU 51c by a domain name Select E mail to identify this P 2812HNU 51c by an e mail address Select ASN1DN Abstract Syntax Notation one Distinguished Name to identify the remote IPSec router by the subject field in a certificate This is used only with certificate based authentication Local ID Content When you select IP in the Local I D Type field type the IP address of your computer in the Local ID Content field When you select DNS or E mail in the Local ID Type field type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify this P 2812HNU 51c in the Local ID Content field Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Peer ID Type Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name Select E mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e mail address Select ASN1DN Abstract Syntax Notation one Distinguished Name to identify the remote IPSec router by the subject field in a certificate This is used only with certificate based authentication Content The configuration o
33. Enable Select this check box to activate this VPN policy This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall IPSec Type up to 60 alphanumeric characters to identify this VPN policy You Connection may use spaces underscores and dashes but the P 2812HNU 51c Name drops trailing spaces Remote IPSec Type the WAN IP address or the URL up to 31 characters of the IPSec Gateway router with which you re making the VPN connection Address Tunnel access Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the P 2812HNU 51c from local IP that can use the VPN tunnel The local IP addresses must correspond to addresses the remote IPSec router s configured remote IP addresses Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Use the drop down menu to choose Single Address or Subnet Select Single Address for a single IP address Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask IP Address When the local IP address type is configured to Single Address enter for VPN a static IP address on the LAN behind your P 2812HNU 51c When the local IP address type is configured to Subnet enter a static IP address on the LAN behind your P 2812HNU 51c IP When the lo
34. IPv4 Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Get Pv6 Address Automatically Select this option if you want to have the P 2812HNU 51c use the Pv6 prefix from the connected router s Router Advertisement RA to generate an Pv6 address Get IPv6 Address From DHCPv6 Server Select this option if you also want to obtain an Pv6 address from a DHCPv6 server The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the P 2812HNU 51c using the IPv6 prefix from an RA Use Static Pv6 Address Select this option if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP IPv6 Address Enter the static IPv6 address provided by your ISP IPv6 Address Prefix Length Enter the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask Enable PPP Debug Mode Select this option to display PPP debugging messages on the console P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 23 WAN Configuration PPPoE or PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge PPPoE Frames Between WAN and Local Select this option to forward PPPoE packets from the WAN port to the LAN ports and from the LAN ports to the WAN port In addition to the P 2812HNU 51c s built in PPPoE client you can Multicast Proxy Ports select this to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the P 2812HNU 51c Ea
35. Modify 01 E4 02 amp ti 03 amp 04 amp i 05 Sw 06 amp 07 Eni 08 amp 09 Sw 10 amp tit Clear Each field is described in the following table Table 60 VoIP gt Phone Book gt Speed Dial LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Dial Use this section to create or edit speed dial entries Select the speed dial number you want to use for this phone number Number Enter the SIP number you want the P 2812HNU 51c to call when you dial the speed dial number Description Enter a name to identify the party you call when you dial the speed dial number You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Add Click this to use the information in the Speed Dial section to update the Phone Book section Phone Book Use this section to look at all the speed dial entries and to erase them This field displays the speed dial number you should dial to use this entry Number This field displays the SIP number the P 2812HNU 51c calls when you dial the speed dial number Description This field displays the name of the party you call when you dial the speed dial number P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 213 Chapter 9 Voice Table 60 VoIP gt Phone Book gt Speed Dial LABEL DESCRIPTION Modify Use this field to edit or erase the speed dial entry Click the Edit icon to copy the information for this speed dial entry into the Speed Dial section where you can change it
36. See Chapter 2 on page 33 for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario See Section 9 10 on page 216 for advanced technical information on SIP P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 9 2 Before You Begin e Before you can use these screens you need to have a VoIP account already set up If you don t have one yet you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet e You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready before you start to configure the P 2812HNU 51c 9 3 The SIP Settings Screen The P 2812HNU 51c uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming call s destination number matches your SIP account s SIP number In order to make or receive a VoIP call you need to enable and configure a SIP account and map it to a phone port The SIP account contains information that allows your P 2812HNU 51c to connect to your VoIP service provider Use this screen to maintain information about each SIP account You can also enable and disable each SIP account To access this screen click Vol P gt SIP gt SIP Account Figure 89 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account SIP Account Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection SIP Account Selection SIP Account Selection General v Enable SIP Account SIP Account Number Authentication User Name Password Apply To Phone
37. Tell me why driver signing is important Select Yes and then click the Next button if you want to use this printer as the default printer on your computer Otherwise select No and then click Next to continue Figure 111 Add Printer Wizard Default Printer Add Printer Wizard Default Printer Your computer will always send documents to the default printer unless you specify otherwise Do you want to use this printer as the default printer P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 10 The following screen shows your current printer settings Select Finish to complete adding a new printer Figure 112 Add Printer Wizard Complete Add Printer Wizard Completing the Add Printer Wizard You have successfully completed the Add Printer Wizard You specified the following printer settings Name USB_PRINTER on http 192 168 1 1 631 Default Yes Location Comment To close this wizard click Finish Finish 11 6 Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X Complete the following steps to set up a print server driver on your Macintosh computer 11 6 1 Mac OS 10 3 and 10 4 This example shows how to connect a printer behind the P 2812HNU 51c to your computer using Mac OS X v10 4 11 Some menu items may look different on your operating system 11 Click the Finder icon on the Dock a place holding a series of icons shortcuts at the bottom of the desktop or double click your Mac hard d
38. The P 2812HNU 51c is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it WLAN Information Channel This is the channel number used by the P 2812HNU 51c now WPS Status This field displays the status of WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup Click this to go to the screen where you can change it WDS Status This field displays e AP when WDS is disabled e Bridge when the P 2812HNU 51c functions as a wireless network bridge only to use WDS Wireless Distribution System to establish wireless links with other APs e AP Bridge when WDS is enabled and the P 2812HNU 51c acts asa bridge and access point simultaneously Click this to go to the screen where you can change it AP Information ESSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the P 2812HNU 51c in this wireless network Click this to go to the screen where you can change it Status This shows the current status of the wireless network Security This shows the level of wireless security the P 2812HNU 51c is using in this wireless network System Status System This field displays how long the P 2812HNU 51c has been running since Uptime it last started up The P 2812HNU 51c starts up when you plug it in when you restart it Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart or when you reset it see Section 1 5 on page 29 Current This field displays the current date and time in the P 2812HNU 51c You Date Time
39. Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification Basic P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Table 105 QoS Class Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION From Interface Select from which LAN WLAN or WAN interface traffic of this class should come Ether Type Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic If you select IP you also need to configure source or destination MAC address IP address DHCP options DSCP value or the protocol type If you select 8021Q you can configure an 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID in the Others section Source MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter O for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria IP Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Subnet
40. Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication See Section 7 11 3 3 on page 174 for information about this Table 49 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest _ No Security Static WEP t WPA PSK WPA Stronges WPA2 PSK WPA2 t For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports For example suppose you have a wireless network with the P 2812HNU 51c and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no authentication Suppose the wireless network has two devices Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Stat
41. s Guide 211 Chapter 9 Voice Each field is described in the following table Table 59 VoIP gt Phone gt Region LABEL DESCRIPTION Region Settings Select the place in which the P 2812HNU 51c is located Call Service Select the mode for supplementary phone services call hold call Mode waiting call transfer and three way conference calls that your VoIP service provider supports Europe Type use supplementary phone services in European mode USA Type use supplementary phone services American mode You might have to subscribe to these services to use them Contact your VolP service provider Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 9 6 The Speed Dial Screen Use this screen to add edit or remove speed dial numbers for outgoing calls Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently used VolP phone numbers You also have to create speed dial entries if you want to call SIP numbers that contain letters Once you have configured a speed dial rule you can use a shortcut P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice the speed dial number 01 for example on your phone s keypad to call the phone number Figure 92 VoIP gt Phone Book gt Speed Dial Speed Dial Speed Dial pmb Description ma ares er Add Phone Book pe amber scription
42. 375 Chapter 28 Tools If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Tools gt Configuration to go back to the Configuration screen Figure 195 Configuration Upload Error Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user entered configuration information and return the P 2812HNU 51c to its factory defaults The following warning screen appears Figure 196 Reset Warning Message Microsoft Internet Explorer YD Are you sure you want to reset to factory default settings You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your P 2812HNU 51c Refer to Section 1 5 on page 29 for more information on the RESET button 28 4 The Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the P 2812HNU 51c without turning the power off 376 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 28 Tools Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart Click Restart to have the P 2812HNU 51c reboot This does not affect the P 2812HNU 51c s configuration Figure 197 Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart System Restart then stays steady on if the restart is successful Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart The SYS LED blinks as the device restarts and Wait a minute before logging into the device again P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 377 Chapter 28 Tools 378 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 29 1 29 1
43. 51c and configure the workgroup name Section 10 2 on page 236 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 233 Chapter 10 File Sharing 10 1 2 What You Need to Know Workgroup name This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources such as a printer or files Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a network Shares When settings are set to default each USB device connected to the P 2812HNU 51c is given a folder called a share If a USB hard drive connected to the P 2812HNU 51c has more than one partition then each partition will be allocated a share You can also configure a share to be a sub folder or file on the USB device File Systems A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device Often different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems The file sharing feature on your P 2812HNU 51c supports File Allocation Table FAT and FAT32 file systems Windows CIFS Common Internet File System CIFS is a standard protocol supported by most operating systems in order to share files across the network CIFS runs over TCP IP but uses the SMB Server Message Block protocol found in Microsoft Windows for file and printer access therefore CIFS will allow all applications not just Web browsers to open and share files across the Internet The P 2812HNU 51c uses Common Inter
44. A to 4 E or 5 so they cannot send packets to rs z E The full restricted and port restricted cone NAT types use the same mapping for an outgoing packet s source address regardless of the destination IP address and port In symmetric NAT the mapping of an outgoing packet s source address to a source address in another network is different for each different destination IP address and port Figure 54 Port Restricted Cone NAT Example C 4 D DS 2 B Symmetric NAT In the following example the P 2812HNU 51c maps the source address IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network for packets sent to IP address 3 and port C The P 2812HNU 51c uses a different mapping IP address 2 and port M for packets sent to IP address 4 and port D A host on the external network IP address 3 and port C for example can only send packets to the internal host via the external IP address and port that the NAT router used in sending a packet to the external host s IP address and port So in P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 131 Chapter 5 WAN Setup the example only 3 C is allowed to send packets to 2 B and only 4 D is allowed to send packets to 2 M Figure 55 Symmetric NAT 3 C 4 D p D ll 1 A 2 M a ae Pl 5 B Introduction to VLANs A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logi
45. An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or O to 255 in decimal P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID Figure 219 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 a 1 n I ly Jug A Ji I I I I I E I I I I I I I I I I i amnmnmnnmnmnnmnmnmnn How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 16
46. Default 80 will be applied if leave blank Back Save Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 123 URL Filter Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION URL Address Enter the URL of web site to which the P 2812HNU 51c blocks or allows access Port Number Specify the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Save Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 2812HNU 51c 352 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Interface Group 24 1 Overview By default all LAN and WAN interfaces on the P 2812HNU 51c are in the same group and can communicate with each other You can create multiple groups to have the P 2812HNU 51c assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups Each group acts as an independent network on the P 2812HNU 51c 24 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Interface Group screen lets you create multiple networks on the P 2812HNU 51c Section 24 2 on page 353 24 2 The Interface Group Screen You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group Alternatively you can have the P 2812HNU 51c automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to the new group when its source MAC address or DHCP option information matches the predefined filtering criteria Use the LAN screen to configure the private
47. P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide
48. Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced if you want to configure advanced settings for IP DNS and WINS 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER 3 The IP settings are displayed as follows Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 4 but can also apply to 10 3 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software System Preferences Dock Location Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Inthe System Preferences window click the Network icon ean System Preferences lt gt Showa Gi Personal H S amp S FB Q Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp International Security
49. The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 145 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE DAAH oo Kaa tence 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits ae 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 _ 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 23 2 6 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 457 Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible
50. When two WPS enabled devices connect each device must assume a Specific role One device acts as the registrar the device that supplies network and security settings and the other device acts as the enrollee the device that receives network and security settings The registrar creates a secure EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol tunnel and sends the network name SSID and the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key to the enrollee Whether WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices If the registrar is already part of a network it sends the existing information If not it generates the SSID and WPA 2 PSK randomly 178 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS enabled client installed in a notebook computer connecting to a WPS enabled access point Figure 77 How WPS works ACTIVATE ACTIVATE WPS WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES D Gh WPS HANDSHAKE ENROLLEE REGISTRAR SECURE TUNNEL ey D C SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION y The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active two minutes The next time you use WPS a different device can be the registrar if necessary The WPS connection process is like a handshake only two devices participate in each WPS transaction If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new
51. or frequency to send and receive information e Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network 172 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 11 2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the P 2812HNU 51c s Web Configurator Table 48 Additional Wireless Terms TERM DESCRIPTION RTS CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other s presence This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through By setting this value lower than the default value the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the P 2812HNU 51c The lower the value the more often the devices must get permission If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value see below then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the P 2812HNU 51c Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes long and short If a device uses a different preamble mode than the P 2812HNU 51c does it cannot communicate with the P 2812HNU 51c Authentication The proc
52. subnet mask and interface gateway Obtain an IP address automatically C Enable DHCP Option 60 Vendor class Identifier 021018010001 C Enable DHCP Option 61 IAID DUID type DUID EN Identifier 660e8b11 C Enable DHCP Option 125 Manufacturer OUI 021018 Product class P 2812HNU Sic Model name P 2812HNU 5ic Serial nmuber 021018010001 Use the following Static IP address WAN IP Address WAN Subnet Mask WAN gateway IP Address Enter information provided to you by your ISP to configure the WAN IPv6 settings Notice If Obtain an IPv6 address automatically is chosen DHCP v6 Client will be enabled on this WAN interface If Use the following Static IPv6 address is chosen enter the WAN IPv6 address Obtain an IPv6 address automatically C Obtain an IPv6 address from DHCPv6 server Use the following Static IPv6 address WAN IPv6 Address WAN IP 6 Subnet Prefix Length L Specify a default IPv6 gateway for this WAN interface Static WAN Gateway IPv6 Address P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 WAN Configuration IPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you automatically connect to the Internet Select this if you have a
53. the P 2812HNU 51c blocks all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN Create custome rules below to allow certain WAN users to access your LAN or to allow traffic from the WAN to a certain computer on the LAN Source Port Active Select this check box to enable the rule Filter Name This displays the name of the rule Interfaces This displays the WAN interface s to which this rule is applied Protocol This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies Source Address This displays the source IP addresses and subnet mask to which this Mask rule applies Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any This is the source port number Dest Address Mask This displays the destination IP addresses and subnet mask to which this rule applies Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any Dest Port This is the destination port number Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Add Click Add to create a new rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 277 Chapter 13 Firewall 13 3 1 Creating Incoming Firewall Rules 278 In the Incoming screen click Add to display this screen and refer to
54. this port should remain in the group Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP 2003 Vista By default Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6 This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP 2003 to enable Pv6 This 488 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto generated P addresses C gt ipv6 install Installing Succeeded C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Connection specific DNS Suffix IP Address Subnet Mask IP Address Default Gateway Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Rs a O E E S i 259 259 3 259 9 0 fe80 2d0 59ff feb8 103c 4 10 1 1 254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer Example Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6 If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP Note If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network ignore this section This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer 1 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer 2 After the
55. use the same service on a different LAN computer you have to manually replace the LAN computer s IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer s IP address Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service The P 2812HNU 51c records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol a trigger port When the P 2812HNU 51c s WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol open P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 1 87 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT 188 port the P 2812HNU 51c forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request After that computer s connection for that service closes another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application For example Figure 83 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example Real Audio Server Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server port 7070 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the P 2812HNU 51c to record J ane s computer IP address The P 2812HNU 51c associates Jane s computer IP address with the open port range of 6970 7170 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970 7170 The P 2812HNU
56. 0 is the network address The 172 16 1 32 is the address of the local computer 172 16 1 255 is the network broadcast address which sends broadcast packets to all computers on the 172 16 1 x network 172 16 1 254 is the default gateway You may have more than one 0 0 0 0 entry if your computer has two or more network cards installed This may casue packets to be routed somewhere unexpected Delete all 0 0 0 0 entries except the one that you want to use for the default gateway In the following example the computer uses the first 0 0 0 0 entry for the default gateway Network Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 33 1 0730 0240 0 0 0 0 172 16 1 254 2M 6 2 1 33 2 ih To delete the route to the default route with the gateway of 192 168 1 254 type route delete 0 0 0 0 mask 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 254 e To add a route to the destination 172 16 2 0 with the subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 the next hop address of 172 16 1 250 and the cost metric of 7 type route add 172 16 2 0 mask 255 255 255 0 172 16 1 250 metric 7 To add a persistent route to the destination 172 16 3 0 with the subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 and the next hop address of 172 16 1 252 type route p add 172 16 3 0 mask 255 255 255 0 172 16 1 252 Note that the metric will be set to 1 if you do not specify any P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting netstat The netstat command line utili
57. 11b g gt Channel Auto gt Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 5 The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings When the wireless link is established the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection Check the network information in the Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network If the wireless client is not connected to a network the fields in this screen remain blank Figure 15 ZyXEL Utility Link Info ireless Network Status Statistics gt Profile Name Transmit Rate 2 Kbps gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 Receive Rate 0 Kbps gt AP MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 Authentication None gt Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 11q gt Transmission Rate 18 Mbps Total Transmit 46 gt Security WPA PSK Total Receive 3 gt Channel 6 Link Quality 68 dBm Trend Chart Signal Strength Seeeeneo oe Link Quality 0 0 88800 0 6 Open your Internet browser and enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar If you are able to access the web site your wireless connection is successfully configured If you cannot access the web site try changing the encryption type in the Security Settings screen check the Troubleshootin
58. 1301 1308 followed by the key to delete the tone of your choice Press 14 followed by the key if you wish to clear all your custom tones You can continue to add listen to or delete tones or you can hang up the receiver when you are done 9 10 1 Quality of Service QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for real time multimedia applications P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 225 Chapter 9 Voice Type of Service ToS Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS Type of Service values at the data source for example at the P 2812HNU 51c so a server can decide the best method of delivery that is the least cost fastest route and so on DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCP indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Pe
59. 169 44 203 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 100 Mb Recv Packets 22626 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Marvell Collisions 0 Model Yukon Gigabit Adapter 88E8053 Mac OS X 10 5 and 10 6 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 5 but can also apply to 10 6 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Finder File Edit Viev About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software Recent Items b Force Quit WEO Sleep Restart Shut Down P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 2 In System Preferences click the Network icon Personal ci B w 9 Appearance Desktop amp Dock Expos amp International Security Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Hardware G E 0 v A C CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Internet amp Noan Mac Network QuickTime Sharing System u Q a OO Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Ethernet from the list of available connection types Location Automatic i Internal Modem Q Not Connected Status Not Connected PPPoE The cable for Ethernet is connected but aera Q your computer does not have an IP address Ethernet h i Not Conmected J Configure Using DHCP KA e FireWire Not Connected AirPort e off DNS Server
60. 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 151 Eight Subnets suoner SUBNET runs aponess 4ASiec BRGADGAST 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 152 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NOST ORS OED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 4 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 153 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NOST ORS OED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4
61. 192 IP address 144 IP Address Assignment 128 IP filter basics 275 creating or eiding rules 278 introduction 275 policies 276 IP multicasting 398 IP pool 140 IP pool setup 144 ipconfig 403 ipconfig release 404 ipconfig renew 404 IPSec 253 algorithms 268 architecture 267 NAT 270 see also VPN IPv6 100 483 addressing 483 EUI 64 485 global address 484 interface ID 485 link local address 484 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 100 483 ping 100 483 prefix 483 prefix length 483 stateless autoconfiguration 486 unspecified address 484 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 517 Index ITU T 224 K key combinations 231 keypad 231 L LAN and USB printer 240 LAN statistics 95 LAN TCP IP 144 LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration 333 LBR 380 link trace 380 Link Trace Message see LTM Link Trace Response see LTR listening port 206 logs 367 overview 367 settings 368 Loop Back Response see LBR loopback 380 LTM 380 LTR 380 MA 379 MAC 83 MAC address 83 MAC address filter action 161 MAC filter 160 161 Maintenance Association see MA Maintenance Domain see MD Maintenance End Point see MEP Management Information Base MIB 334 managing the device Maximum Burst Size MBS 105 127 MD 379 memory usage 85 MEP 379 Message Integrity Check MIC 476 MIB and SNMP 334 MIB Management Information Base 334 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 132 multicast 133 138 146 multimedia 217 multiplexing 126 LLC based 127 VC ba
62. 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the P 2812HNU 51c Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your P 2812HNU 51c that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but ma
63. 4 certificates can be stored The certificate file must be in one of the following formats e PEM Base 64 encoded x 509 rome fuse foursece type faction ooo Bodo cert CN test O BigCompany ST N4 C TW request Load Signed view localcert_test CN www zyxel com tw O Zyxel ST TW C TW signed view Remove Create Certificate Request Import Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Local Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name In Use This field displays how many applications use the certificate Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information This field displays what kind of certificate this is request represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate Send a certification request to a certification authority which then issues a certificate Use the Load Certificate screen to import the certificate and replace the request signed represents a certificate issued by a certification authority P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 14 Certificate Table 86 Local Certificates continu
64. 51c again after configuring a new interface group Make sure your computer is connected to a LAN port in the default group Otherwise you need to use the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN IP address for the new group to access the P 2812HNU 51c again 30 3 Internet Access cannot access the Internet 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 6 on page 30 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the WAN screens These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again 388 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 5 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection 1 Check if you set the DSL WAN switch on the back of the P 2812HNU 51c to the DSL side to have the P 2812HNU 51c use the DSL port for Internet access 2 Make sure you configured a proper ATM or PTM layer 2 interface and WAN services with the Internet account information provided by your ISP 3 Ifyou set up a WAN connection using bridging service make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get
65. 51c forwards the traffic to Jane s computer IP address Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out The P 2812HNU 51c times out in three minutes with UDP User Datagram Protocol or two hours with TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Click NAT gt Trigger Port to open the following screen Use this screen to view and configure your P 2812HNU 51c s trigger port settings Figure 84 Trigger Port Trigger Port Trigger Port Service Name WAN Interface Trigger port Protocol Open port Protocol Aim Talk v ipoe_0_0_1 123 ptm0 123 Y start 5191 End 5191 TCP Y Start 4099 End 4099 TCP v Nofactive Service Trigger Start Trigger End PREA Open Start Open End open Modify Pa ba ELT NrertTac Or Ort Pre LO FOr PO A Prot 1 Aim Talk ptm0 123 5191 5191 1 4099 4099 1 g The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 NAT Trigger Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name Select a pre defined service from the drop down list box The pre defined service port number s and protocol will display in the Trigger port Open port and Protocol fields Otherwise select User Define to open the Rule Setup screen where you can manually enter the port number s and select the transport layer protocol WAN Interface Select the WAN interface throug
66. 6 Unconfiqured AP ri ZyXELO10001 Active No Security Number Action Interface Status ESENS DSL Link Down kbps kbps ETH WAN NoLink N A LANL NoLink N A LAN2 NoLink N A LAN3 NoLink N A LAN4 NoLink N A WLAN 144m 3G USB NoDevice N A WA rvi tisti 0 days 2 hours 16 minutes 01 Jan 2000 02 17 50 Routing Bridging ES 6 00 20 istics Client List Account Status Inactive Each field is described in the following table Table 7 Status Screen LABEL Refresh Interval DESCRIPTION changeme changeme URI Enter how often you want the P 2812HNU 51c to update this screen Apply Click this to update this screen immediately P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 7 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information User Name _ This field displays the P 2812HNU 51c system name It is used for identification Click this to go to the screen where you can change it Model This is the model name of your device Number MAC This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to Address your P 2812HNU 51c Firmware This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device Version It also shows the date the firmware version was created Click this to go to the screen where you can change it DSL This field displays
67. 6 Open the Status screen Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status Figure 10 AP Status gt Status WAN 1 Information Mode PTM TPOE DSL Link Down kbps kbps IP Address 0 0 0 0 ETH WAN Up 100M Full IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 LANL Up 100M Full WAN 1 Information LAN2 NoLink N A S LAN3 NoLink N A it ETBN LANA NoLink N A IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 joDevice WAN 2 Information Mode ETH IPow 7 IP Address 172 23 26 11 More Status IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 E LAN Information WAN Service Statistics LAN Statistics IP Address 192 168 1 1 Route Info Client List IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 T VoIP Status IPv6 Address Mask fe80 10 18ff fe01 1 64 IPv6 Scope Link Local DHCP Server WLAN Information Channel 1 auto WPS Status Unconfiqured WDS Status AP Bridge AP 1 Information SSID Example3 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 7 Click the WLAN Station List hyperlink in the AP s Status screen You can see if any wireless client has connected to the AP Figure 11 AP Status WLAN Station List WLAN Station List 00 03 7F BF 16 8C SSID_Example3 wild ee Refresh Interval sn Set Interval 2 2 3 Configuring the Wireless Client This section describes how to connect t
68. AH protocol packet contents the data payload are not encrypted A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the incoming packet by computing its own hash 270 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN 12 5 6 value and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn t match The VPN device at the receiving end doesn t know about the NAT in the middle so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet including headers in a new IP packet The new IP packet s source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end When using ESP protocol with authentication the packet contents in this case the entire original packet are encrypted The encrypted contents but not the new headers are signed with a hash value appended to the packet Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload which is unchanged by a NAT device Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT Table 77 VPN and NAT SECURITY PROTOCOL MODE NAT AH Transp
69. AP Wireless LAN Wireless Setup Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection Auto Y Current 11 Bandwidth 20MHz Control Sideband Common Setup Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 o Auto Generate Key C Hide Network Name SSID C Enable Wireless Multicast Forwarding WMF q Note Only IGMP v2 report message is supported for wireless multicast forwarding function BSSID 00 23 F8 41 71 B5 ecurity Mode WPA PSK Y Encryption TKIP v Pre Shared Key ThisismyNPA PSKpre sh Group Key Update Timer 0 sec MAC Filter 2 Make sure the Active Wireless LAN check box is selected 3 Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select Auto to have the P 2812HNU 51c automatically determine a channel which is not used by another AP 4 Set security mode to WPA PSK and enter ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey in the Pre Shared Key field Click Apply P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 5 Click the Advanced Setup tab and select 802 11b g n Mixed in the 802 11 Mode field Click Apply Figure 9 AP Wireless LAN gt Advanced Setup e NS e k General L fore AP J WPS A WPS Station I wos Advanced Setup Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold 2347 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 Number of Wireless Stations Allowed 16 Output Power 100 v Multicast Rate 18 Mbps v 802 11 Mode 802 11b g n Mixed v 802 11 Protection Auto Preamble Long
70. ATTA OGY renane E O 374 28 4 The Resat SOGBIN cccdescictcccedccccasupagdecncantesaiciainedasdasaundeiaceadanesccelentdidadaeserte Muabauegaadetenenars 376 Chapter 29 DEAT SUG saiceinnssatacsnixanniseadaianannndstnisesaasansasadseccassainssaiaainandinasinanansiansesaniaadadadabianshsiatsndanasaaaianas 379 BR NPE UM age ices isan exh Si he te genic ecu tadcaer ake sats Vs Dana eel tess Sy Sahni eux 379 2911 What You Coats Doim this Chaplet siccin anesan 379 eoa WSU YOu Ned te KNOW aa a lads inens enna iea tes aan iajonseeine 379 29 9 The taeneral Diagnostic SCMIGM seicicaccccsdctsoeseceeasiadessecageducereensiacaderseenlgamsabelugsbeanieleguebess 380 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Table of Contents eee The BO Tag Cr Bell 4 cnas necator aE REE 381 20 9 The OAM Piho ESOO soista paaa reani ea aoa aaa EEA ARAROA 383 Chapter 30 TROUBIGS MO OUNG sintssiciscscssesieisctenisrentaciciicsestaineriasessasenieadnasesiwiaarirsasasiasesiaastasaindieasialadsaianiaiens 385 30 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS isissccccsssciceiacainssercsansessvscsanetvecerassvavenenannneceenas 385 30 2 P 2812HNU 51c Access and LOGIN ssu tcc censuskscocuzass sscnanusessicedususssacddvasdsdanecnuessuaeenuuunsaadd 386 PET ACCESE vanan aa ieee 388 304 Phone Calls and VolP swsisenisisatonsii tas Ren tions aint masdgenisasnlaan naan tee siaeNt ena aaNea IO EANANIOS 391 30 9 USB DGS DONEC sic ccacisuiconeccanirspatiinn tear ncitiveaa a omneiteteas 391 30 6 Wireless LAN Trou
71. Chapter 14 Certificate Figure 144 Certificate Details Certificate Details Name Type Subject Certificate Private Key Signing Request MIICXQOIBAAKBGODCO3 jGfiea875kW90srZ5Zce3svug m SodZ TAA BxJWQBNGWUG SXF IV1KF yoGFtci20 1EIRBbdalB s 3U5S lJpiafJvDCvGNraNQeSUeqFOaqsuj9 U2Rqnzvu5R2ii2HOrFWLbMIuvjPidossPODZ0vZpzK71zK2k7hvURHSYOQIDAQAB A0GANZqCDS5ej IAKZURgGIJtj15j RxrWwjCiDDoWh Oak 7mC7LEtYkS2 xmuvQiarms yX CIHCOKW6D90qr 2X02 Egx lvkT97i7B0jkKNUMUS lgvd02 74m4g2G63 wl 7exdIkGgpYFy xqhnXfr4Z9ezple2QgtakgiUv9lnbewXK3 XonRiQaj 7OKAECQODEVISN4AtGLUV ip fF 7tk16uzHNGsdahYullmkj EcSCIxIVIA4HisBdaBnlrS4hxUTmizp76G7 FvOzsaz0 JBTJ gaChakEaA3 INxbDUXpuptHilwusSvqtOFoL5i125n3 Z0DgMri27LhoDJUentr Psd8CsdaNQcLWeHDKGnSEsSQQYS P YmG2 wQJ AKUSw4BeBSgdkbmpJ4fhgKke 1MeoT cmz zSTdi4BRTeyidJTolxovBuU Hf xxrukWw9kSf C Au LGNpDuOvBH2 Xqg4QJBad lw V2m1lOM7 qGneGV8Cj 6w1QB13d8UIcR ixNZTzONJqINvimoovVyYXIV62942 7gif WNsXlI4UL7zRAWfzAwECQQCNoOUEHADHF ZJt ZAF 6H93 JQIaOMs7t501lwenS6i7 dG dgjN Ufbj OCohniyOtcdhpai3BW4DrMheq51TzekHalF a END RSA PRIVATE KEY BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST MI IBA CB4AIBADA3 NO4wD AYDVOQQDEWVaeVhF TDELMAKGALUECHNCVFexCzAJBQN BAgTAkSBMOSVCQOYDVOQGEvJVUZzCEnzANBgk hkiG9wOBAQEFAALOBjQAwgYkCYYEA wtN4xn4nmvO ZFvTrK2 eUXHt 7MIOJkqHULK3 QAcYMEATRSFBovk1xSFtSheqBhbx IttPIRCEQU3SSALrP910ZSaYmnyhwurx jaz j UHVVHqhdGqubo f1lNkap877u
72. Click the Remove icon to erase this speed dial entry Clear Click this to erase all the speed dial entries 9 7 Call History Summary Screen The P 2812HNU 51c logs calls from or to your SIP numbers This screen allows you to view the summary of received dialed and missed calls Click VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Summary The following screen displays Figure 93 VoIP gt Call History gt Call History Summary Call History Summary Call History Summary Clear All No Date Total Calls Outgoing Calls Incoming Calls Missing Calls Total Duration 1 1 1 2000 3 ab 1 0 03 22 2 1 4 2000 2 2 0 0 0 01 56 3 1 12 2000 3 i ag 1 0 57 28 4 1 13 2000 5 2 3 0 2 30 27 Each field is described in the following table Table 61 VolP gt Call History gt Call History Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to renew the call history list Clear All Click this button to remove all entries from the call history list No This is a read only index number Date This is the date when the calls were made Total Calls This displays the total number of calls from or to your SIP numbers that day Outgoing Calls This displays how many calls originated from you that day Incoming Calls This displays how many calls you received that day P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Table 61 VolP gt Call History gt Call History Summary LABEL DESCRI
73. Configuration Default Gateway PPPoE PPPoA IPoE or IPoA Routing Default Gateway Default gateway interface list can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system default gateways but only one will be used according to the priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest priority if the WAN interface is connected No Backup WAN fucntion support Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Selected Default Gateway Interfaces Interfaces ptmo 100 ptm0 123 eth4 100 Available Routed WAN Select a preferred wan interface as the system default IPv6 gateway Selected WAN Interface ipoe_O_0_1 123 ptm0 123 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 WAN Configuration Default Gateway PPPoE PPPOA IPoE or IPoA Available Routed WAN Interfaces LABEL DESCRIPTION Selected Default Select a WAN interface through which you want to forward the traffic Gatewa ee ee Select a WAN interface in the Available Routed WAN Interfaces box and use the left facing arrow to move it to the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces box to use that interface as the default gateway To remove a WAN interface from the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces box use the righ facing arrow The interface on the top of the list gets the highest priority Selected WAN Select a WAN interface to use that interface as the system default
74. Enable if you want to set up a VPN tunnel when there are NAT routers between the P 2812HNU 51c and remote IPSec router The remote IPSec router must also enable NAT traversal and the NAT routers have to forward UDP port 500 packets to the remote IPSec router behind the NAT router Otherwise select Disable Advanced IKE Settings Click Show Advanced Settings to display and configure more detailed settings of your IKE key management Otherwise click Hide Advanced Settings Enable Manual ID Type Select this option to specify how to identify the P 2812HNU 51c and remote IPSec router P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN Table 74 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec Setting gt IKE continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Local ID Type Select IP to identify this P 2812HNU 51c by its IP address Select DNS to identify this P 2812HNU 51c by a domain name Select E mail to identify this P 2812HNU 51c by an e mail address Select ASN1DN Abstract Syntax Notation one Distinguished Name to identify the remote IPSec router by the subject field in a certificate This is used only with certificate based authentication Local ID Content When you select IP in the Local I D Type field type the IP address of your computer in the Local ID Content field When you select DNS or E mail in the Local ID Type field type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify this P 2812HNU 51c in the
75. Enter 802 1P Priority IEEE 802 1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Type the IEEE 802 1p priority level from 0 to 7 to add to traffic through this connection The greater the number the higher the priority level This field is available when the layer 2 interface is in VLANMUX mode Enter 802 1Q VLAN ID Type the VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094 for traffic through this connection This field is available when the PTM interface is in VLANMUX mode Enable Pv6 for Select this option to enable IPv6 for this WAN service so that the P this service 2812HNU 51c can use an Pv6 address when sending traffic through this connection You can only enable Pv6 for a WAN service that uses the PPPoE or I PoE encapsulation method over the ATM or PTM interface Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue 5 5 1 3 WAN IP Address and DNS Server The screen differs by the encapsulation you selected in the previous screen See Section 5 7 on page 125 for more information P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup PPPoE or PPPoA This sc Servic reen displays when you select PPP over Ethernet PPPoE in the WAN e Configuration screen or set the DSL link type to PPPoA for the ATM interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface Figure
76. Enter the source subnet mask Mask TCP UDP Port If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check Range box and enter the port number s of the source Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Destination MAC Address Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet MAC Mask Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet s MAC address should match Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic s MAC address should match Enter O for the bit s of the matched traffic s MAC address which can be of any hexadecimal character s For example if you set the MAC address to 00 13 49 00 00 00 and the mask to ff ff ff 00 00 00 a packet with a MAC address of 00 13 49 12 34 56 matches this criteria IP Address Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address IP Subnet Mask Enter the destination subnet mask TCP UDP Port Range If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field select the check box and enter the port number s of the source P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 317 Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Table 105 QoS Class Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Exclude Others Sel
77. Figure 73 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling gt Add Add WLAN LAN Power Off scheduling rule This page adds Wireless LAN Power Off scheduling rule to the router Rule Name Days ofthe week Mon Tue wed thu rri sat sun Clickto select o o o o a pfa jla Start Time 00 V Houn 00 min End Time 00 Hour 00 Y Min qQ Note Specify the same begin time and end time means the whole day schedule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes You can enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores _ are accepted Days of the Select which day s of the week you want wireless power off scheduling week to be active Start Time Select a begin time using the Hour and minute Min drop down boxes The wireless LAN will turn off between the start time and end time you specified End Time Select an end time using the Hour and minute Min drop down boxes Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Save Apply Click Save Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 10 The Advanced Setup Screen To configure advanced wireless settings click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced S
78. Hot Line Warm Line number Warm Line Timer sec C Enable Missed Call Email Notification Mail Server Send Notification to Ernail Missed Call Ernail Title NOTICE Hot Line 5 300 Second None ichangeme MissedCallNotification Please configure mail server in Advanced gt Email Notification page and select the mail server for this feature Early Media IVR Play Index Music On Hold IVR Play Index Default Defaut jaa i 2 A P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Each field is described in the following table Table 57 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Select the SIP service provider profile you want to use for the SIP Provider account you configure in this screen If you change this field the screen Selection automatically refreshes SIP Account Select the SIP account you want to see in this screen If you change this Selection field the screen automatically refreshes Select ADD_ NEW to create a new SIP account on the P 2812HNU 51c Delete Click this button to remove the SIP account selected in the SIP Account Selection field This button is not available when you select ADD_ NEW in the SIP Account Selection field General Enable SIP Select this if you want the P 2812HNU 51c to use this account Clear it Account if you do not want the P 2812HNU 51c to use this account SIP Account Enter your SIP nu
79. IP address Protocol This is the transport layer protocol SourcePort This is the source port number SourceMAC This is the source MAC address Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed Remove Click the icon to remove a rule from the P 2812HNU 51c A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the rule Add Click this to create a new rule 16 2 1 Policy Forwarding Setup Click the Add button in the Policy Forwarding screen Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route Figure 153 Policy Forwarding Add Policy Name Protocol Source Port Use Interface Policy Route Setup Source IP Address Source Mac Address ipoe_0_0_1_1Jptm0_1 Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Policy Forwarding Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Policy Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard characters including spaces Source IP Enter the source IP address Address Protocol Select the transport layer protocol TCP or UDP Source Port Enter the source port number Source Mac Address Enter the source MAC address Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent You must have the WAN interface s already configured in the WAN screens P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 16 Policy Forwar
80. IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Use the drop down menu to choose Single Address or Subnet Select Single Address with a single IP address Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask IP Address for VPN When the remote IP address type is configured to Single Address enter a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the remote IP address type is configured to Subnet enter a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN Table 74 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec Setting gt IKE continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP When the remote IP address type is configured to Single Address Subnetmask this field is not available When the remote IP address type is configured to Subnet enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router Protocol This field displays ESP and the P 2812HNU 51c uses ESP Encapsulation Security Payload for VPN The ESP protocol RFC 2406 provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH Key Exchange Method Select Auto I KE or Manual from the drop down list box Auto I KE provides more protection so it is generally recommend
81. IP addresses the DHCP server on the P 2812HNU 51c assigns to the clients in the default and or user defined groups If you set the P 2812HNU 51c to assign IP addresses based on the client s source MAC address or DHCP option information you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN TCP IP settings for both the default and user defined groups See Chapter 6 on page 137 for more information P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 24 Interface Group In the following example the client that sends packets with the source MAC address 00 19 cb 01 23 45 is assigned the IP address 192 168 2 2 and uses the WAN interface ptm0_2 Figure 178 Interface Grouping Application Default ETH 2 4 192 168 1 x 24 ta m G2 00 19 cb 01 23 45 Click Advanced Setup gt Interface Group to open the following screen Figure 179 Interface Group Interface Group Interface Group Group WAN Aa Le oe a OT LANL LAN2 LANS LAN4 WL_ZyXEL4171B4 WL_Guest1 atmo 1 Default ptm0 100 eth4 100 WL_Guest2 WL_Guest3 q Note 1 Interface Grouping supports multiple ports to WAN interfaces and bridging groups Each group will perform as an independent network 2 When creating a new group you can select a LAN port manually or use criteria to group a LAN port automatically 3 If a criterion is configured for a specific client device please renew or reboot the client device attached to the modem to allow it to obtain an ap
82. IPSec Setting gt Manual IPSec Setting C Enable IPSec Connection Name Remote IPSec Gateway Address IP or Domain Name Tunnel access from local IP addresses IP Address for VPN IP Subnetmask Tunnel access from remote IP addresses IP Address for VPN IP Subnetmask Protocol Key Exchange Method Encryption Algorithm Encryption Key Authentication Algorithm Authentication Key SPI NAT Traversal Advanced IKE Settings Enable Manual ID Type Local ID Type Local ID Content Remote ID Type Remote ID Content Phase 1 Mode Encryption Algorithm Integrity Algorithm Select Diffie Hellman Group for Key Exchange Key Life Time Phase 2 Encryption Algorithm Integrity Algorithm Select Diffie Hellman Group for Key Exchange Key Life Time new connection 0 0 0 0 Subnet v 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Subnet E 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 ESP v Manual vj 3DES y 3DES 48 digit Hex MDS v digit Hex SHAL 40 digit Hex 101 Hex 100 FFFFFFFF Disable v Hide Advanced Settings 0 0 0 0 Main v 3DES v os 10240 3600 Seconds 3DES v MOS 1024bit v 3600 Seconds Apply Save DES 16 digit Hex MDS 32 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 75 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec Setting gt Manual LABEL DESCRIPTION IPSec Setting
83. LABEL DESCRIPTION Primary Compression Type Secondary Compression Type Third Compression Type Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want the P 2812HNU 51c to use G 711 provides high voice quality but requires more bandwidth 64 kbps G 711 is the default codec used by phone companies and digital handsets e G 711a is typically used in Europe e G 711u is typically used in North America and Japan G 722 is a 7 KHz wideband voice codec that operates at 48 56 and 64 kbps By using a sample rate of 16 kHz G 722 can provide higher fidelity and better audio quality than narrowband codecs like G 711 in which the voice signal is sampled at 8 KHz G 726 operates at 24 or 32 kbps The P 2812HNU 51c must use the same codec as the peer When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec Select the P 2812HNU 51c s first choice for voice coder decoder Select the P 2812HNU 51c s second choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the P 2812HNU 51c to accept the first choice Select the P 2812HNU 51c s third choice for voice coder decoder Select None if you only want the P 2812HNU 51c to accept the first or second choice Speaking Volume Control Enter the loudness that the P 2812HNU 51c uses for speech that it sends to the peer device Minimum is the quietest and Maximum is the loudest Listening Volume Control Enter the loudness that the P 281
84. LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA2 This field is available only when you select WPA2 Preauthenticatio aay i r n Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Select Enabled to turn on preauthentication in WAP2 Otherwise select Disabled Network Re auth This field is available only when you select WPA2 Interval Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 2147483647 seconds Note If wireless client authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server Update Timer sends a new group key out to all clients Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the P 2812HNU 51c The key must be the same on the external authentication serv
85. LAN Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker it s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place A good way to come up with effective security keys passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words For example if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point which you know was made in 1971 you could use 7Ododchal71lvanpoi as your security key Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks their signals are subject to limitations of distance interference and absorption Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal Interference may come from other radio transmissions such as military or air traffic control communications or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves Problems with absorption occur when physical objects such as thick walls are between the two radios muffling the signal 7 3 Before You Begin Before you start using these screens ask yourself the following questions See Section 7 2 on page 150 if some of the terms used here do not make sens
86. NAT Symmetric NAT Port Restricted Cone NAT Restricted Cone NAT Full Cone NAT C Enable Firewall IGMP Multicast C Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 6 Select and move the WAN interface atm2 in this example to the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list to use that interface as the default gateway Click Next Routing Default Gateway Default gateway interface list can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system default gateways but only one will be used according to the priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest priority if the WAN interface is connected No Backup WAN fucntion support Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Selected Default Available Routed WAN Gateway Interfaces Interfaces 7 Select the first option Select and move the WAN interface atm2 in this example to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list to use that interface as the system DNS server Click Next Default DNS Server Configuration Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces OR enter static DNS server IP addresses for the system In ATM mode if only a single PVC with IPoA or static IPoE protocol is configured Static DNS server IP addresses must be entered DNS Server Interfaces can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system dns servers but only one will be used according to t
87. Network Type C Ad Hoc Infrastructure C Add New Profile PN_Example3 551D_Example3 onnect to an Access point Connect directly to other computers Next Exit Scan Info T CPE_5257_00 T ca CPE_5548_AP T SSID_Example3 T zld_zyxel T ZyXEL gt Scan Select 3 Give the profile a descriptive name of up to 32 printable ASCII characters Select Infrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP s SSID in the Scan Info table and click Select P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect In this example WPA PSK Figure 18 ZyXEL Utility Profile Security Security Settings gt Encryption Type WPA PSK 7 i Back i Next i Exit 5 This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the previous screen Enter the pre shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting Figure 19 ZyXEL Utility Profile Encryption Security Settings gt Encryption Type TKP 7 gt Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Back Next Exit 6 Inthe next screen leave both boxes checked Figure 20 Profile Wireless Protocol Settings Wireless Protocol Settings V 802 11b IV 802 119 Back Next Exit P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 7 10 11 Verify the profile settings in the read only screen Click Sa
88. P C with IPoA or static IPoE protocol is configured Static DNS server IP addresses must be entered DNS Server Interfaces can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system dns servers but only one will be used according to the priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest priority if the WAN interface is connected Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces Selected DNS Server Interfaces ee Available WAN Interfaces Use the following Static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server 7 The summary screen displays Click Apply Save to save your changes and go back to the I nternet Connection screen WAN Setup Summary Make sure that the settings below match the settings provided by your ISP 0 0 33 Automatically Assigned Disabled Symmetric NAT Firewall Disabled Disabled Disabled Click Apply Save to have this interface to be effective Click Back to make any modifications P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 3 1 2 Internet Connection Settings for PVC 2 1 Click Add in the WAN gt Internet Connection screen to configure WAN connection settings for PVC 2 2 Select PVC 2 atm2 0_0O_ 34 as the layer 2 interface Click Next WAN Service Interface Configuration Select a layer 2 interface for this serv
89. P 2812HNU 51c s new settings Hide Network Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a Name SSID station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Enable Select this check box to allow the P 2812HNU 51c to convert wireless Wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic Multicast Forwarding WMF BSSID This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the P 2812HNU 51c when wireless LAN is enabled Security See the following sections for more details about this field Mode MAC Filter Click this button to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure whether the wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or denied to access the P 2812HNU 51c using this SSID P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 34 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 4 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless devices to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication Note If you do not enable any wireless security on your P 2812HNU 51c your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 61 Wireless LAN gt General No Security Wireless Setup Ba
90. P 2812HNU 51c and get the model name of the associated printer Security IPSec IPSec Use this screen to view the configured VPN policies and add edit or remove a VPN policy Status Use this screen to view and manage the current active VPN connections Firewall Incoming This screen shows a summary of the IP filtering rules and allows you to add or remove an incoming IP filtering rule that allows incoming traffic from the WAN Certificates Local Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage Certificates certificates and certification requests Trusted CA Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs Advanced Static Route IP Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes Policy Use this screen to configure policy routing on the P 2812HNU Forwarding 51c DNS Route Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 6 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION RIP Use this screen to configure RIP Routing Information Protocol settings Qos General Use this screen to enable QoS and set bandwidth Queue Setup Use this screen to configure QoS queues Class Setup Use this screen to define a classifier Policer Se
91. PBS Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM e A packet arrives If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet in bytes the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped e If the PBS bucket has enough tokens the P 2812HNU 51c checks the CBS bucket The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet in bytes Otherwise the packet is marked yellow P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Dynamic DNS Setup 20 1 Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they d
92. Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 210 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options PIR General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings t Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing _ Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable Pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 211 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security
93. Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings A Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet E zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable L_ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 447 448 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 212 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not d
94. Proxy 1 5 User Agent 2 sends an OK response to Proxy 2 after the call is answered This is also relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1 6 User Agent 1 and User Agent 2 exchange RTP packets containing voice data directly without involving the proxies 7 When User Agent 2 hangs up he sends a BYE request 8 User Agent 1 replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated Voice Coding A codec coder decoder codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals The P 2812HNU 51c supports the following codecs e G 711 is a Pulse Code Modulation PCM waveform codec PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples G 711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth e G 726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM ADPCM waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction the less space needed to describe it G 726 operates at 16 24 32 or 40 kbps e G 729 is an Analysis by Synthesis AbS hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds G 729 provides good sound quality and reduces the requi
95. Screen Click Advanced gt Static Route to open the Static Route screen Figure 150 Advanced gt Static Route IP Static Route Static Route Rules active Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Remove 1 ww 10 1 2 3 255 255 255 255 pppo_i Add Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 Advanced gt Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This is the number of an individual static route This field indicates whether the rule is active or not Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Netmask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Interface This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed Remove Click the icon to remove a static route from the P 2812HNU 51c A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route Add Click this to create a new rule Apply Click this to apply your changes to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 15 Static Route
96. To Number field on the right Enable Busy Select this if you want the P 2812HNU 51c to forward incoming calls to Forward the specified phone number if the phone port is busy Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right If you have call waiting the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call Enable No Select this if you want the P 2812HNU 51c to forward incoming calls to Answer Forward the specified phone number if the call is unanswered See No Answer Time Specify the phone number in the To Number field on the right No Answer Time This field is used by the Active No Answer Forward feature Enter the number of seconds the P 2812HNU 51c should wait for you to answer an incoming call before it considers the call is unanswered Enable Do Not Disturb Select this to set your phone to not ring when someone calls you Enable Call Completion on Busy Subscriber CCBS When you make a phone call but hear a busy tone Call Completion on Busy Subscriber CCBS allows you to enable auto callback by pressing 5 and hanging up the phone The P 2812HNU 51c then tries to call that phone number every minute since after you hang up the phone When the called party becomes available within the CCBS timeout period 60 minutes by default both phones ring e If the called party s phone rings because of CCBS but no one answers the phone after 180 secon
97. Traversal Advanced IKE Settings Enable Manual ID Type Local ID Type Local ID Content Remote ID Type Remote ID Content Phase 1 Mode Encryption Algorithm Integrity Algorithm Select Diffie Hellman Group for Key Exchange Key Life Time Phase 2 Encryption Algorithm Integrity Algorithm Select Diffie Hellman Group for Key Exchange Key Life Time new connection 0 0 0 0 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Subnet 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 ESP Auto IKE Pre Shared Key key Max 15 digits Disable vw Hide Advanced Settings Main SDES MDS 10240 v 13600 Seconds 3DES MDS 1024bit 3600 Seconds Apply Save P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 257 Chapter 12 IPSec VPN The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 74 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec Setting gt IKE LABEL DESCRIPTION IPSec Setting Enable Select this check box to activate this VPN policy This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall IPSec Type up to 60 alphanumeric characters to identify this VPN policy You Connection may use spaces underscores and dashes but the P 2812HNU 51c Name drops trailing spaces Remote IPSec Type the WAN IP address or the URL up to 31 characters of the IPSec Gateway router with which you re making the VPN connection Address Tunnel access from local IP
98. Users Guide 13 Table of Contents SA The Tigga Pon Serei sirsiran A ash ewan 187 GAT MOa POT CONO airian ai on siada oaiae anai ue N aeea 190 85 The DMZ Host SrO aain at cenaee seuccateety ctecebnaetsevicdind aadcenmeauvebherticaes 192 BO TMe ALG See oraaa aH on en madenoniARiiN 192 SB Technical Ae eenee cc ncn aiden dan ere Ree 193 Chapter 9 VOICE icai AASE a a AS Ni 195 Ol OONN a Aa aE 195 9 11 What You Can Do inthis Chapier acca sssacrosinteccssisinssivaees cntiesliieaomwesacentiouioates 195 9 1 2 What You Need to Know ADout VolP sscirsssnisicnonesrissinsnn 196 2 2 Berne TUB I ea a 197 23 The SIP Saind Sei asrar e E E Sunes 197 g The SIF Gen ce Provider CIE rranioperanenain aie 203 Sa DEP a RIES anioia a i RA 210 95 e PHONG Redon Sanan serinin A 211 26 The speed Dial SOE siniraan innia ania A rnaaaintien 212 o Call Histon Samman SEGET asseirai nnani aana AS EAn EASRA 214 SE CUTS Calls SEEN sirdir a SNA 215 2o neomnino Calle SEER aiii A A A 216 Ae TEC ROONG rpn a ao E 216 9101 KOU of SSNIGS OGI caiccesccadniccacacsasnuegeciccbsuedacceasstes saceitnegecinanniedasaententiactaendenee 225 910 2 Phone Services Cy CII secina tanda ia a ea kaa dia kenaa Nka 227 Chapter 10 File Shati sinirini ariii ariiraa araarida cira ari arini iea sidai piikaa 233 aaee an e P AE A P E N A A A E A E E A E A E EEE A A E A 233 10 1 1 What You Can Do im TAS SNS nenisniencncnnairnas a 233 10 LZ ana rou Negd to TOON suiriri 234 10 13 Baloe VOU Bogi sersa ce
99. WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection 1 Check if you set the DSL WAN switch on the back of the P 2812HNU 51c to the WAN side to have the P 2812HNU 51c use the Ethernet WAN port for Internet access 2 Make sure you connect the Ethernet WAN port to a DSL modem or router in your netwrok 3 Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet layer 2 interface and WAN services with the Internet account information provided by your ISP 4 Ifyou set up a WAN connection using bridging service make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP s DHCP server cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time You can only use one type of DSL connection either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time cannot create multiple connections of the same type P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting Your layer 2 interface must be in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC mode to create multiple WAN serivces for each connection cannot access the Internet anymore had access to the Internet with the P 2812HNU 51c but my Internet connection is not available anymore 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 6 on page
100. a Wireless NOT istisrisoricorecionsonsdia ioniene aE aa R s 33 Ll Eam Fanm O ieni a a a 33 2 oie CHO MOU EAF ansni O 34 2222 Configuring the Wireless Client ssc cardiastis monies iia renetnsi meaner 36 2 3 How to Use ATM QoS with Multiple PVCs and Interface Groups cccseeeeeeeeeeteeteees 43 231 C oiigunng PVCS niia A Facto ance eeeaes 44 da2 aain INA ee GONDE iiin aA A gi AASR 53 232 CO TONING RCN Grota IP cremains a EiS 57 2 0 4 Testing the DSL Connection GOUDSE sssrinin aee 59 P 2812HNU 51c Users Guide Lat Table of Contents 2 4 How to Allow Out of band Remote Management from the WAN scesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 60 2 4 1 Configuring Multiple WAN Connections ccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeneeeseeeeeenaeeeeaas 60 2 4 2 Configuring Remote Management lt a sssstasecccsastessaseecestnctecantesfasreubieddnddeaeesnontaieetndtions 70 2A Tesimo EG Conoc i aAa arash N A aes 71 Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator cccssseeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeesseneeesenseeeesesseeeeeseeseeeeeese 73 2 Web COPIER CN W sisii pind head aaesuetacniedeetaeandadeaeiane 73 Si 1 Abcessng Me Web GINO sos csc cccsesshatvgtia inann saga tenidzannivadeed balaats T3 3 A Wep Configurator MAN Sree uriinis anaa a aiaia a aE 74 921 Navigalon PARED cccccsisccrcscacnnirccesarntoeenncarcneennnnsanee ananuaeeann E 75 CREA ETE T E O T E EE I A A E A AE A E 78 ce US D an A N a 78 Part Il Technical Reference
101. a proxy redirect or register server SIP Server Port Enter the SIP server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value REGISTER Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server if your VolP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domain Enter the SIP register server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field Enter the SIP service domain name In the full SIP URI this is the part after the symbol You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters RFC support Support Locating SIP Server RFC 3263 Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c use DNS procedures to resolve the SIP domain and find the SIP server s IP address port number and supported transport protocol s The P 2812HNU 51c first uses DNS Name Authority Pointer NAPTR records to determine the transport protocols supported by the SIP server It then performs DNS Service SRV query to determine the port number for the protocol The P 2812HNU 51c resolves the SIP server s IP address by a standard DNS address record lookup The SIP Server Port and REGISTER Server Port fie
102. addresses Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the P 2812HNU 51c that can use the VPN tunnel The local IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router s configured remote IP addresses Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Use the drop down menu to choose Single Address or Subnet Select Single Address for a single IP address Select Subnet to specify P addresses on a network by their subnet mask IP Address for VPN When the local IP address type is configured to Single Address enter a static IP address on the LAN behind your P 2812HNU 51c When the local IP address type is configured to Subnet enter a static IP address on the LAN behind your P 2812HNU 51c IP Subnetmask When the local IP address type is configured to Single Address this field is not available When the local IP address type is configured to Subnet enter a subnet mask on the LAN behind your P 2812HNU 51c Tunnel access from remote IP addresses Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the remote IPSec router that can use the VPN tunnel The remote IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router s configured local IP addresses Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote
103. allow it Note If you configure filtering rules without a good understanding of how they work you might inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the protected network Make sure you test your rules after you configure them These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address Destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator Your customized rules take precedence and override the P 2812HNU 51c s default rules 13 3 The Firewall Screen Click Security gt Firewall gt Incoming to display the following screen This screen displays a list of the configured incoming filtering rules Figure 138 Firewall gt Incoming Incoming Firewall ACL rules Setup When the Firewall ACL rule is enabled on a WAN interface all incoming IP traffic is BLOCKED However some IP traffic can be ACCEPTED by setting up filters Choose Add or Remove to configure incoming Firewall ACL rules Note Firewall rules only be applied when firewall WAN interface is enabled v Active Firewall SN a is ben TCP or 192 TA 1 99 F example atm0 ptm0 100 UDP 255 255 255 0 276 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Firewall gt Incoming LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Firewall Select this check box to enable the firewall on the P 2812HNU 51c When the firewall is enabled
104. an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive forward and deliver e mail messages To have the P 2812HNU 51c send reports logs or notifications via e mail you must specify an e mail server and the e mail addresses of the sender and receiver What You Can Do in this Chapter The Email Notification screens let you configure up to two mail servers and sender addresses on the P 2812HNU 51c Section 25 2 on page 359 25 2 The Email Notification Screen Click Advanced gt Email Notification to open the Email Notification screen Use this screen to view remove and add mail server information on the P 2812HNU 51c Figure 182 Advanced gt Email Notification Email Notification Email Notification Email Notification Mail Server Setting 4 maximum of 2 entries can be configured Mail Server i crname Password Email Addre r karnisa tiome Mohave cy Wied a aas 25 example user example com Yes F P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 25 E mail Notification 25 2 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 127 Advanced gt Email Notification LABEL DESCRIPTION Mail Server This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server Address Mail Server This field displays the number of the port used for mail transport on the Port mail server Username This field displays the user name of the sender s mail account Pa
105. and service name for user authentication WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the P 2812HNU 51c which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by the P 2812HNU 51c to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the P 2812HNU 51c tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM is is a LAN and WAN networking technology that provides high speed data transfer ATM uses fixed size packets of information called cells With ATM a high QoS Quality of Service can be guaranteed ATM uses a connection oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit VC between two endpoints before the actual data exchange begins PTM Packet Transfer Mode PTM is packet oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard In PTM packets are encapsulated directly in the High level Data Link Control HDLC frames It is designed to provide a low overhead transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links as an alternative to ATM NAT Types This section discusses the following NAT types that are implemented on the P 2812HNU 51c e Full Cone e Restricted Cone P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup
106. and the DNS domain that it belongs to Optionally enter the m Hostname and Domain Name name server list and Hostname Domain Name domain search list linux h20z site Note that the C Change Hostname via DHCP hostname is global t C Write Hostname to etc hosts applies to all interfaces not just this one X Change etc resolv conf manually Name Servers and Domain Search List The domain is Name Server 1 Domain Search 10 0 2 3 especially important if this computer is a mail server Name Server 2 If you are using DHCP to get an IP address check whether to get a hostname via DHCP The hostname of your im host which can be _ Update DNS data via DHCP seen by issuing the hostname command will be set automatically by the DHCP client You may want to disable this option if you connect gt to different networks J Name Server 3 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP IP properties From the Options sub menu select Show Connection I nformation Figure 207 openSUSE 10 3 KNetwork Manager i Disable Wireless amp KNetworkManager y a Wired Devices Q Switch to Offline Mode X Wired Network T Show Connection Information E Dial Up Connections Configure a Options P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide
107. back of the device interface Descristion Type Rate vians02ip vianNuxid conntd GNP nar Firewalll mrve mo Noair atmo ipoe_0_8_35 ATM IPOE N A N A N A ptm0 100 N A Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled S iif ipoe_0_0_1 100 PTM IPoE N A 1 100 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled g fi eth4 100 ipoe_eth4 100 ETH IPoW N A ab 100 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled ff ff 2 Select PVC 1 atm1 0_0O_ 33 as the layer 2 interface Click Next WAN Service Interface Configuration Select a layer 2 interface for this service atrn1 0_0_33 3 Select PPP over Ethernet and click Next WAN Service Configuration Select WAN service type PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet Bridging Enter Service Description pppoe_0_0_33_ O Enable IPv6 for this service P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 47 Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 Enter the user name user isp net for example password qwert12345 for example and service name isp net for example for the PPP connection Click Next PPP Username and Password PPP usually requires that you have a user name and password to establish your connection In the boxes below enter the user name and password that your ISP has provided to you PPP Username user isp net PPP Password 900000000 PPPoE Service Name lisp net Authentication Method AUTO _ v C Enable NAT C
108. cells s Sustainable Cell Rate cells s Maximum Burst Size cells Select Connection Mode Default Mode Single service over one connection VLAN MUX Mode Multiple Vlan service over one connection MSC Mode Multiple Service over one Connection Enable Quality Of Service Enabling packet level QoS for a PVC improves performance for selected classes of applications QoS cannot be set for CBR and Realtime VBR QoS consumes system resources therefore the number of PVCs will be reduced Use Advanced Setup Quality of Service to assign priorities for the applications C Enable Quality Of Service Figure 38 Layer 2 Interface Configuration DSL PTM Ethernet WAN DSL PTM Interface Configuration Select Connection Mode Default Made Single service over one connection VLAN MUX Mode Multiple Vlan service over one connection MSC Mode Multiple Service over one Connection Enable Quality Of Service Enabling packet level QoS for this PTM interface Use Advanced Setup Quality of Service to assign priorities for the applications C Enable Quality Of Service P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 19 Layer 2 Interface Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION ATM PVC Configuration VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit This section is available only when
109. displays the identifying name of this certificate Type that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN Organizational Unit OU Organization O and Country C Certificate This read only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced certificate into a printable form or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Back Click this button to return to the previous screen P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide This field displays general information about the certificate ca means Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends Chapter 14 Certificate 14 4 2 Import Trusted CA Certificate Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen The P 2812HNU 51c trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates Figure 148 Trusted CA Import Certificate Import CA Certificate Enter certificate name and paste certificate content PS If the CA certificate is for WAN Management Protocol TR 069 usage please enter certificate name as acscert Certificate Name Certificate
110. dynamic IP address Enable DHCP Select this to identify the vendor and functionality of the P 2812HNU Option 60 51c in DHCP requests that the P 2812HNU 51c sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address Vendor Class Identifier Enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 such as the type of the hardware or firmware Enable DHCP Option 61 Select this to identify the P 2812HNU 51c in DHCP requests that the P 2812HNU 51c sends to a DHCP server when getting a WAN IP address IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier IAID of the P 2812HNU 51c For example the WAN connection index number DUID Type Select Other to enter any string that identifies the P 2812HNU 51c in the DUI D field Select DUI D LL DUID Based on Link layer Address to enter the P 2812HNU 51c s hardware address that is the MAC address in the DUID field Select DUID EN DUID Assigned by Vendor Based on Enterprise Number to enter the vendor s registered private enterprise number DUID Enter the DHCP Unique Identifier DUID of the P 2812HNU 51c This field is not available when you select DUID EN in the DUID Type field Identifier Enter a unique identifier assigned by the vendor This field is available when you select DUI D EN in the DUI D Type field Enable DHCP Option 125 Select this to add vendor specific information to DHCP requests that the P 2812HNU 51c sends to a DHCP server when getting a
111. gt Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the P 2812HNU 51c it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 5 on page 29 forgot the password 1 The default admin password is 1234 and the default user password is user 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 1 5 on page 29 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address e The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 e If you changed the IP address Section on page 144 use the new IP address If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for forgot the IP address for the P 2812HNU 51c 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix C on page 445 4 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the P 2812HNU 51c with the default IP address See Section 1 5 on page 29 5 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the ad
112. in the DNS server fields If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the P 2812HNU 51c s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 3G Comparison Table See the following table for a comparison between 2G 2 5G 2 75G and 3G wireless technologies Table 31 2G 2 5G 2 75G 3G and 3 5G Wireless Technologies MOBILE PHONE AND DATA STANDARDS DATA NAME TYPE SPEED GSM BASED CDMA BASED 2G Circuit GSM Global System for Mobile Interim Standard 95 IS 95 the Slow switched Communications Personal first CDMA based digital cellular Handy phone System PHS etc standard pioneered by Qualcomm A The brand name for IS 95 is cdmaOne IS 95 is also known as TIA EIA 95 2 5G Packet GPRS General Packet Radio CDMA2000 is a hybrid 2 5G 3G switched Services High Speed Circuit protocol of mobile Switched Data HSCSD etc telecommunications standards that 2 75G Packet Enhanced Data rates for GSM USR CON a WiUEiple access switched Evolution EDGE Enhanced scheme for digital radio GPRS EGPRS etc CDMA2000 1xRTT 1 times Radio Transmission Technology is the core CDMA2000 wireless air interface standard It is also known as 1x 1xRTT or IS 2000 and considered to be a 2 5G or 2 75G technology 3G Packet UMTS Universal Mobile CDMA2000 EV DO Evolution Data swi
113. information Figure 78 WPS Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE REGISTRAR p a lt Q Q Q SECURITY INFO CLIENT 1 AP1 In step 2 you add another wireless client to the network You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network In this case AP1 must be the registrar since it is configured it already has security information for the network AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2 Figure 79 WPS Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR p EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 o AP1 Laa we ENROLLEE o YA 6 cK 4e CLIENT 2 In step 3 you add another access point AP2 to your network AP2 is out of range of AP1 so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN point However you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead Figure 80 WPS Example Network Step 3 B EXISTING CONNECTION CLIENT 1 AP1 REGISTRAR J amp CLIENT 2 Ss ENROLLEE CUp Yn ty o ay P AP2 7 11 4 5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware e WPS works in Infrastructure networks only where an AP and a wireless client communicate It does not work in Ad Hoc networks where there is no AP e
114. installation is complete select Start gt All Programs gt Dibbler DHCPv6 gt Client I nstall as service 3 Select Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 489 Appendix F IPv6 4 Double click Dibbler a DHCPv6 client 5h Services File Action View Help B Om gt Sy Services Local i Services Local Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As amp 4Dcom Server Process Launcher Provides la Started Automatic Local System m n Manages n 3 g oma oca Start the service Sa Dibbler a DHCPv6 client Dibbler a i Local Syst Bq Distributed Transaction Coordinator Coordinate Manual Network 5 Description Dns Client Resolves a Started Automatic Network 5 Dibbler a portable DHCPv6 SRy Error Reporting Service Allows erro Started Automatic Local System This is DHCPv6 cli 3 Event Log Enables ev Started Automatic Local System RS cient version Sy Extensible Authentication Protocol Provides wi Manual Local System 0 7 2 Sy Fast User Switching Compatibility Provides m Manual Local System Bs FLEXnet Licensing Service This servic Manual Local System see 3 a 3 Extended 5 Click Start and then OK Dibbler a DHCPv client Properties Local Computer General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name DHCPv6Client Display name Dibbler a DHCP v6 client Descri
115. is disabled This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You have to register SIP accounts with a SIP server to use VoIP Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in Vol P gt SIP gt SIP Account Not Registered The last time the P 2812HNU 51c tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed Use the Register button to register the account again The P 2812HNU 51c automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the P 2812HNU 51c or when you activate it Registered The SIP account is already registered with the SIP server You can use it to make a VoIP call URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in the VoIP gt SIP screens P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 2 1 3G Status NeedPIN Click the NeedPIN link under Interface Status of the Status screen to access this screen Use this screen to enter the right PIN code for your 3G card Figure 26 Status gt Need PIN Q Note Ente 3G Warning Status Incorrect PIN code Enter PIN code again PIN remaining authentication Times 3 ring the wrong PIN code 3 times will lock SIM card The following ta ble describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Status gt Need PIN LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter PIN code Enter the correct PIN code fo
116. mi P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 18 Layer 2 Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Select an interface for which you want to configure here PTM The P 2812HNU 51c uses the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port ATM The P 2812HNU 51c uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port Ethernet The P 2812HNU 51c transmits data over the Ethernet WAN port Select this if you have a DSL router or modem in your network already Current Mode This displays whether the P 2812HNU 51c uses the DSL port or Ethernet WAN port for Internet access When you set the DSL WAN switch on the back of the P 2812HNU 51c to the DSL side this displays PTM ATM WAN The WAN port will be disabled automatically When you set the DSL WAN switch to the WAN side this displays ETH WAN The DSL port will be disabled automatically This allows the P 2812HNU 51c to work as an Ethernet gateway instead of a DSL router To access the Internet connect the WAN port to a broadband modem or router Interface This is the name of the interface Vpi This is the Virtual Path Identifier VPI Vci This is the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI Category This is the ATM traffic class Link Type This is the DSL link type of the ATM layer 2 interface Connection Mode This displays the connection mode
117. need to contact your ISP for a new SIM card New PIN code Configure a PIN code for the SIM card You can specify any four to eight digits to have a new PIN code or enter the previous PIN code PUK remaining authentication times This field displays how many times you can still enter a wrong PUK code before your ISP disables your SIM card permanently Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 2 3 WAN Service Statistics Click Status gt WLAN Service Statistics to access this screen Use this screen to view the WAN statistics Figure 28 Status gt WAN Service Statistics WAN Services Statistics coe co oe oo ptmO_1 ipoe_O_0_ a z 1494108 5082 B ptmo_2 br_0_o 0 i o o A 0 Refresh Interval 5 B Set Interval The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Status gt WAN Service Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the name of the WAN interface used by this connection A default name ipoax atmx where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer 2 interfaces using different VPI and or VCI values or ptmO indicates the DSL port The pppx name where x starts from 1 and is the index number of PPP connection on the P 2812HNU 51c indicates a PPP connection via any one of the WAN interface eth4 indicates the Ethernet WAN interface th
118. of two ways e An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients The wireless clients connect to the access points e An ad hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Network Names Each network must have a name referred to as the SSID Service Set Dentifier The service set is the network so the service set identifier is the network s name This helps you identify your wireless network when wireless networks coverage areas overlap and you have a variety of networks to choose from Radio Channels In the radio spectrum there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed civilian use For the purposes of wireless networking these bands are divided into numerous channels This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another When you create a network you must select a channel to use Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another the number of available channels also varies Wireless Security By their nature radio communications are simple to intercept For wireless data networks this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves but also
119. on page 170 You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection For example you may just want to set up a network name a wireless radio channel and some security in the General screen 7 2 What You Need to Know Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication In the same way that walkie talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves wireless networking devices exchange information with one another A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers Like walkie talkies most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use However wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption Wireless Network Construction Wireless networks consist of wireless clients access points and bridges A wireless client is a radio connected to a user s computer e An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients extending a network s range Traditionally a wireless network operates in one
120. or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support_warranty_ info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Index A AAL5 398 ACK message 221 ACS 331 adding a printer example 242 ADSL2 398 Advanced Encryption Standard See AES AES 477 AH 268 ALG 192 algorithms 268 alternative subnet mask notation 458 antenna 395 directional 482 gain 481 omni directional 482 AP access point 469 Application Layer Gateway 192 applications Internet access 24 arp 409 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 126 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 see AAL5 Auto Configuration Server see ACS 331 auto negotiating rate adaptation 398 backup 374 Basic Service Set See BSS 467 blinking LEDs 31 broadcast 133 BSS 467 BYE request 221 Index C CA 281 475 call history 214 incoming calls 216 outgoing calls 215 call hold 228 230 call service mode 227 229 call transfer 229 230 call waiting 228 230 Canonical Format Indicator See CFI CBR Continuous Bit Rate 104 CCMs 379 certificate details 286 factory default 282 Certificate Authority See CA certificates 281 authentication 281 CA creating 283 importing 284 288 pu
121. other P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix G Common Services Table 161 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling GRE Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS U
122. other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The P 2812HNU 51c may be referred to as the P 2812HNU 51c the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a Shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The P 2812HNU 51c icon is
123. policy Enable This field displays whether the VPN policy is active or not A yellow bulb signifies that this VPN policy is active A gray bulb signifies that this VPN policy is not active Connection This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy Name Remote This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router Gateway Local This is the IP address of computer s on your local network behind your Addresses P 2812HNU 51c Remote This is the IP address of computer s on the remote network behind the Addresses remote IPSec router Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the VPN configuration Click the Remove icon to remove an existing VPN configuration 12 3 1 The IPSec Setting Screen Click the Add button or a policy s Edit icon in the IPSec VPN screen to edit VPN policies P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN Note The P 2812HNU 51c uses the system default gateway interface s WAN IP address as its WAN IP address to set up a VPN tunnel Figure 131 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec Setting gt IKE IPSec Setting C Enable IPSec Connection Name Remote IPSec Gateway Address IP or Domain Name Tunnel access from local IP addresses IP Address for VPN IP Subnetmask Tunnel access from remote IP addresses IP Address for VPN IP Subnetmask Protocol Key Exchange Method Authentication Method Pre Shared Key NAT
124. poll interval you entered in the Refresh I nterval field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 3 2 LAN Statistics Click Status gt LAN Statistics to access this screen Use this screen to view the LAN statistics Figure 32 Status gt LAN Statistics LAN Statistics a Eee ee o o LANL 0 0 3721464 14275 0 0 E LANZ 638403 5843 0 0 4664083 17665 0 0 LAN3 0 0 0 0 3720674 14267 0 0 LAN4 0 0 0 0 3720272 14263 0 0 WLAN 7169503 55095 7 0 32382614 82678 203 0 Refresh Interval EE sec _ Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Status gt LAN Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the LAN or WLAN interface Received Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drops This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface Transmitted Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets drop
125. screen the P 2812HNU 51c automatically changes to use WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mixed mode and generates a pre shared key Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station The following screen displays Figure 70 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station WPS Station Add Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS stations to wireless network Push Button Or input station s PIN number Start q Note 1 The Push Button Configuration requires pressing a button on both the station and AP within 120 seconds 2 You may find the PIN number in the station s utility 3 This feature is available only when WPA PSK WPA2 PSK or No Security mode is configured SSO OEE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station LABEL DESCRIPTION Push Button Click this button to add another WPS enabled wireless device within wireless range of the P 2812HNU 51c to your wireless network This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device or a menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen Note You must press the other wireless device s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button Or input Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection station s PIN with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to your number wireless network You can find the PIN either on the outside of
126. set your phone not to ring when 95 Disable Do Not Disturb S meone calls you or to turn this function off 41 Enable Call Waiting Use these to allow you to put a call on hold when 41 Disable Call Waiting are answering another or to turn this function AEH IVR Use these to set up Interactive Voice Response IVR IVR allows you to record custom caller ringing tones the sound a caller hears before you pick up the phone and on hold tones the sound someone hears when you put their call on hold HHHH Internal Call Call the phone s connected to the P 2812HNU 51c 82 One Shot Caller Display Activate or deactivate caller ID for the next call only Call 67 One Shot Caller Hidden Call P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 231 Chapter 9 Voice 232 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide File Sharing 10 1 Overview Share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your P 2812HNU 51c with users on your network The following figure is an overview of the P 2812HNU 51c s file server feature Computers A and B can access files on a USB device C which is connected to the P 2812HNU 51c Figure 101 File Sharing Overview e See Section 10 1 2 on page 234 for an explanation of file sharing terms e See Section 10 2 1 on page 237 for file sharing examples 10 1 1 What You Can Do in this chapter The File Sharing screen lets you enable file sharing server on the P 2812HNU
127. some example uses for which the P 2812HNU 51c is well suited 1 4 1 Internet Access You can have up to eight WAN services over one ADSL VDSL or Ethernet WAN line The P 2812HNU 51c cannot work in ADSL VDSL and Ethernet WAN mode at the same time Computers can connect to the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN ports or wirelessly You can also configure IP filtering on the P 2812HNU 51c for secure Internet access When the IP filter is on all incoming traffic from the Internet to your P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files 1 4 1 1 DSL Your P 2812HNU 51c provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack Figure 1 Internet Access Application DSL Bridging 1 4 1 2 Ethernet WAN If you prefer not to use a DSL line and you have another broadband modem or router such as ADSL available you can push the DSL WAN switch on the rear panel to the WAN side and connect the WAN port to the broadband modem or P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c router This way you can access the Internet via an Ethernet connection and still use the QoS Firewall and VolP functions on the P 2812HN
128. still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 477 Appendix E Wireless LANs authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supp
129. subnet masks using both notations Table 146 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNETMASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 220 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting Oe SSeS eee ees a i i I i I i I a I i I I I I i i l i l i r 5 D a I 192 168 1 0 24 q a See ema ee eee ee eee You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowin
130. sure that WPS worked check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful 7 11 4 2 PIN Configuration Each WPS enabled device has its own PIN Personal Identification Number This may either be static it cannot be changed or dynamic in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface 176 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Use the PIN method instead of the push button configuration PBC method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other However you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method When you use the PIN method you must enter the PIN from one device usually the wireless client into the second device usually the Access Point or wireless router Then when WPS is activated on the first device it presents its PIN to the second device If the PIN matches one device sends the network and security information to the other allowing it to join the network Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router referred to here as the AP and a client device using the PIN method Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices Access the WPS section of the AP s configur
131. the destination IP address of the final system behind the VPN gateway The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header 12 5 3 IKE Phases There are two phases to every IKE Internet Key Exchange negotiation phase 1 Authentication and phase 2 Key Exchange A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec Figure 136 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA Phase Phase 2 IKE SA IPSec SA In phase 1 you must e Choose a negotiation mode e Authenticate the connection by entering a pre shared key e Choose an encryption algorithm e Choose an authentication algorithm P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN 12 5 4 12 5 5 e Choose a Diffie Hellman public key cryptography key group DH1 or DH2 e Set the IKE SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established the IPSec SA stays connected In phase 2 you must e Choose an encryption algorithm e Choose an authentication algorithm e Choose a Diffie Hellman public key cryptography key group Set the IPSec SA lifetime This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay up before it times out The P 2812HNU 51c automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is t
132. the following table for information on the labels Figure 139 Firewall gt Incoming Add the filter Active Filter Name Protocol Add Firewall ACL rule Incoming The screen allows you to create a filter rule to identify incoming IP traffic by specifying a new filter name and atleast one condition below All of the specified conditions in this filter rule must be satisfied for the rule to take effect Click ApplySave to save and activate TCPAUDP Source IP address Source Subnet Mask Source Port port or portiport Destination IP address Destination Subnet Mask Interface Destination Port port or portpart M SelectAll V ipoe_0_0_1_1 ptm0_1 Back The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Firewall gt Incoming Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the rule Filter Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 printable English keyboard characters including spaces To add a firewall rule you need to configure at least one of the following fields except the Interface field Protocol Select the transport layer protocol TCP UDP TCP UDP or ICMP and enter the protocol service type number in the port field Select NONE to apply the rule to any protocol Source IP Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Source Subnet Mask Enter the source subnet mask Sou
133. the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the P
134. this button to create a new entry No This is the index number of this entry Active Select the check box to enable the policer Name This field displays the descriptive name of this policer Regulated This field displays the name of a QoS classifier Classes Meter Type This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer Parameter This field displays the parameters configured for the metering algorithm in the policer Action This field displays the actions taken on the matched traffic Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the policer Click the Remove icon to delete an existing policer Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS 19 6 1 Adding a QoS Policer Click the Add button or the edit icon in the Policer Setup screen to configure a policer Figure 164 QoS Policer Setup Add Policer Enable Name Meter Type Two Rate Three Color Marker v Committed Rate kbps Committed Burst Size kbytes Peak Rate kbps Peak Burst Size kbytes Conforming Action Pass v Partial Conforming Action Pass vi Non Conforming Action Drop v Regulated Classes Member Setting Available Class Selected Class Class 2 Class_A Apply Cancel The following table des
135. ties 125 12 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 6 LAN ac ee ep re a eC So ee a oP On reer ge Nee ne eee nP eee 137 SARE O a Santee II Sennen E TE cero mene AE P A tomer nna cot E omer ATAA Rt eer et tert 137 6 1 1 Whal Yeu CanDo inthis Chaplet sieisenco aiaia paa 137 e2 Whal OIG TO KNOWN ius ck ccwishiseastaalninssieasaineseutan angus DaS NE aao aA SE SNA Aake 138 Gk Tie LAN UP OOO scania n 139 6A The LAN IPG Cre ett socii 142 0G Tecnica RECENSE ae ene eee omene RET ener err enne tee renters caret ret cenentert Tomtnrrt Trent nearer etre tre 143 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN vaisscssiscsiniassntsaincssiecinsacaicstaisadassnsanssasesiaassiaanniaacissessaiadaceissteid sdaiasiassatsciidaaniaseasicks 149 BT cap eea E kc E E A E E EE cede need A caadeu mde caeeuated teaaanta ceed 149 LAA What You Can D i this Chapier sseccsssadrsneispartesoisnnsausteriebiahieieauteelianilbie teensy 149 Foe PIEMONTE KION cacenni a a AO O 150 Fo STONE VOU BOUT arapa Hinanaaed isadeadyy asadadgyas maaaiys Lsacaxdentiaxs 152 2 E AL SG e E EA E IA N EA ES L A O E A 153 TA TNO SOCURI rotam N Naa ea eae 155 TOL VEF ENITI erria a eect eatead ee ean 156 PAO NPAT EPO araman aa E OR 157 TAA NPA AUNEniCaUON scccccncsscccusnsisvecedsaunssacessiuuvs sonasiascneaatniv i onadunurl denaddeivenaataivivens 158 PAPI D E E a ta pnciaun dase aaa ies eds E had del sa poe E E E ET 160 7 4 6 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule cccssssssteccensteoscamsisdonienvooiunneeeciu
136. to only allow IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 2812HNU 51c Select 802 11g Only to allow IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 2812HNU 51c IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices can associate with the P 2812HNU 51c only when they use the short preamble type Select 802 11n Only to only allow IEEE 802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 2812HNU 51c This can increase transmission rates although IEEE 802 11b or IEEE 802 11g clients will not be able to connect to the P 2812HNU 51c Select 802 11b g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802 11b or IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 2812HNU 51c The P 2812HNU 51c adjusts the transmission rate automatically according to the wireless standard supported by the wireless devices Select 802 11 b g n Mixed to allow both EEE802 11b IEEE802 11g and EEE802 11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 2812HNU 51c The transmission rate of your P 2812HNU 51c might be reduced 802 11 Protection Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed mode networks networks with both IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g traffic Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS CTS handshake This helps improve IEEE 802 11g performance Select Off to disable 802 11 protection The transmission rate of your P 2812HNU 51c might be reduced in a mixed mode network This field displays Off and is
137. type E mail Remote ID type IP Remote ID content aa yahoo com Remote ID content 1 1 1 0 Pre Shared Key A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation see Section 12 5 3 on page 269 for more on IKE phases It is called ore shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection Diffie Hellman DH Key Groups Diffie Hellman DH is a public key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel Diffie Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys 768 bit 1024 bit 1536 bit 2048 bit and 3072 bit Diffie Hellman groups are supported Upon completion of the Diffie Hellman exchange the two peers have a shared secret but the IKE SA is not authenticated For authentication use pre shared keys P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Firewall 13 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the P 2812HNU 51c firewall settings The P 2812HNU 51c firewall is a packet filtering firewall and restricts access based on the source destination computer network address of a packet and the type of application 13 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Incoming screen lets you view and configure incoming IP filtering rules Section 13 3 on page 276 13 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you r
138. using client device C 1 The client device A in the figure sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server B 2 The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C Figure 97 SIP Proxy Server SIP Redirect Server A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request Then the client device that originally sent the request can send requests P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 2 3 to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server B The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with C s IP address or domain name Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C Figure 98 SIP Redirect Server SIP Register Server A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity to IP address or domain name mapping The register server checks your user name and password when you register RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP the RTP Real time Transport Protocol is used to handle voice data transfer See RFC 1889 for details on RTP P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Pulse Code M
139. with other routers 18 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The RIP screen lets you set up RIP settings on the P 2812HNU 51c Section 18 2 on page 305 18 2 The RIP Screen Click Advanced gt RIP to open the RIP screen Figure 157 Advanced gt RIP RIP NOTE RIP CANNOT BE CONFIGURED on the WAN interface which has NAT enabled such as PPPoE To activate RIP for the WAN Interface select the desired RIP version and operation and place a check in the Enabled checkbox To stop RIP on the WAN Interface uncheck the Enabled checkbox Click the Apply Save button to star stop RIP and save the configuration Interface o o Version o Enabled 2 v ptmo_2 Passive ptmo_sS 2 v Passive Y Apply Save P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 18 RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 Advanced gt RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used Version The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the P 2812HNU 51c sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information RIP version 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Operation Select Passive to have the P 2812HNU 51c update the routing tabl
140. you configure an ATM layer 2 interface VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you Select DSL Link Type Select EoA Ethernet over ATM to have an Ethenet header in the packet so that you can have multiple services connections over one PVC You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN Ds for different services EoA supports ENET ENCAP IPoE PPPoE and RFC1483 2684 bridging encapsulation methods Select PPPoA PPP over ATM to allow just one PPPoA connection over a PVC Select I POA IP over ATM to allow just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC Encapsulation Mode Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are e VC MUX In VC multiplexing each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit VC To transport multiple protocols the P 2812HNU 51c needs separate VCs There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit PDU payload e LLC ENCAPSULATION More than one protocol can be carried 7 over the same VC This is available only when you select PPPOA in the Selec
141. you select Vendor Class ID DHCP Option 60 enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 of the matched traffic such as the type of the hardware or firmware If you select User Class ID DHCP Option 77 enter a string that identifies the user s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets Exclude Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS 19 6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic Click Advanced gt QoS gt Policer Setup The screen appears as shown Figure 163 QoS gt Policer Setup Policer Setup 1 test The QoS function has been disabled policers would not take effects Ses Policer Setup Create a new Policer Committed Rate Conforming Action 200 kbps DSCP Mark 58 x Committed Burst Non Conforming Size 300 kbytes Action Drop Class 1 SimpleTokenBucket example The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 106 QoS gt Policer Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click
142. 0 seconds for all custom tones combined Maximum Time per 180 seconds Individual Tone Total Number of Tones 5 Recordable You can record up to 5 different custom tones but the total time must be 900 seconds or less Recording Custom Tones Use the following steps if you would like to create new tones or change your tones P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 1 Pick up the phone and press on your phone s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu 2 Press a number from 1101 1105 on your phone followed by the key 3 Play your desired music or voice recording into the receiver s mouthpiece Press the key 4 You can continue to add listen to or delete tones or you can hang up the receiver when you are done Listening to Custom Tones Do the following to listen to a custom tone 1 Pick up the phone and press on your phone s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu 2 Press a number from 1201 1208 followed by the key to listen to the tone 3 You can continue to add listen to or delete tones or you can hang up the receiver when you are done Deleting Custom Tones Do the following to delete a custom tone 1 Pick up the phone and press on your phone s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu 2 Press a number from
143. 0 to 3 000 000 seconds almost 35 days A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys However every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected Apply Save Click Apply Save to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51 c and return to the IPSec screen Manual Key Setup Manual key management is useful if you have problems with Auto I KE key management Security Parameter Index SPI An SPI is used to distinguish different SAs terminating at the same destination and using the same IPSec protocol This data allows for the multiplexing of SAs to a single gateway The SPI Security Parameter Index along with a destination IP address uniquely identify a particular Security Association SA The SPI is transmitted from the remote VPN gateway to the local VPN gateway The local VPN gateway then uses the network encryption and key values that the administrator associated with the SPI to establish the tunnel Current ZyXEL implementation assumes identical outgoing and incoming SPIs P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN 12 3 3 Configuring Manual Key You only configure VPN manual key when you select Manual in the Key Exchange Method field on the IPSec Setting screen This is the I PSec Setting Manual screen as shown next Figure 132 Security gt IPSec VPN gt
144. 00110 100100 100010 100000 5 101110 101000 7 7 6 110000 7 111000 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Token Bucket The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted The bucket stores tokens each of which represents one byte The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size so the bucket can hold up to b tokens Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate The following shows how tokens work with packets A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet in bytes e After a packet is transmitted a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the bucket e If there are no tokens in the bucket the P 2812HNU 51c stops transmitting until enough tokens are generated e If not enough tokens are available the P 2812HNU 51c treats the packet in either one of the following ways In traffic shaping e Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket In traffic policing Drops it e Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark The P 2812HNU 51c may drop these marked packets if the network is overloaded Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interfac
145. 025 65535 RTP Port Range CAUTION RTP Start port and End Port shall be configured as even port Start Port 50000 1026 65494 End Port 65500 1032 65500 SRTP Support C SRTP Support Crypto Suite A4ES_CM_128_ HMAC_SHA1_80 Encryption and Authentication type DTMF Mode DTMF Mode RFC2833 Transport Type Transport Type UDP M OLAN Any WaN OMulti_WAN atmO ptmO0 100 eth4 100 FAX Option P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice FAX Option G 711 Fax Passthrough QoS Tag SIP DSCP Mark Setting 40 RTP DSCP Mark Setting 40 Timer Setting Expiration Duration 3600 _ Register Re send timer 1800 Session Expires 180 Min SE 120 Phone Key Config Call Return One Shot Caller Display Call One Shot Caller Hidden Call Call Waiting Enable Call Waiting Disable IVR Internal Call Call Transfer Unconditional Call Forward Enable Unconditional Call Forward Disable No Answer Call Forward Enable No Answer Call Forward Disable Call Forward When Busy Enable Call Forward When Busy Disable One Shot Call Waiting Enable One Shot Call Waiting Disable Do Not Disturb Enable Do Not Disturb Disable T 38 Fax Relay _ 1 65535 second 91 3600 second 90 1800 second 66 82 67 418 41 etek FAZZ ost 22 22 23 238 24 248 85 70 o5 95 Call Completion on Busy Subscriber CCBS Deactivate 37
146. 08 00 27 30 e1 6c Enabled 1500 not available Active Interface Statistics seeeytes 684 6 KiB Transmitted packets 1425 Transmission errors 0 Received bytes 219 5 KiB Received packets 1426 Reception errors 0 Collisions 0 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the K Desktop Environment KDE using the openSUSE 10 3 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default openSUSE 10 3 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE 1 Click K Menu gt Computer gt Administrator Settings YaST gt Administrator Settings Install Software a System Information A Home Folder A 2 My Documents amp Network Folders 2 4G Media 2 0 GB available Eavorites Applications Computer History User zyxel on linux h20z openSUSE 2 When the Run as Root KDE su dialog opens enter the admin password and click OK Run as root KDE su Please enter the Administrator root password to continue Command sbin yast2 Password P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Set
147. 0_1 v cs P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 Select PPP over Ethernet enter a descriptive service name Internet in this example and set the priority level to 2 and VLAN ID to 200 Click Next WAN Service Configuration PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet O Bridging Enter Service Description Internet Rate limit kbps Ml Tag VLAN ID for egress packets Enter 802 1P Priority 0 7 a Enter 802 1Q VLAN ID 1 4094 200 C Enable IPv6 for this service Baai P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 Enter the user name user isp net for example password qwert12345 for example and service name isp net for example for the PPP connection Click Next PPP Username and Password PPP usually requires that you have a user name and password to establish your connection In the boxes below enter the user name and password that your ISP has provided to you PPP Username user isp net PPP Password 900000000 PPPoE Service Name _isp net Authentication Method AUTO v C Enable NAT C Dial on demand with idle timeout timer Use Static IPv4 Address O C Enable PPP Debug Mode l Bridge PPPoE Frames Between WAN and Local Ports Multicast Proxy C Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy next 5 Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected Default Gateway I nterfaces list Select and move
148. 1 Diagnostic Overview The Diagnostic screens display information to help you identify problems with the P 2812HNU 51c The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by independent organizations A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts subscriber s network access In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts IEEE 802 1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management CFM specification which allows network administrators to identify and manage connection faults Through discovery and verification of the path CFM can detect analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs What You Can Do in this Chapter e The General screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host Section 29 3 on page 380 e The 802 1ag screen lets you perform CFM actions Section 29 4 on page 381 e The OAM Ping Test screen lets you send an ATM OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC Section 29 4 on page 381 29 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter How CFM Works A Maintenance Association MA defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point MEP ports on the device under a Maintenance Domain MD level An MEP port has the ability to send Connectivity Check Messages CCMs and get other MEP ports information from nei
149. 1 44 00 0e a6 2c 60 10 dynamic 172 1614 210 00 19 cbh e9 66 33 dynamic 172 16 1 254 00 04 80 4c a8 05 dynamic In this example the Physical Address indicates the associated MAC address A Type entry with dynamic means it was dynamically learned through an ARP response Use the arp s inet_addr eth_addr to manually add an ARP entry if you want your computer to connect to the host with the specified MAC address when you access the specified IP address You can additionally check whether the MAC address associated with the IP address that you are looking for is correct In some circumstances your ARP table may keep a wrong MAC address until the entry expires You can then manually update the ARP table To update the ARP table Type arp d inet_addr or just use arp d to remove all entries in the ARP table For example type arp d 172 16 1 5 Type ping 172 16 1 5 and press Enter Next use the arp a command again to check whether the MAC address matches what you expected If it does not another computer may be using a duplicate IP address on the network Change the IP address on either computer to an unused one to fix this problem The route command line utility allows you to display or adjust your computer s network table The routing table on your computer contains the default gateway P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting and other route information When your computer wants to access
150. 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission key1 1234567890123 Okey 2 1234567890123 Okey 3 1234567890123 Okey 4 1234567890123 MAC Filter Edit The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 36 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP Encryption LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Choose WEP from the drop down list box Mode P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 36 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP Encryption LABEL DESCRIPTION WEP WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy provides data encryption to prevent Encryption unauthorized wireless stations from accessing data transmitted over the wireless network Select 64 bit or 128 bit to enable data encryption Key 1 to Key The WEP key is used to secure your data from eavesdropping by 4 unauthorized wireless users Both the P 2812HNU 51c and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission Only one key can be activated at any one time Select a default key to use for data encryption If you chose 64 bit in the WEP Encryption field then enter any 5 characters ASCII string or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F preceded by Ox for each key If you chose 128 bit in the WEP Encryption field then enter 13 charact
151. 12HNU 51c ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 58 LAN and WAN IP Addresses DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the P 2812HNU 51c as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the P 2812HNU 51c provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured IP Pool Setup The P 2812HNU 51c is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers LAN TCP IP The P 2812HNU 51c has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup addresses follow their instructions in selecti
152. 2 V DC 2A Built in Switch Four auto negotiating auto MDI MDI X 10 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet ports RESET Button Restores factory defaults Antennas One attached external dipole antenna 2dBi One internal antenna 2dBi WPS Button 1 second turn on or off WLAN 5 seconds enable WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup PHONE Ports 2 RJ 11 FXS POTS ports USB Ports Two USB v2 0 ports for file sharing Operation 02e C 402 C Temperature Storage Temperature 302 602 C Operation Humidity 20 85 RH Storage Humidity 20 90 RH P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 31 Product Specifications 31 2 Firmware Specifications Table 139 Firmware Specifications Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default User Name admin Default Password 1234 DHCP Server IP Pool 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 132 Static Routes 16 Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the P 2812HNU 51c Wireless Functionality wireless devices only Firmware Upgrade Allow the IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g and or IEEE 802 11n wireless clients to connect to the P 2812HNU 51c wirelessly Enable wireless security WEP WPA 2 WPA 2 PSK and or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator to put it
153. 2812HNU 51c and remote IPSec router The second phase uses the IKE SA to securely establish an IPSec SA through which the P 2812HNU 51c and remote IPSec router can send data between computers on the local network and remote network The following figure illustrates this Figure 128 VPN IKE SA and IPSec SA ee e m_m m In this example a computer in network A is exchanging data with a computer in network B Inside networks A and B the data is transmitted the same way data is normally transmitted in the networks Between routers X and Y the data is protected by tunneling encryption authentication and other security features of the IPSec SA The IPSec SA is established securely using the IKE SA that routers X and Y established first Remote IPSec Gateway Address Remote PSec Gateway Address is the WAN IP address or domain name of the remote IPSec router secure gateway If the remote secure gateway has a static WAN IP address enter it in the Remote IPSec Gateway Address field You may alternatively enter the remote secure gateway s domain name if it has one in the Remote I PSec Gateway Address field You can also enter a remote IPSec gateway s domain name in the Remote I PSec Gateway Address field if the remote gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS The P 2812HNU 51c has to rebuild the VPN tunnel each time the remote gateway s WAN IP address changes there may be a delay until the DDNS servers are
154. 2HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions including without limitation not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY 30 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyX
155. 2HNU 51c uses for speech that it receives from the peer device Minimum is the quietest and Maximum is the loudest Enable G 168 Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of Echo your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk Cancellation Enable VAD Select this if the P 2812HNU 51c should stop transmitting when you are Voice Active not speaking This reduces the bandwidth the P 2812HNU 51c uses Detector Call Features Send Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VolP phone calls Clear this if you do not want to send identification Enable Call Select this to enable call transfer on the P 2812HNU 51c This allows Transfer you to transfer an incoming call that you have answered to another phone Enable Call Select this to enable call waiting on the P 2812HNU 51c This allows Waiting you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone number P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Table 57 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Call Waiting Reject Timer Specify a time of seconds that the P 2812HNU 51c waits before rejecting the second call if you do not answer it Enable Select this if you want the P 2812HNU 51c to forward all incoming calls Unconditional to the specified phone number Forward Specify the phone number in the
156. 3 divide the bandwidth 400000 bps by 424 Click Apply Save to save the changes and go back to the Layer 2 Interface screen DSL ATM Interface Configuration ATM P C Configuration This screen allows you to configure an ATM PYC identifier VPI and VCI select DSL latency select a service categoryS Otherwise choose an existing interface by selecting the checkbox to enable it Select DSL Link Type Eo4 is for PPPoE IPoE and Bridge Ea O PPPoA IPoA Encapsulation Mode LLC SNAP BRIDGING Service Category CBR Peak Cell Rate cells s Select Connection Mode Default Mode Single service over one connection VLAN MUX Mode Multiple Vlan service over one connection MSC Mode Multiple Service over one Connection Back Apply Save 4 Click Add to configure another PVC 5 Enter the VPI and VCI values 0 and 34 in this example for PVC 2 Select Non Realtime VBR in the Service Category field Set the Peak Cell Rate as 1415 divide the bandwidth 600000 bps by 424 and set both the Sustainable Cell Rate and Maximum Burst Size as 1414 which is less than the peak cell rate P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 6 Click Apply Save to save the changes and go back to the Layer 2 Interface screen DSL ATM Interface Configuration ATM P C Configuration This screen allows you to configure an ATM PYC identifier VPI and VCI select DSL latency select a ser
157. 30 2 Turn the P 2812HNU 51c off and on 3 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP The Internet connection is slow or intermittent 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 6 on page 30 If the P 2812HNU 51c is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications 2 Check the signal strength If the signal strength is low try moving your computer closer to the P 2812HNU 51c if possible and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network for example microwaves other wireless networks and so on 3 Turn the P 2812HNU 51c off and on 4 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 30 4 Phone Calls and VoIP The telephone port won t work or the telephone lacks a dial tone 1 Check the telephone connections and telephone wire 2 Make sure you have the VoIP gt SIP Account and SIP Service Provider screens properly configured The PHONE light should be on when the SIP line is properly registered can access the I
158. 4 VCI 383 VID virtual channel 383 Virtual Circuit VC 126 virtual circuits 383 terminology 383 Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN virtual path 383 Virtual Private Network see VPN VLAN 132 Introduction 132 number of possible VIDs priority frame static VLAN ID 132 VLAN Identifier See VID VLAN tag 132 voice activity detection 224 voice coding 223 VoIP 217 peer to peer calls 212 VoIP features 27 VPI 383 VPN 253 established in two phases 254 IPSec 253 security associations SA 254 see also IKE SA IPSec SA W WAN Wide Area Network 97 WAN interface 89 WAN statistics 89 warranty 514 note 514 Web Configurator 73 WEP encryption 158 Wi Fi Protected Access 476 Windows Command Prompt 402 arp 409 command parameters 402 ipconfig 403 netstat 413 ping 405 route 410 tracert 407 wireless client WPA supplicants 478 wireless security 472 wireless station list 94 Wireless tutorial 33 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Index WLAN interference 469 security parameters 480 WLAN button 28 WPA 476 key caching 478 pre authentication 478 user authentication 477 vs WPA PSK 477 wireless client supplicant 478 with RADIUS application example 478 WPA2 476 user authentication 477 vs WPA2 PSK 477 wireless client supplicant 478 with RADIUS application example 478 WPA2 Pre Shared Key 476 WPA2 PSK 476 477 application example 479 WPA PSK 476 477 application example 479 WPS status 84 522
159. 5 mme Class SOU Sosan xteececdecdsccciiocini e Er 313 WE Re Class Edil cateratizacssuaatiaatean sas aegapaniecsntintsin paandviduass raaNid batvaled ela teiideaeeiuaatid ats 315 19 6 THe Gos Folicer Setup SOR ID niiair aaaea aa aa 319 TEGI PANIED a OS FOOF sice A eii 320 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Table of Contents 19 7 The 20S Monitor BCI pe sssersteees sicanedeersaiaaceseinaninestsssnnaneeaumiseinnnneesssamnteamusie sags 323 Ase MECN Pee OI ain ae iE SE sith dued ealauindlaukshaan S E sea duurcmsacndbases sen mndie ses 324 Chapter 20 Dynamic DNS Setup airis aai a ai 329 BOTOVE ena AEA E 329 20 1 1 What Yow Gan Dom this Chapter sssrinin sansanonin 329 20 2 What You Need To KNOW scccciaidaieradaskeaicniodathanatdetdeccdaleatdaiebicaasdenducedeensialacsiacnnldendiaua 329 20 3 The Dynamic ONS SCR ssania 330 Chapter 21 Remote PPS UT scrire adair aaa iaaa Sairas aaa 331 ALT OVEnIO N eero a 331 211 What You Can Doin this CARTE x ccccesnee sss etiedecctete eee aieiaa 331 21 2 The TR 06069 Bree wa scndasdcerceainsancs nsgnhennnapbetaniiosu do aah Kaaa E i ea aai aa RAAE 331 Zia e TRUO GONER daidan aanctc aoivadde tan vacedet ein decent 333 214 The INP a cle ast sree Aa a aE 334 21 9 The Sevice GM SOEBEN ssisiissisessiconescosinndehsssaungatacasaninndebes aa nuarea dander lt anmomacseedaumuota beans 336 BO ce IPF AGICS ee OD nE nade bceteae ied paneeeaetedans 337 ed PCCM GET WP PS E E E A 338 Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPMNP ssiass
160. 509 Name subject 6 action View vantage C CN ST JiangSu L Wuxi O ZyXEL OU sw2 CN localhost emailAddress selina sun zyxel cn ca Import Certificate The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 91 Trusted CA LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN OU Organizational Unit or department Organization O State ST and Country C It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Type This field displays general information about the certificate ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Action Click View to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate Click Remove to delete the certificate Import Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of Certificate a certification authority that you trust to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 14 Certificate 14 4 1 View Trusted CA Certificate Click the View button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen Use this screen to view in depth information about the certification authority s certificate Figure 147 Trusted CA View Name Type Subject Certificate Certificate Details vantage ca C CN ST JiangSu L W
161. 6734 0 0 15597 177 0 0 pppi 200 Internet 200 437899 6291 0 0 502261 6221 0 0 eth4 100 ipoe_eth4 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Refresh Interval 5 ee Set Interval Stop 2 4 2 Configuring Remote Management Follow the steps below to not allow access to the P 2812HNU 51c from the LAN 1 Click Advanced gt Remote MGNT gt Service Control 2 Select the Enable option and deselect all service options in the LAN column Click Apply TRO69 TRO64 SNMP Service Control IPAddress Service Control Service Control Disable Enable 1 FTP Enable E Enable 2 SNMP Enable M Enable 3 SSH Enable E Enable 4 TELNET Enable El Enable 5 TFTP Enable M Enable 6 HTTPS Enable E Enable 7 HTTP Enable M Enable 70 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 4 3 Testing the Connection After you finish all the settings in this tutorial you would not be able to access the web configurator from the LAN anymore Check if you can use the WAN IP address for the RemoteMgmt WAN connection to access the P 2812HNU 51c You should also be able to access the Internet using the computer which is connected to the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN port P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator 3 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Inter
162. 7 http www linuxgrill com anonymous iproute2 iptables 1 3 8 http www netfilter org openSSL openSSL 0 9 7f http www openssl org source license html library PPP 2 4 1 http www roaringpenguin com pppoe Samba 3 0 34 http www samba org SSH server 0 46 http matt ucc asn au dropbear dropbear html dropbear Srtp BSD license 1 4 2 http srtp sourceforge net srtp html Ssmtp GPLv2 2 62 http packages debian org lenny ssmtp udhcp 0 9 6 http udhcp busybox net zebra 0 93a http www zebra org Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation This Product includes Bridge utils 1 2 Busybox 1 0 0 Bftpd 1 0 24 Dnsmasq 2 48 Ebtables 2 0 6 proute2 2 4 7 ptables 1 3 8 MIPS linux kernel 2 6 21 5 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements NTFS 3G 1 231 Ppp 2 4 1 Samba 3 0 34 Udhcp 0 9 6 and zebra 0 93a under below GPL license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document b
163. 8 1 2 in decimal Table 143 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH OCTET OCTET OCTET OCTET 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 144 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size
164. A Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled ptm0 100 ipoe_0_0_1 100 PTM IPoE N A 1 100 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled j ppp1 200 Internet 200 PTM PPPoE N A 2 200 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled amp wi eth4 100 ipoe_eth4 100 ETH IPoW N A 1 100 al Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled g iif 2 Select ptm0 0_0_1 as the layer 2 interface Click Next WAN Service Interface Configuration Select a layer 2 interface for this service ptmo a_o_1 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 Select IP over Ethernet enter a descriptive service name RemoteMgmt in this example and set the priority level to 7 and VLAN ID to 300 Click Next WAN Service Configuration Select WAN service type PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet Bridging Enter Service Descri Rate limit kbps M Tag VLAN ID for egress packets Enter 802 1P Priority 0 7 z Enter 802 1Q VLAN ID 1 4094 300 C Enable IPv6 for this service 4 Select Obtain an IP address automatically and click Next WAN IP Settings Enter information provided to you by your ISP to configure the WAN IP settings Notice If Obtain an IP address automatically is chosen DHCP client will be enabled If Use the following Static IP address is chosen enter the WAN IP address subnet mask and interface gateway _ Enable DHCP Option 60 Vendor class Identifie
165. ADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting e Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting e Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA is
166. AINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein if any are the property of their respective owners This Product includes Ssh server dropbear v0 46 under the MIT Style License The MIT License Copyright c lt year gt lt copyright holders gt Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS ORIMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THEAUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALI
167. BEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to create a new classifier Order This field displays the index number of the classifier Active Select the check box to enable the classifier Class Name This is the name of the classifier This shows criteria specified in this classifier for example the interface Criteria from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier Forward To This is the interface through which traffic that matches this classifier is forwarded out DSCP Mark This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier 802 1P Mark This is the IEEE 802 1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier VLAN ID Tag This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier To Queue This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the classifier Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS 19 5 1 QoS Class Edit Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Class Setup screen to configure a classifier Figure 162 QoS Class Configuration Class Configuration Active Class Name a Classificaiton
168. Back Response LBR received from a remote MEP Linktrace Message LTM This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response LTR Save Click this to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Enable CCM Click this button to have the selected MEP send Connectivity Check Messages CCMs to other MEPs Disable CCM Click this button to disallow the selected MEP to send Connectivity Check Messages CCMs to other MEPs Update CC status Click this button to reload the test result Send Loopback Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM Loop Back Message to a specified remote end point Send Linktrace Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs Link Trace Messages to a specified remote end point P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 29 Diagnostic 29 5 The OAM Ping Test Screen Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt OAM Ping Test to open the screen shown next Use this screen to perform an OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC The P 2812HNU 51c sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the P 2812HNU 51c The test result then displays in the text box ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows e Virtual Channel VC Logical connections between ATM devices e Virtual Path VP A bundl
169. COMPUTERA netbios ssn 172 16 x x 0 LISTENING C gt The following table describes the three entries in the output example above Table 142 netstat a Command Output OUTPUT DESCRIPTION TCP A web server is available on COMPUTERA as an HTTP COMPUTERA http service is in a LISTENING state COMPUTERA 0 LISTENING TCP A computer with an IP address of 172 16 1 29 is accessing COMPUTERA http the web service on the COMPUTERA 172 16 1 29 4036 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA has established a TCP IP NETBIOS COMPUTERA 2744 connection microsoft ds with a NAS device AS microsoft ds ESTABLISHED P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Additionally you can use netstat e to display Ethernet statistics as the following example C gt netstat e Interface Statistics Received Sent Bytes 25250033 7060325 Unicast packets 38838 34744 Non unicast packets 38227 175 Discards 0 0 Errors 0 35 Unknown protocols 787 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Note Your specific P 2812HNU 51c may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported This appendix shows you how to configure the IP s
170. Chapter 31 Product Specifications P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Network Troubleshooting Overview The three most basic utilities for troubleshooting network connection issues are ipconfig ping and tracert This appendix gives a quick overview of them as well as some common usage examples Moreover three slightly more advanced utilities are also discussed arp route and netstat Note All command examples here use the Microsoft Windows operating system version of the commands Before Getting Started Before using the commands described in this section ensure that you have the TCP IP networking component installed and properly configured for your network adapter Click Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections and then open a Local Area Connection to display the following screen Figure 202 TCP IP Networking Component Local Area Connection Properties General Advanced Connect using E9 Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Etheme This connection uses the following items M dE Fie and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Tpi Siting v3 7 5 0 V Intemet Protocol TCP IP Uninstall Allows your computer to access resources on a Microsoft network Show icon in notification area when connected Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 401 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Note Most operating system
171. Click the Add button in the DNS Route screen Use this screen to configure the required information for a DNS route Figure 156 DNS Route gt Add DNS Route Domain Name Subnet Mask Use Interface 255 255 255 255 ipoe_0_8_35 atm0 Ne The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 DNS Route gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name Enter the domain name you want to resolve You can use the wildcard character an asterisk as the left most part of a domain name such as example com The P 2812HNU 51c forwards DNS queries for any domain name ending in example com to the WAN interface specified in this route IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for the resolved IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address This is to specify the size of the network number which determines the maximum number of possible resolved IP addresses for the same domain name Use Interface Select a WAN interface through which the matched DNS query is sent You must have the WAN interface s already configured in the WAN screens Apply Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 17 DNS Route P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide RIP 18 1 Overview Routing Information Protocol RIP RFC 1058 and RFC 1389 allows a device to exchange routing information
172. Click this button to create a new entry No This is the index number of this entry Active Select the check box to enable the queue P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Table 102 QoS Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This shows the descriptive name of this queue Interface This shows the name of the P 2812HNU 51c s interface through which traffic in this queue passes Priority This shows the priority of this queue Weight This shows the weight of this queue Buffer This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue Management Queue management algorithms determine how the P 2812HNU 51c should handle packets when it receives too many network congestion Rate Limit This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue 0 means no rate limit Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the queue Click the Remove icon to delete an existing queue Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c 19 4 1 Adding a QoS Queue Click the Add button or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue Figure 160 QoS Queue Setup Add C Enable Name Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit Queue Configuration 1 1 Dr
173. DP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide log into remote host systems Appendix G Common Services Table 161 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Open Software Announcements End User License Agreement for P 2812HNU 51c 1 WARNING ZyXEL Communications Corp IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND
174. DSL physical layer management protocol ITU T G 997 1 VDSL band plan 997 and 998 Support UO band VDSL profiles 8a 8b 8c 8d 12a 12b 17a VDSL speed up to 100 50 Mbps 700 feet Support Annex A Annex B and 5 band VDSL2 Rate adaptation OLR Bit Swapping SRA Seamless Rate Adaption Upstream power back off UPBO VDSL OAM communication channels Indicator bits 1B channel VDSL embedded operations channel EOC and VDSL overhead control channel VOC PTM Transmission Convergence PTM TC Dual latency xDSL framing fast and interleaved Trellis coding INP capability At least two symbols protection INP_MIN 2 up to 16 symbols INP_MIN 16 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 397 Chapter 31 Product Specifications Table 139 Firmware Specifications continued ADSL Standards Multi Mode standard ANSI T1 413 lssue 2 G dmt G 992 1 G lite G992 2 ADSL2 G dmt bis G 992 3 ADSL2 G lite bis G 992 4 ADSL2 G 992 5 Reach Extended ADSL RE ADSL SRA Seamless Rate Adaptation Auto negotiating rate adaptation ADSL physical connection AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer type 5 Multi protocol over AAL5 RFC 2684 1483 PPP over ATM AAL5 RFC 2364 PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 MAC encapsulated routing ENET encapsulation VC based and LLC based multiplexing Up to 8 PVCs Permanent Virtual Circuits 1 610 F4 F5 OAM Other Protocol Support PPP Point to Point Protocol link layer protocol Tra
175. Dial on demand with idle timeout timer Use Static IPv4 Address O C Enable PPP Debug Mode l Bridge PPPoE Frames Between WAN and Local Ports Multicast Proxy C Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy a 5 Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected Default Gateway I nterfaces list Select and move a WAN interface pppl1 in this example to the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list to use that interface as the default gateway Click Next Routing Default Gateway Default gateway interface list can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system default gateways but only one will be used according to the priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest priority if the WAN interface is connected No Backup WAN fucntion support Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Selected Default Available Routed WAN Gateway Interfaces Interfaces ppp1 D Back next P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 6 Select the first option Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list Select and move a WAN interface ppp1 in this example to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list to use that interface as the system DNS server Click Next Default DNS Server Configuration Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces OR enter static DNS server IP addresses for the system In ATM mode if only a single
176. EL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ZyXEL s AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT S PRICE BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements 10 11 DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES LIABILITIES COSTS AND EXPENSES INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTOR
177. Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Interval Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics Routing is based on the destination address only and the P 2812HNU 51c takes the shortest path to forward a packet Click Status gt Route I nfo to access this screen Use this screen to view the internal routing table on the P 2812HNU 51c Figure 29 Status gt Route Info Route Info redirect Flags U up reject G gateway H host R reinstate D dynamic redirect M modified CEES CCE COT a a A 172 16 31 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 ipoe_0_0_1 1 ptm0_1 192 168 1 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 u 0 bro 0 0 0 0 172 16 31 254 0 0 0 0 UG o ipoe_0_0_1_1 ptmO_1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Status gt Route Info LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination This indicates the destination IP address of this route Gateway This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this route s traffic Subnet This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route Mask P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 11 Status gt Route Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Flag Metric This indicates the route status Up The route is up Reject The route is blocked and will force a
178. ION SETTINGS PPP user name and password WAN IP address DNS server and default gateway IPOE WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway Bridging N A PPP user name and password WAN IP address DNS server and default gateway Default Mode VLAN MUX Mode MSC Mode Default Mode MSC Mode WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway PPP user name and password WAN IP address DNS server and default gateway IPOE WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway Bridging N A PPP user name and password WAN IP address DNS server and default gateway WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway VLAN MUX Mode PPP user name and password WAN IP address DNS server and default gateway IPOE WAN IP address NAT DNS server and default gateway Bridging N A e The 3G Backup screen lets you configure the 3G WAN connection Section 5 6 on page 122 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 2 What You Need to Know Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet or PPPoA they should also provide a username and password
179. IPTION Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the P 2812HNU 51c to update this screen Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics Interface Monitor No This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the WAN or LAN WLAN interface on the P 2812HNU 51c Pass This shows the transmission rate of packets which are forwarded to this interface and transmitted successfully Drop This shows the transmission rate of packets which are forwarded to this interface and dropped Queue Monitor No This is the index number of the entry Name This shows the name of the queue P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 323 Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Table 108 QoS gt Monitor continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Pass This shows the transmission rate of packets which are assigned to this queue and transmitted successfully Drop This shows the transmission rate of packets which are assigned to this queue and dropped 19 8 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the P 2812HNU 51c features described in this chapter IEEE 802 1Q Tag The IEEE 802 1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges A VLAN tag includes the 12 bit VLAN ID and 3 bit user priority The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the informatio
180. Interface IPv6 gateway This field is available only when you configure a WAN service with IPv6 enabled You can only enable IPv6 for a WAN service that uses the PPPoE or IPoE encapsulation method over the ATM or PTM interface Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 5 1 6 DNS Server The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service Configuration screen Note If you configure only one IPoA or IPoE connection using the ATM interface on the P 2812HNU 51c you must enter the static DNS server address Figure 48 WAN Configuration DNS Server PPPoE PPPOA IPoE or IPoA Default DNS Server Configuration Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces OR enter static DNS server IP addresses for the system In ATM mode if only a single P C with IPoA or static IPoE protocol is configured Static DNS server IP addresses must be entered DNS Server Interfaces can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system dns servers but only one will be used according to the priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest priority if the WAN interface is connected Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces Selected DNS Server Available WAN Interfaces Interfaces ptm0 100 eth4 100
181. Key Authentication Algorithm Type 16 hexadecimal 0 9 A F characters if you select to use the DES encryption algorithm or 48 hexadecimal characters if you use the 3DES encryption algorithm Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop down list box MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHAI1 Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA 1 for maximum security Authentication Key Type 32 hexadecimal 0 9 A F characters if you select to use the MD5 authentication algorithm or 40 hexadecimal characters if you use the SHA1 authentication algorithm SPI Type a number base 10 from 1 to 999999 for the Security Parameter Index NAT Traversal Select Enable if you want to set up a VPN tunnel when there are NAT routers between the P 2812HNU 51c and remote IPSec router The remote IPSec router must also enable NAT traversal and the NAT routers have to forward UDP port 500 packets to the remote IPSec router behind the NAT router Otherwise select Disable Advanced IKE Settings Click Show Advanced Settings to display and configure more detailed settings of your IKE key management Otherwise click Hide Advanced Settings Enable Manual ID Type Select this option to specify how to identify the P 2812HNU 51c and remote IPSec router P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide
182. LS are application level protocols that enable secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail Address address specified in the Account Email Address field If this field is left blank reports logs or notifications will not be sent via e mail Mail Server Enter the number of the port the mail server uses for mail transport Port Authentication Enter the user name up to 32 characters This is usually the user name Username of a mail account you specified in the Account Email Address field Authentication Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Account Email Enter the e mail address that you want to be in the from sender line of Address the e mail notification that the P 2812HNU 51c sends If you activate SSL TLS authentication the e mail address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well Apply Save Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen Cancel Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 25 E mail Notification P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 26 1 26 1 1 System Settings Overview This chapt
183. Local ID Content field Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Peer ID Type Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name Select E mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e mail address Select ASN1DN Abstract Syntax Notation one Distinguished Name to identify the remote IPSec router by the subject field in a certificate This is used only with certificate based authentication Content The configuration of the peer content depends on the peer ID type For IP type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection For DNS or E mail type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Phase 1 Phase 2 Mode Select Main or Aggressive from the drop down list box Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode Encryption Algorithm Select DES 3DES AES 128 ES 192 or AES 256 from the drop down list box When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications both the sending device
184. MP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group The P 2812HNU 51c supports both IGMP version 1 I GMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the P 2812HNU 51c queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the P 2812HNU 51c periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the P 2812HNU 51c LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The P 2812HNU 51c support
185. NEYS FEES TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT AT ITS OWN EXPENSE UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason including but not limited to if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon notification of termination you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies including backup copies have been destroyed All provisions relating to confidentiality proprietary rights and non disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement General This License Agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC Taiwan This License Agreement shall co
186. NGS INTHE SOFTWARE This Product includes OpenSSL v0 9 7f under the OpenSSL License P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 507 Appendix H Open Software Announcements OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This produc
187. NU 51c Use the SIP Account screen Section 9 3 on page 197 to set up information about your SIP account control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the P 2812HNU 51c use and configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device Use the SIP Service Provider screen Section 9 4 on page 203 to configure the SIP server information QoS for VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan Use the Region screen Section 9 5 on page 211 to change settings that depend on the country you are in Use the Speed Dial screen Section 9 6 on page 212 to set up shortcuts for dialing frequently used VoIP phone numbers Use the Call History Summary screen Section 9 8 on page 215 to view the summary list of received dialed and missed calls Use the Outgoing Calls screen Section 9 8 on page 215 to view detailed information for each outgoing call you made Use the Incoming Calls screen Section 9 9 on page 216 to view detailed information for each incoming call from someone calling you P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice You don t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account In fact if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen it is usually best to leave it at its default setting 9 1 2 What You Need to Know About VoIP VoIP VoIP stands for Voice over IP IP is the Internet Protocol w
188. NU 51c User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c 1 4 4 Wireless Connection By default the wireless LAN WLAN is enabled on the P 2812HNU 51c EEE 802 11a b g n compliant clients can wirelessly connect to the P 2812HNU 51c to access network resources You can set up a wireless network with WPS WiFi Protected Setup or manually add a client to your wireless network Figure 6 Wireless Connection Application INTERNEJ 1 4 4 1 The WPS Button You can use the WPS button on the rear panel of the device to turn the wireless LAN off or on You can also use it to activate WPS in order to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security Turn the Wireless LAN Off or On Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking Press the WPS button for one second and release it The WLAN WPS LED should change from on to off or vice versa Activate WPS Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking Press the WPS button for more than five seconds and release it Press the WPS button on another WPS enabled device within range of the P 2812HNU 51c The WLAN WPS LED should flash while the P 2812HNU 51c sets up a WPS connection with the wireless device P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c Note You must activate WPS in the P 2812HNU 51c and in another wireless device within two minutes of each other See Section 7 11 4 on page 175 for more information 1 5 The RESET Button If
189. Name GR1 WAN Interface WAN Interfaces used in the grouping PTM type None Oiipoe_O_0_1 100 ptmo 100 ATM type None Oipoe_0_8_35 atrm0 pppoe_0_0_33 ppp1 Oipoe_0_0_34 atm2 ETH type None ipoe_eth4 100 eth4 100 Only support 0 or 1 WAN interface on each WAN type LAN Interface Grouped LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces Lant WL_ZyXELO10001 LIC Criteria Automatically Add Clients With the following Criteria 3 GRI has been added successfully to the interface group list Click Add to create another interface group GR2 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 55 Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 Enter GR2 as the Group Name In this group we will associate atm2 PVC 2 as the WAN interface with LAN2 and LAN3 as the LAN interfaces Select ipoe_O O 34 atm2 from the WAN Interface list Select LAN2 and LAN3 from the Available LAN Interfaces list and click lt to add them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces Click Apply to finish the settings and go back to the Interface Group screen General Group Name GR2 p WAN Interface WAN Interfaces used in the grouping PTM type None Qipoe 0 0 1 100 ptm0 100 ATM type None O ipoe_0_8_35 atm0 ipoe_0_0_34 atm2 ETH type None ipoe_eth4 100 eth4 100 Only support 0 or 1 WAN interface on each WAN type LAN Interface Grouped LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces LAN4 AL _ZyXEL010001 Criteria
190. OMPUTERA 3237 PED Gach e292 1 155 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3240 172 16 1 29 1155 ESTABLISHED Ci e P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Use the a parameter to display all possible connections to your device not just the ones that are currently in use C gt netstat a Active Connections Proto Local Address Foreign Address State TCP COMPUTERA http COMPUTERA 0 IS ING TCP COMPUTERA http 172 16 x x 4036 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 2744 NAS microsoft ds ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 5152 172 16 x x ZyXEL com 0 IS ING TCP COMPUTERA 5152 localhost 4067 CLOSE_WAIT TCP COMPUTERA 5354 172 16 x x ZyXEL com 0 IS ING TGP COMPUTERA 27015 172 16 x x ZyXEL com 0 IS ING TCP COMPUTERA 40000 localhost 0 IS ING TEP COMPUTERA 40000 localhost 1120 ESTABLISHED TEP COMPUTERA netbios ssn 172 16 x x ZyXEL com 0 Is ING TCP COMPUTERA 4177 P72 1 6 ex xce1155 STABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 4178 V2 1 6 ETT SS STABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 4180 172 16 x x 1155 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 4182 V2 1 62xX48 21025 STABLISHED TCE COMPUTERA 4317 NAS microsoft ds STABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 4539 NAS microsoft ds IME_WAIT TCP COMPUTERA netbios ssn 172 16 x x 0 LISTENING TCP
191. Order Last v Forward To Interface Unchange v DSCP Mark Unchange v f 0 63 802 1P Mark Unchange i VLAN ID Tag Unchange Mi 14095 To Queue at iy l Criteria Configuration Basic E From Interface ETH1 v E Ether Type IP 0x800 v Source O MAC Address MAC Mask Exclude O IP Address IP Subnet Mask Exclude C TCP UDP Port Range lies Exclude Destination C MAC Address MAC Mask Exclude C IP Address IP Subnet Mask Exclude C TCP UDP Port Range pe Exclude Others 802 1P VLAN ID 1 4095 IP Protocol x L IP Packet Length PA DSCP 0 63 TCP ACK DHCP Vendor Class ID DHCP Option 60 Y P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 105 QoS Class Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Class Configuration Active Select to enable or disable this classifier Class Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 20 printable English keyboard characters including spaces Classification Order Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list Forward to Interface Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out If you select Unchange the P 2812HNU 51c forward traffic of this clas
192. P 2812HNU 51c System Location Specify the geographic location of the P 2812HNU 51c System Contact Trap Manager IP Enter the name of the person in charge of the P 2812HNU 51c Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to Save Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 21 Remote Management 21 5 The Service Control Screen Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt Service Control to open the following screen Use this screen to decide what services you may use to access which P 2812HNU 51c interface Figure 170 Service Control Service Control Service Control Disable Enable El seves a a FTP 4 Oo om S WOW NY HF Service Control V Enable V Enable SNMP E Enable Enable SSH V Enable E Enable TELNET M Enable Enable TFTP V Enable V Enable HTTPS E Enable V Enable HTTP M Enable V Enable The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 116 Service Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Control Select Enable to turn on service control Otherwise select Disable This is the index number of the entry Services This is the service you may use to access the P 2812HNU 51c LAN Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the P 2812HNU 51c from the LAN WAN S
193. P 2812HNU 51c Dual WAN VDSL2 IAD with 802 11n Wireless WBS o O oe at ba Pia a at Default Login Details i IP Address 192 168 1 1 ae User Name Admin account admin ee User account user Password Admin account 1234 a User account user zyx Firmware Version 1 02 Edition 1 06 2010 www zyxel com Copyright 2010 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the P 2812HNU 51c using the web configurator Related Documentation e Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access e Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com ET ET Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support User s Guide Forum Quick start guide CLI Reference Guide Support note Certification Declaration SNMP MIB File
194. P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 11 2 What You Need to Know Print Server This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers and which sends print jobs to each printer from the computer itself or other devices Operating System An operating system OS is the interface which helps you manage a computer Common examples are Microsoft Windows Mac OS or Linux Port A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer such as a process run by your web browser When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer the port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for Internet Printing Protocol The Internet Printing Protocol IPP uses TCP and UDP with port 631 It can run locally or over the Internet on top of HTTP It allows users to send print jobs to a printer cancel a previous print job and know the status of the printer and print jobs Supported OSs The following OSs support P 2812HNU 51c s printer sharing feature e Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 7 Windows Vista or Macintosh OS X and later versions 11 3 Before You Begin To configure the print server you need the following e Your P 2812HNU 51c must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network The USB printer must be connected to your P 2812HNU 51c e The computers on your network must have th
195. P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact_us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you
196. P Snooping Enable IGMP Snooping Standard Mode Blocking Mode IP Alias C Enable IP Alias IP Address IP Subnet Mask 2 3 4 Testing the DSL Connection Groups To test if the connection groups are successfully configured you can do the following connect your computer to LAN1 of the P 2812HNU 51c After a few seconds the IP address of your computer should be renewed to 192 168 2 x automatically If you can access Internet by using this DSL connection GR1 is successfully configured To test GR2 connect your computer to LAN2 or LAN3 of the P 2812HNU 51c After a few seconds the IP address of your computer should be renewed to 192 168 3 x P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials automatically If you can access Internet by using this DSL connection GR2 is successfully configured 2 4 How to Allow Out of band Remote Management from the WAN This tutorial shows you how to set up a dedicated WAN connection for ISP management of the P 2812HNU 51c and prevent the clients on the LAN from configuring the P 2812HNU 51c You set up two DSL connections with different VLAN IDs and priorities to separate clients traffic from management traffic The DSL connection for remote management has the highest priority Table 5 Multiple VDSL Connection Settings WAN INTERFACE DESCRIPTION CONNECTION METHOD VLAN ID PRIORITY ppp1 200 Internet PPPoE 200 2 ptm0 300 RemoteMgmt I POE 300 7
197. PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp ZyXEL grants you a non exclusive non sublicense non transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed the Software including any documentation files accompanying the Software Documentation for internal business use only for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival back up or disaster recovery purposes You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL and all implied licenses are disclaimed Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software Rather you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect Ownership of the Software Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 497 Appendix H Open Software Announcements 498 3 Copyright The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by International Copyright Law and trade secret law and by international treaty
198. PTION Missing Calls This displays how many incoming calls were not answered that day Total Duration This displays how long all calls lasted that day 9 8 Outgoing Calls Screen Use this screen to see detailed information for each outgoing call you made Click VoIP gt Call History gt Outgoing Calls The following screen displays Figure 94 VoIP gt Call History gt Outgoing Calls Outgoing Calls Call History Outgoing Calls SS a TT 01 01 2000 20 40 24 Phone 1 51267 0 03 17 2 01 04 2000 13 00 08 Phone 1 51268 0 00 00 3 01 04 2000 13 00 58 Phone 2 51267 0 01 56 4 01 12 2000 13 02 51 Phone 1 51267 O 57 11 5 01 13 2000 14 12 09 Phone 1 51268 1 09 33 6 01 13 2000 19 22 08 Phone 2 51268 0 17 54 Each field is described in the following table Table 62 VolP gt Call History gt Outgoing Calls LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to renew the dialed call list Clear All Click this button to remove all entries from the dialed call list No This is a read only index number time This is the date and time when the call was made phone port This is the phone port on which you made the call phone number This is the SIP number you called duration This displays how long the call lasted P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 9 9 Incoming Calls Screen Use this screen to see detailed information for each incoming call from someo
199. Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Bact ws pe Search E Folders Ea Address B My Network Places Local Network Network Tasks af Add a network place View network connections XEL Internet Sharing Invoke 2 ao Create Shortcut office network M View workgroup computers elete Rename Properties D gt Other Places P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 347 Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 6 Right click on the icon for your P 2812HNU 51c and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the P 2812HNU 51c ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway General ZEL Internet Sharine Manufacturer ZyxEL Model Name ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number Description ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 1 1 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Parental Control 23 1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL You can also define time periods and days during which the P 2812HNU 51c performs parental control on a specific user 23 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e The Time Restriction screen lets you give different time restrictions to each user of your network Section 23 2 on page 349 e The URL Filter screen lets you restrict home network users from viewing inappropriate websites Section 23 3 on page 351 23 2 The Time Restriction Screen Use this screen to view the sched
200. Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address This example shows a global address 2001 b021 2d 1000 obtained from a DHCP server C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IPV6 Addressie ai an a o wa ce ae te we e 00T s2000 Link local IPv6 Address i fe80 25d8 dcab c80a 5189 11 TPV4 Addresse se BS AOR ae wo amp SE LT 226 100 61 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway I fe80 213 49ff feaa 7125 911 172 16 100 254 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site e Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like e Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is USER DEFINED the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number e Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers e If the Protoco
201. Protocol 25 DNS Domain Name System 53 Finger 79 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 110 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 56 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 88 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A 192 168 1 33 IP address assigned by ISP P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 9 1 Overview Use this chapter to Connect an analog phone to the P 2812HNU 51c Make phone calls over the Internet as well as the regular phone network Configure settings such as speed dial Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls 9 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter These screens allow you to configure your P 2812HNU 51c to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line and to set up the phones you connect to the P 2812H
202. Pv6 is initiated on its interface It combines the prefix and the interface ID generated from its own Ethernet MAC address see Interface ID and EUI 64 to forma complete Pv6 address When I Pv6 is enabled on a device its interface automatically generates a link local address beginning with fe80 When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the P 2812HNU 51c is set to automatically obtain an Pv6 network prefix from the router for the interface it generates another address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router This is a routable global IP address DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for Pv6 DHCPv6 RFC 3315 isa server client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass Pv6 network addresses prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique Dentifier DUID which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages The DUID is generated from the MAC address time vendor assigned ID and or the vendor s private enterprise number registered with the IANA It should not change over time even after you reboot the device Identity Association An Identity Association 1A is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addres
203. RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group At start up the P 2812HNU 51c queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the P 2812HNU 51c periodically updates this information DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 133 Chapter 5 WAN Setup 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The P 2812HNU 51c can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses manually enter them
204. Search Type Internet Printing Protocol http Device Another Device E E URL http 192 168 1 1 printers USB_PRINTER Name 192 168 1 1 Location Print Using HP Laserjet 1022 Gutenprint v5 2 3 E The selected printer software isn t from the manufacturer and may not let you use all the features of your printer 4 y Add 7 The new network printer displays in the Printers list Figure 126 Printer List a ShowAll M W Click the lock to prevent further changes lil C Share this printer on the network Default printer Last Printer Used Default paper size A4 Print amp Fax 192 168 1 1 Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies Location Kind HP Laserjet 1022 Gutenprint v5 2 3 Idle Status Sharing Preferences Y lt gt gt 8 Your print server driver setup is complete You can now use the P 2812HNU 51c s print server to print from a Mac computer P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 11 7 P 2812HNU 51c Print Server Compatible USB Printers The following is a list of USB printer models compatible with the P 2812HNU 51c print server Table 72 Compatible USB Printers BRAND MODEL CANON MP 530 HP Desk et F380 HP LaserJet 1022 LEXMARK Z645 SAMSUNG CLP 300 252 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guid
205. Sideband Common Setup Network Name SSID ZyKEL4171B4 C Hide Network Name SSID C Enable Wireless Multicast Forwarding WMF q Note Only IGMP v2 report message is supported for wireless multicast forwarding function BSSID 00 23 F8 41 71 B5 Security Mode No Security v MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Click the check box to activate wireless LAN Wireless LAN Channel Set the operating frequency channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel or use Auto to have the P 2812HNU 51c automatically determine a channel to use If you are having problems with wireless interference changing the channel may help Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible The channel number which the P 2812HNU 51c is currently using then displays next to this field P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 153 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 34 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Bandwidth Select whether the P 2812HNU 51c uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or 40MHz A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps 40MHz channel bonding or dual channel bonds two adjacent rad
206. Spotlight Expos Screen Saver Hardware he Lage i 3 y va l Y C4 amp Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Internet amp Nest Mac Network QuickTime Sharing System han f s 2 i B Accounts Date amp Time Software Speech Startup Disk Universal Update Access 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Built in Ethernet from the network connection type list and then click Configure 6090o Network a gt show ait a Location Automatic Show Network Status is Built in Ethernet is currently active and has the IP address Built in Ethernet 10 0 1 2 You are connected to the Internet via Built in Ethernet Internet Sharing is on and is using AirPort to share the connection AirPort C sconnect 2 i al Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure I Pv4 list in the TCP IP tab ee0 lt Show All Network Q Location Automatic B Show Built in Ethernet Ry amp rCP IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Using DHCP zs IP Address 0 0 0 0 Renew DHCP Lease Subnet Mask DHCP Client ID If required Router DNS Servers Search Domains Option
207. T Trigger Port continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Trigger Start Port Trigger End Port This is the first trigger port number that identifies a service This is the last trigger port number that identifies a service Trigger Proto This is the trigger transport layer protocol 1 means TCP 2 means UDP and 3 means TCP UDP Open Start This is the first open port number that identifies a service Port Open End Port This is the last open port number that identifies a service Open Proto This is the open transport layer protocol 1 means TCP 2 means UDP and 3 means TCP UDP Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 8 4 1 Trigger Port Configuration Rule Setup Active Service Name WAN Interface Trigger Start Port Trigger End Port Trigger Protocol Open Start Port Open End Port Open Protocol This screen lets you create new port triggering rules Click the Add icon in the NAT Trigger Port screen to open the following screen Figure 85 NAT gt Trigger Port gt Add ipoe_0_0_1_1 ptm0_1 v TCP v TCP v Back Apply Cancel P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address T
208. TR 069 LABEL DESCRIPTION Inform Select Enable to activate remote management via TR 069 on the WAN Otherwise select Disable Inform Interval ACS URL Enter the time interval in seconds at which the P 2812HNU 51c sends information to the auto configuration server Enter the URL or IP address of the auto configuration server ACS User Name Enter the TR 069 user name for authentication with the auto configuration server ACS Password Enter the TR 069 password for authentication with the auto configuration server WAN Interface used by TR 069 client Select a WAN interface through which the TR 069 traffic passes If you select Multi_WAN you should also select the pre configured WAN connection s Display SOAP messages on serial console Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console Connection Request Authentication Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 21 Remote Management Table 112 TR 069 continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Connection Enter the connection request user name Request User Name When the ACS makes a connection request to the P 2812HNU 51c this user name is used to authenticate the ACS Connection Enter the connection request password Request i Password When the ACS makes a connection request to the P 2812HNU 51c this pass
209. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network You can easily check to see if this has happened WPS works between only two devices simultaneously so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll and will not have access to the network If this happens open the access point s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients usually displayed by MAC address It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar the enrollee or was not involved in the WPS handshake a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT 8 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the P 2812HNU 51c Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 8 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Port Forwarding screen lets you configure forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network Section 8 3 on page 184 The Trigger Port screen lets you change the P 2812HNU 51c s trigger port se
210. U 51c Figure 2 Internet Access Application Ethernet WAN WAN Bridging IPoE PPPoE Y Ethernet frere 1 4 1 3 3G WAN The USB port allows you to wirelessly connect to a 3G netowk to get Internet access by attaching a 3G wireless card You must leave the DSL or Ethernet WAN port unconnected and attached a 3G wireless card to use 3G as your WAN You can also heve the P 2812HNU 51c use the 3G WAN connection as a backup That means the P 2812HNU 51c switches to the 3G wireless WAN connection after the wired DSL or Ethernet WAN connection fails The P 2812HNU 51c automatically changes back to use the wired DSL or Ethernet WAN connection when it is available Figure 3 Internet Access Application 3G WAN P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c 1 4 2 VoIP Internet Calls You can register up to two SIP Session Initiation Protocol accounts and use the P 2812HNU 51c to make and receive VoIP telephone calls Figure 4 P 2812HNU 51c s VoIP Application e Calls via a VoIP service provider A The P 2812HNU 51c sends your call to a VoIP service provider s SIP server which forwards your calls to either VoIP or PSTN phones 1 4 3 USB File Sharing Use the built in USB 2 0 ports to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive A You can connect one USB hard drive to the P 2812HNU 51c at a time Figure 5 USB File Sharing Application P 2812H
211. U BSN a E 255 aoa WE See oe a inthe suis al aa iea aera mins 255 TET The Pet Seling SOGOU sceidkc cone cccdasatedeiccheniatiaststsens aanataediacheauendacnmanteiedaneekenedag 256 Tege MeN Key Sets saana a A antes tenis A 261 Ton COUN WRU GY snosininisere nane iiedatd ceijadacieead I E TEE 262 Tad Viewing VPN SIUE oniinn e aa 266 12 5 IPS66 YPN Technical Referente socrii dan aa ia an 267 T201 IPSec COT aE consan E as 267 Tene Ene E WT scnsuuntenuntiasamna nie nase nent aeieRtes 268 To WA FS tistics Pei xscecnal rasta baavindinedsprmnountens NE EAAS EERE 269 1204 ISON IME susarsan 270 TeSa eee sorely sil lad Reprerree eres er reer rr pre reeeree reer rer ey crrree tT errr er Teer ree tree rere rere rer ttre 270 12 5 6 VPN NAT ad NAT Traversal cigssssciviscnatssiiaaesiiesiaasniciiedatatieiiednssaeiaaasaaniion 271 V2 ID Type and OMEN aececiccanieiecsectasesiexedanegadeesonidessnssnies Oa Eas 272 E a E a E A T T veda E E E A E A 274 12 59 Difie Helliman DH Key Groups a cccidiescctacgsagsticncdaiconeaasulaasetcstvadeni Rudalagencaseeeienens 274 Chapter 13 PIP GWE ss isasesscsansnsnainnddaneasessnisisadsnsanidskakanteadaasesaasaenaidaadaneanesdadsasniaanannaasenanseiianedaasasisdtaaanasaaiinine 275 TS EE a tess icuarpi vinden ena hatein uaa E 275 131 21 What You Gan Do in this Chapier ssciiaieciseec nizssticeevaderdeslaxesdutecaniosmsaeuadcitreteneagieeees 275 13 2 What You Nedd 1o KNOW oeccnnnisabennininn iea a 275 ee Mme Frowa oO i aguan a E
212. Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data There are two versions 1 and 2 IGMP version 2 is an improvement over version 1 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup DNS DNS Domain Name System maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask 6 3 The LAN IP Screen Click Network gt LAN to open the IP screen See Section 6 5 on page 143 for background information Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IPv4 address and subnet mask of your P 2812HNU 51c Figure 56 LAN gt IP LAN TCP IP GroupName Default Ww IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Setup Enable DHCP DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Pool Size 32 DHCP Relay Relay Server DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Obtain DNS info from a WAN interface WAN Int
213. Use ESP security protocol in either transport or tunnel mode e Use IKE keying mode e Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints e Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A Finally NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the original header plus original payload which is unchanged by a NAT device The compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following table Table 78 VPN and NAT Sa moone NAT AH Transport N AH Tunnel ESP Transport Y ESP Tunnel Y Y This is supported in the P 2812HNU 51c if you enable NAT traversal ID Type and Content With aggressive negotiation mode see Section 12 5 4 on page 270 the P 2812HNU 51c identifies incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted This enables the P 2812HNU 51c to distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses Regardless of the ID type and content configuration the P 2812HNU 51c does not allow you to save multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses With main mode see Section 12 5 4 on page 270 the ID type and content are encrypted to provide identity protection In this case the P 2812HNU 51c can only distinguish between up to 12 different incoming SAs that connect from
214. Use this screen to change your P 2812HNU 51c s log settings Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your device Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device s configuration settings or reset the factory default settings Restart This screen allows you to reboot the P 2812HNU 51c without turning the power off P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 6 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Diagnostic General Use this screen to test the connections to other devices 802 1lag Use this screen to configure CFM Connectivity Fault Management MD maintenance domain and MA maintenance association perform connectivity tests and view test reports OAM Ping Test These screen displays information to help you identify problems with the DSL connection 3 2 2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields It is discussed in the rest of this document Right after you log in the Status screen is displayed See Chapter 4 on page 81 for more information about the Status screen 3 2 3 Status Bar Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration has been updated P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide PART Il Technical Reference Status Screens 4 1 Overview Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device sys
215. User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Full Cone NAT In full cone NAT the NAT router maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network The NAT router also maps packets coming to that external IP address and port to the internal IP address and port In the following example the P 2812HNU 51c maps the source address of all packets sent from the internal IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network The P 2812HNU 51c also performs NAT on all incoming packets sent to IP address 2 and port B and forwards them to IP address 1 port A Figure 52 Full Cone NAT Example Restricted Cone NAT As in full cone NAT a restricted cone NAT router maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network In the following example the NAT router maps the source address of all packets sent from internal IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network The difference from full cone NAT is in how the restricted cone NAT router handles packets coming in from the external network A host on the external network IP address 3 or IP address 4 for example can only send packets to the internal host if the internal host has already sent a packet to the external host s IP address A server with IP address 1 and port A sends packets to IP address 4 The P 2812HNU 51c chang
216. User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice After pressing the flash key if you do not issue the sub command before the default sub command timeout 2 seconds expires or issue an invalid sub command the current operation will be aborted Table 68 USA Flash Key Commands SUB COMMAND COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call After the second call is successful press the flash key again to have a three way conference call Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call Flash O8 Transfer the call to another phone USA Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call A on hold by pressing the flash key If you have another call press the flash key to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold there will be a remind ring USA Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number If there is a second call to your telephone number you will hear a call waiting tone Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call USA Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call that you have answered to another phone Press the flash key to put the caller on hold When you hear the dial tone dial 98 followed by the number to which you want to transfer the
217. VC 1 0 33 SSS PVC 2 0 34 Overview of what you have to do 1 Create PVCs using the Network gt WAN screens See Figure 2 3 1 on page 44 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Create interface groups in the Advanced Setup gt Interface Group screen to map logical LAN groups to the PVCs you created See Figure 2 3 2 on page 53 3 Configure IP addresses for devices in each interface group using the Network gt LAN screen See Figure 2 3 3 on page 57 2 3 1 Configuring PVCs Follows the steps below to set up two PVCs on the P 2812HNU 51c Table 3 Multiple PVC Settings PVC LAYER 2 INTERFACE WAN SERVICE 0 33 atm1 PPPoE pppoe_0_0_ 33 0 34 atm2 IPoE ipoe_O 0 34 Note Make sure you set the DSL WAN switch on the back of the P 2812HNU 51c to the DSL side 1 Click Network gt WAN gt Layer 2 Interface 2 Select ATM from the Interface drop down list and click Add po Layer 2 Interface Interface ATM v DSL ATM Interface Configuration atmo Choose Add or Remove to configure DSL ATM interfaces interface vpi vci Category Link Type Connection Mode Qos Remove DefaultMode Enabled mi 8 35 UBR EoA Current Mode PTM ATM WAN P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 Enter the VPI and VCI values 0 and 33 in this example for PVC 1 Select CBR in the Service Category field and set the Peak Cell Rate as 94
218. Voice e Disconnect the first call and answer the second call Either press the flash key and press 1 or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings e Put the first call on hold and answer the second call Press the flash key and then 2 European Call Transfer Do the following to transfer an incoming call that you have answered to another phone 1 Press the flash key to put the caller on hold 2 When you hear the dial tone dial 98 followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call 3 After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it hang up the phone European Three Way Conference Use the following steps to make three way conference calls 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone 2 Diala phone number directly to make another call 3 When the second call is answered press the flash key and press 3 to create a three way conversation 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection 5 If you want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections one is on line the other is on hold press the flash key and press OD 9 10 2 3 USA Type Supplementary Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA Type Call Service Mode Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below P 2812HNU 51c
219. WAN IP address Manufacturer OUI Specify the vendor s OUI Organization Unique Identifier It is usually the first three bytes of the MAC address Product Class Enter the product class of the P 2812HNU 51c Model Name Enter the model name of the P 2812HNU 51c Serial Number Enter the serial number of the P 2812HNU 51c Use the following Static IP address Select this if you have a static IP address WAN IP Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP Address WAN Subnet Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP Mask WAN gateway Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP IP Address P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 24 WAN Configuration IPoE IPv6 address from DHCPv6 server LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an Pv6 Select this option if you want to have the P 2812HNU 51c use the address IPv6 prefix from the connected router s Router Advertisement RA to automatically generate an Pv6 address Obtain an Select this option if you want to get an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the P 2812HNU 51c using the IPv6 prefix from an RA Use the following Static IPv6 address Select this if you have a static Pv6 address WAN IPv6 Address Enter the static Pv6 address provided by your ISP WAN IPv6 Subn
220. WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK security mode 2 The WDS function only works on the basic SSID 3 The WDS function works when disable WPS P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS LABEL DESCRIPTION WDS Operating Mode Select the operating mode for your P 2812HNU 51c e Access Point Brage The P 2812HNU 51c functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously e Wireless Bridge The P 2812HNU 51c acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs In this mode clients cannot connect to the P 2812HNU 51c wirelessly You need to know the MAC address of the peer device which must be of the same model and also WDS enabled The P 2812HNU 51c can establish up to four wireless links with other APs Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access Point Bridge Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device s MAC address manually in the table below Select Enabled Scan to turn on WDS search and display the available APs within range in the table below Remote Bridges Enter the MAC address of the peer device that your P 2812HNU 51c MAC Address wants to make a bridge connection with You can connect to up to 4 peer devices This field is available only when you select Enabled Scan in the Bridge Restrict field Sel
221. When you use WPS it works between two devices only You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously you must enroll one after the other For instance if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee for example then check that it successfully enrolled then set up the second device in the same way e WPS works only with other WPS enabled devices However you can still add non WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly generated WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK pre shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices Whether the network uses WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK depends on the device You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using if the device supports this feature Then you can enter the key into the non WPS device and join the network as normal the non WPS device must also support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN e When you use the PBC method there is a short period from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device when any WPS enabled device could join the network This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device
222. Without PCR Sustainable The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that Cell Rate can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is 0 cells sec This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR Maximum Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells Burst Size that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or Realtime VBR Select Select Default Mode to allow only one WAN service over a single Connection Mode virtual circuit Select MSC Mode to allow multiple WAN services over a single virtual circuit Each WAN connection has its own MAC address Select VLAN MUX Mode to allow multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single virtual circuit You need to assign a VLAN ID and priority level to traffic through each WAN connection All WAN connections share one MAC address This field is not available if you select PPPoA or IPoA as the DSL link type The P 2812HNU 51c uses Default Mode automatically for PPPOA or IPoA Enable Quality Of Select this option to activate QoS Quality of Service on this interface Service to group and prioritize traffic Traffic is grouped according to the VLAN group The QoS setting applies to all WAN connections over the same PVC This field is not available when you select CBR or Realt
223. a WAN interface ppp1 200 in this example to the Selected Default Gateway Interfaces list to use that interface as the default gateway Click Next Routing Default Gateway Default gateway interface list can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system default gateways but only one will be used according to the priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest priority if the WAN interface is connected No Backup WAN fucntion support Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Selected Default Available Routed WAN Gateway Interfaces Interfaces ppp1 200 i EJ L Back mex P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 6 Select the first option Remove the existing interfaces in the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list Select and move a WAN interface ppp1 200 in this example to the Selected DNS Server Interfaces list to use that interface as the system DNS server Click Next Default DNS Server Configuration Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces OR enter static DNS server IP addresses for the system In ATM mode if only a single PVC with IPoA or static IPoE protocol is configured Static DNS server IP addresses must be entered DNS Server Interfaces can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system dns servers but only one will be used according to the priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest pr
224. a a A 276 13 3 1 Creating Incoming Firewall Rules cicssccssedicdesceanssvicersesmadagectaisenuesopiteancteweseegsn tens 278 Chapter 14 eaae a T A E A 281 TETOVO oraa a a ara ann aeA tee 281 14 1 1 What You Gary Do in this Chapter 5 sccisaicdeestvscdaieteaesdaanes ceadaxsineosaacans eid 281 TAS What VOU Nedd 1O MMO ccscssccniscatseneiscacnmmenticdaniveeasqnnunnediemuaaraneianrtenannneiemmaareanennrenans 281 14 3 THE Local Cerniicales SCR GR sassari i ae naai a aAa a 282 143 1 Greate Cortiticate Regest cxssccsssi ssciaiscecaaceiagni aetddeedeesioiedintacuideei aeieancemenccmaneia 283 PES MPL COCA aar tree Trea Trertrer a rpm Teer rrr r TTT creertrreyrecrete Teeter 284 TE te MMe LOOTING cress can tinain teins sats dnpan a N E 286 TH A Load Sioned er GAS sinirinde aarre e E EAE RS 288 P 2812HNU 51c Users Guide 15 Table of Contents 14 4 The Trusted CA Soroen wissen atoniuanine asta Gael Guten Gani 289 TAAL Viow Trusted CA COMING RS ces csiscccsstvadeinssencess soneivadernonecexdnestsanzzsuhanatarenvbannaracantede 291 14 42 limport Trusted CA CRP ANG acconctacsessasiiterssushieetenndscnnds aad vandig tone baadasctadiedecacvenmnedas 292 Chapter 15 SHRI ROUTE sesasine eaae aiaa aAA AARNE AEA 293 EI aE dayne ear aunrten aes au unerica saan 293 15 11 What You Can Do inthis Che Biers secapaiccinecevscaaciaceindente nincagincesniegeesateiagccceaecadeoneseta 293 15 2 The stalie Roule BOIS aeiiisasiaessias bisssdierd n steeiasaasveaiinaaniieden sasate
225. a new entry Remove Click this button to delete the selected entry P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 337 Chapter 21 Remote Management 21 6 1 Adding an IP Address Click the Add button in the IP Address screen to open the following screen Figure 172 IP Address Add IPAddress Access Control IP Address Enter the IP address of the management station permitted to access the local management services and click Apply Save IP Address The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 118 IP Address Add LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can manage the P 2812HNU 51c Apply Save Click this button to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Universal Plug and Play UPnP 22 1 Overview Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use 22 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The UPnP screen lets you enable UPnP on the P 2812HNU 51c Section 22 3 on pag
226. ac Grootn Gaa ua E E Sa 356 Chapter 25 Ednaill No PETRI ois ose ai cersensnmncwtsaiannavtatcnsascenasininaaanncesensaiahdalnalanciesesayeatinsansesasimpucizatensneiaiaie 359 LP a vtvoinnchenirnduhsauteire leet A E 359 25 1 4 What YoU Can Do in this Chaplet scissors aae ia 359 25 2 The Email No ficaton Sergei sa ssienisa ci iessite cistern dati nannaa a aaia 359 Lael ENO ON E naaa 360 Chapter 26 Syslem SENINGS isisa a A aS EER eE Aa Eaa aiaia 363 2D ERY aoa GA AOE GENE Ea GRAN iA mde 363 26 1 4 What You Can Do in this Chapter a cis ssccccsnssevacscectacsnsarenstecoeeenserosteenprsaaaeaauunetenass 363 26 2 Th General ONG siessenek aanp ennan KE oaa Rra case ERENER KEARN 363 20 0 Mhe Mme Sstt SOEN aio erik ess da nssus na daninua a AE aA rssh A aE NE 364 Chapter 27 LOOS ississnasssiasncisssinaasickassaisssebaivessedianedshieasas iasaaiadsuesankeseasabeadusnaitaiasstasatibiaasesiaseniasneiaaineinadinls 367 LT DCE io scciacteaa scan acanss S n 367 271 1 What You Can Dain This Chaplet cancsssmasinansin arises 367 Dee To whew Lig EO aia E am 367 Bis The Log SSIS GEIGE aeriene e teeta E ste eens 368 Chapter 28 ORO Sicscasessinadeanaseciasinsnarninad ccxansasintdensanandanndsinisadaansanassacdarsaiaiidansesnasdansanaiiasmsiad sedensennasasosnaaianings 371 om A E EA E AAE IARE EE N A AAO E E O EA E A E P A A A E siti 371 28 11 What You Can Do in this ADT a seccekucs do thsadccctetin tiene amps aaie aia 371 ana he Fima e SCEE Arink ENR AN AA 372 20o Mhe EO
227. act as the DHCP server for the network Click Apply to save your changes LAN TCP IP GroupName IP Address 192 168 2 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 2552550 DHCP Setup v Enable DHCP DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 2 2 Pool Size 253 DHCP Relay Relay Server DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Obtain DNS info from a WAN interface WAN Interface Use the following Static DNS IP address First DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Second DNS Server 0 0 0 0 IGMP Snooping Enable IGMP Snooping Standard Mode Blocking Mode IP Alias C Enable IP Alias IP Address IP Subnet Mask P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Select GR2 from the GroupName drop down list The IP Address 192 168 3 1 and IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 are obtained automatically Select Active DHCP and DHCP Server to have the ZyXEL Device act as the DHCP server for the network Click Apply when you finish the settings LAN TCP IP GroupName GR2 v IP Address 192 168 3 1 IP Subnet Mask 255255250 DHCP Setup v Enable DHCP DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 3 2 Pool Size 253 DHCP Relay Relay Server DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Obtain DNS info from a WAN interface WAN Interface Use the following Static DNS IP address First DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Second DNS Server 0 0 0 0 IGM
228. aei satnaeen oaienbeiniaas 294 Rc et PMN IG sciagua teu cinaniueies tigvanameseiusk EE 295 Chapter 16 Policy FOR WAN CNA cissiniissaiisicdsatscaicscesdsinisnsnaseiccisesniisaceisasaiiadasisieasesiseidaantdsnnsadasseieniananisascataie 297 MOBO aaa ee erie eee 297 16 1 7 What You Gan Do in this Chapter sssrinin annonam iaiia 297 16 2 The Stalle Route SOMO sescca inne 297 T621 Policy Forwarding SEUD reaa aa pied aan amen enieenondnetee 298 Chapter 17 ONS ROMO aaea a E eee ee a eee eee ee 301 TETON acae PpPre tT TrrrprrrTt TPT rerrttrrrrreett tr rrr tetrr rrr rrrrrre tr tr rree t rreretr rrr rr 301 17 1 1 What You Can Doin this Chaplet lt icccaacinesnccscotiedeiscsntens scarttantecbacatiotasonaneneanconeateacig 302 T meN Povie oroe rxseka sande aoee Ea EAE ENANSA E ES 302 Ve 2 DMS ROue Edi susirinks 303 Chapter 18 i A A A a E E 305 T TOVON einen E 305 18 1 1 What You Can Do inthis Gia piers sciiaieciseceissscicenvaderdyaancdgicieseiacubaveiadseexaciecaguonnis 305 102 TOPE OOE aa 305 Chapter 19 Quality of Service NG cscs sascha Sete eee 307 TU Are ee E E E nade A A E A A O E E E A AE N ia E AT annie 307 19 1 1 What YoU Can Doin this Chaplet sccscsicasecsietent si aea aa 307 122 What You Need o KION side ceasetersdsiartversiabivasna an aaa 308 19 3 The Quality of Service General Screen e cccsesccscevacesesusessaansesecenussccosiccsetanerccsesecaidacciesees 309 19A ThE RS NU RN aoier aa a EAEN 311 1941 Adding a GooS GUBUG ausirian aE aE a EEANN 312 19
229. affic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Traffic Rate Traffic Rate Traffic Traffic Time Time Before Traffic Policing After Traffic Policing The P 2812HNU 51c supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms Token Bucket Filter TBF Single Rate Two Color Maker srTCM and Two Rate Two Color Marker trTCM You can specify actions which are performed on the colored packets See Section 19 8 on page 324 for more information on each metering algorithm 19 3 The Quality of Service General Screen Click Advanced Setup gt Quality of Service to open the screen as shown next Use this screen to enable or disable QoS set the bandwidth and select to have the P 2812HNU 51c automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence or packet length See Section 19 1 on page 307 for more information Figure 158 QoS General General Enable QoS WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth kbps LAN WLAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth kbps You can assign the managed bandwidth manually If the field is empty the CPE set the value automatically Upstream traffic priority will be automatically assigned by None E The following table describes the labels in this screen Ta
230. al IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 a Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure IPv4 list select Manually e In the IP Address field type your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field type your subnet mask e In the Router field type the IP address of your device ee0 lt Show Ail Network Q Location Automatic i Show Built in Ethernet By PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4 Manually is IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Router 0 0 0 0 DNS Servers Search Domains IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 M w Click the lock to prevent further changes Optional Assist me Apply Now 6 Click Apply Now and close the window P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the I nfo tab Figure 203 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Utility 8 e Network Utility info Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Traceroute Whois Finger Port Scan oterface for information Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 16 cb 8b 50 2e Sent Packets 20607 IP Address es 118
231. all a program oy Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Click Change adapter settings GO SE gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center Control Panel Home View your basic network information and set up connections Manage wireless networks fi See full map gew a A Jo Change adapter settings TW PC ZyXEL com Internet Change advanced sharing This computer setings View your active networks Connect or disconnect 13 ZyXEL com Access type Internet Work network Connections Local Area Connection 4 Double click Local Area Connection and then select Properties GO gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections gt Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this A Local Area Connection y Wireless Network Connection TS Unidentified network AT Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Eth ill 8 Local Area Connection Status General l Connection IPv4 Connectivity No network access IPv6 Connectivity No network access Media State Enabled Duration 00 04 36 Speed 100 0 Mbps Details Activity Sent A S ET Received Packets 432 Disable Diagnose Close Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying
232. ame Type the name of your PPPoE service here This field is not available for a PPPoA connection Authentication Method The P 2812HNU 51c supports PAP Password Authentication Protocol and CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is more secure than PAP however PAP is readily available on more platforms Use the drop down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls Options are AUTO Your P 2812HNU 51c accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node CHAP Your P 2812HNU 51c accepts CHAP only PAP Your P 2812HNU 51c accepts PAP only MSCHAP Your P 2812HNU 51c accepts MSCHAP only MS CHAP is the Microsoft version of the CHAP Enable NAT Select this option to activate NAT on this connection NAT Type Select the type of NAT you want the P 2812HNU 51c to use for traffic through this connection Dial on Demand Select this check box when you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Inactivity Timeout field Inactivity Specify an idle time out when you select Dial on Demand The Timeout default setting is 0 which means the Internet session will not timeout Use Static Pv4 A static Pv4 address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic Address IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select this if you do not have a dynamic IP address
233. an IP address on another network it references this table Syntax route print Parameters For the purposes of this section the print parameter is the most important If you enter route by itself the command s help page displays The following example shows the typical output of this command C gt route print Interface List 95 A A EESE E iy te sends uceteetonar donee ote MS TCP Loopback interface 0x1000003 00 02 e3 al b2 c3 Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Driver Active Routes Network Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 172 16 1 254 172 516 1 32 1 L27000 2552 01 0720 127 0 0 1 1270 05 1 L722 E6 b0 2553 2552990 VIZ 1 EE VIZ 616 1432 1 TI72 16 1 632 255 255 259 255 127 0 0 1 EZ Ta OL 1 LIZ LOr 259259 2595255 2559 3299 T2417 6 51232 V7 2 A641 32 1 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 TID 16231 32 122 Los L32 1 259 2550 255255 255255 255 255 17216132 172 16 1 32 1 Default Gateway 172 16 1 254 Persistent Routes None The following table describes labels shown in the command output Table 141 route print Command Output OUTPUT DESCRIPTION Active Routes This section lists all available routes that are automatically learned from the network Network Destination ignore it network The destination IP address of packets that this route entry is to route The destination can be an IP address for a network or host 0 0 0 0 for t
234. and the receiving device must use the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput This implementation of AES uses a 128 bit 192 bit or 256 bit key AES is faster than 3DES P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN 12 3 2 12 3 2 1 Table 74 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec Setting gt IKE continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Integrity Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop down list box MD5 Message Algorithm Digest 5 and SHA1 Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA 1 for maximum security Select Diffie You must choose a key group for key exchange in SA setup 768bit Hellman Group refers to Diffie Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number 1024bit for Key refers to Diffie Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit 1Kb random number Exchange Other options include 1536 2048 and 3072 bit Diffie Hellman groups Key Life Time Define the length of time before an IKE or IPSec SA automatically Seconds renegotiates in this field It may range from 6
235. ation Protocol IEEE 802 11 Also known by the brand Wi Fi denotes a set of Wireless LAN WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 IEEE 802 11b Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11g Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Media Access Control MAC Bridges IEEE 802 11x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 11e QoS IEEE 802 11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service ANSI 11 413 Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ADSL standard G dmt G 992 1 G 992 1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line ADSL Transceivers ITU G 992 1 G DMT ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 2 G Lite ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 3 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the G dmt bis capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 4 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the G lite bis capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 5 ADSL2 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits ITU T G 993 2 ITU standard that defines VDSL2 VDSL2 TR 069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management TR 064 DSL Forum LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide
236. ation interface See the device s User s Guide for how to do this Look for the client s WPS PIN it will be displayed either on the device or in the WPS section of the client s configuration interface see the device s User s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN for the P 2812HNU 51c see Section 7 6 on page 163 Enter the client s PIN in the AP s configuration interface Note If the client device s configuration interface has an area for entering another device s PIN you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP or enter the AP s PIN in the client it does not matter which Start WPS on both devices within two minutes Note Use the configuration utility to activate WPS not the push button on the device itself On a computer connected to the wireless client try to connect to the Internet If you can connect WPS was successful If you cannot connect check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP s configuration utility If you see the wireless client in the list WPS was successful P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 177 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS enabled wireless client installed in a notebook computer connecting to the WPS enabled AP via the PIN method Figure 76 Example WPS Process PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL D C SSID WPA 2 PSK J COMMUNICATION 7 11 4 3 How WPS Works
237. authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA2 also uses TKIP when P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs required for compatibility reasons but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extende
238. bels in this screen Table 20 Internet Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface This shows the name of the interface used by this connection A default name ipoax atmx where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer 2 interfaces using different VPI and or VCI values or ptmO indicates the DSL port The pppx name where x starts from 1 and is the index number of PPP connection on the P 2812HNU 51c indicates a PPP connection via any one of the WAN interface eth4 indicates the Ethernet WAN interface the physical Ethernet WAN port The number after the dot represents the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection The number after the underscore _ represents the index number of connections through the same interface null means the entry is not valid Description This is the service name of this connection 8 and 35 or O and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers The last number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection null means the entry is not valid Type This shows the layer 2 interface type and method of encapsulation used by this connection IPoW stands for I PoE used in an Ethernet WAN connection 106 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 20 Internet Connection continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rat
239. between the regional and international servers it physically takes longer for the response to get back to your computer Finally on transition hop 15 from the server in Japan to the server in California another latency spike occurs If you were having connection problems this would most likely be the source of it For whatever reason the server in Japan has a less than optimal connection with its counterpart in the United States P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting In this example we abridge the tracert results table to show only server IP addresses and not domain names by using the d parameter We also use the hn parameter to limit the number of hops to 5 to test local connections only C gt tracert d h 5 www zyxel com Tracing route to a1524 g akamai net 203 69 113 16 over a maximum of 5 hops lt 1 ms lt 1 ms lt l ms 172 23 31 254 5 ms 4 ms 4 ms 172 23 6 113 5 ms 5 ms 6 ms 172 23 6 253 17 ms 16 ms 14 ms 218 160 188 254 24 ms 25 ms 24 ms 10 42 232 150 Ob WNE Trace complete C gt arp Local network transmission is based on MAC addresses Data transmission between two networks is based on IP addresses Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol that converts IP addresses into MAC addresses Before a computer transmits data to an IP address on the same network it will check whether the IP address exists in its ARP table If it does the computer then se
240. ble 101 QoS General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable QoS Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance WAN Managed Upstream Bandwidth Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interface that you want to allocate using QoS The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface s actual transmission speed For example set the WAN interface speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps You can set this number higher than the interface s actual transmission speed The P 2812HNU 51c uses up to 95 of the DSL port s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL port s actual transmission speed You can also set this number lower than the interface s actual transmission speed This will cause the P 2812HNU 51c to not use some of the interface s available bandwidth If you leave this field blank the P 2812HNU 51c automatically sets this number to be 95 of the DSL port s actual upstream transmission speed LAN WLAN Managed Downstream Bandwidth Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN WLAN interface that you want to allocate using QoS P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Table 101 QoS General LABEL DESCRIPTION Upstream traffic priority will be automatically These fields are ignored if upstream tra
241. bleshooting css sccccaconcsotocacuinssctacmniviecensnived cemamnnvevetasmnivienenaniveacmsbannbants 392 207 WEEE cieusrshacnainiened iene A 392 Chapter 31 ag gee Mec onl r en ee Hg nee uO ae se He OP ORC A e er 395 SLi Hardware SSO MIC dione ararsan ncavdaaens aaxdawaentocdsenan a 395 gha Firmware SpechieIionE simsii e E E N 396 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting sssesssssrsssrrresesrnnrernnnrurnrnunrrrnnnernnunntnnrnnennnneeeennnennnne 401 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeesneaeeeeeaes 417 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions sssssseeseereeserrreere e 445 Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting 2 2 sccceececicscceecsccenscececsacoersecersadccsaecsseedenaes 455 Appendix E Wireless LANS eee eae eee ee ee eee ee 467 oe F IP Ole Ree er Ree ere BP Et oP er oe grr Bear etn Tope nner ete ert reeerees eerie enter eer 483 Appendix G Common Services ae eer enn ar ae een en Ue ee 493 Appendix H Open Software Announcement ccccccceceesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeetnaaeeeeneaes 497 Pp 1 Legal NT cts occa ee cee tte nee erie eee 511 i ee ees 515 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Table of Contents P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide PART User s Guide Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c 1 1 Overview The P 2812HNU 51c is a VDSL2 Integrated Access Device IAD that combines a VDSL2 router with Voice over IP VoIP co
242. blic key 281 replacing 282 storage space 282 Certification Authority 281 Certification Authority see CA certifications 511 notices 513 viewing 514 CFI 133 CFM 379 CCMs 379 link trace test 380 loopback test 380 MA 379 MD 379 MEP 379 MIP 379 channel 469 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Index interference 469 channel ID 153 CIFS 234 CIFS Common Internet File System 236 Class of Service 226 Class of Service see CoS client server protocol 218 comfort noise generation 224 command parameters 402 command syntax 402 Common Internet File System CIFS 236 Common Internet File System see CIFS configuration 138 144 Connectivity Check Messages see CCMs copyright 511 CoS 226 325 CoS technologies 308 CPU usage 84 creating certificates 283 CTS Clear to Send 470 D date and time 84 default 376 default LAN IP address 73 DH 274 DHCP 96 138 144 329 DHCP client 96 DHCP client list 96 DHCP relay 396 DHCP server 396 diagnostic 380 383 differentiated services 226 Differentiated Services see DiffServ 325 Diffie Hellman key groups 274 DiffServ 325 marking rule 325 DiffServ Differentiated Services 226 code points 226 marking rule 226 digital I Ds 281 disclaimer 511 DNS 139 DNS server address assignment 133 Domain Name 193 domain name system see DNS Domain Name System See DNS DS field 226 325 DS dee differentiated services DSCP 226 325 DSL interface 99 dynamic DNS 329 Dynamic Host Config
243. c Outgoing This field displays the SIP account and SIP number that you use to Number make calls on this phone port Incoming This field displays the SIP account and SIP number that you use to Number receive calls on this phone port Poll Interval s Enter how often you want the P 2812HNU 51c to update this screen and click Set Interval Set Interval Click this to make the P 2812HNU 51c update the screen based on the amount of time you specified in Poll Interval Stop Click this to make the P 2812HNU 51c stop updating the screen P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 3 1 WLAN Station List Click Status gt WLAN Station List to access this screen Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the P 2812HNU 51c Figure 31 Status gt WLAN Station List WLAN Station List Refresh Interval 5 PY Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Status gt WLAN Station List LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC This field shows the MAC Media Access Control address of an associated wireless station SSID This field shows the SSID to which the wireless station is connected Interface This field shows the wireless interface to which the wireless station is connected Refresh Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Interval Set Interval Click this button to apply the new
244. cal IP address type is configured to Single Address this Subnetmask field is not available When the local IP address type is configured to Subnet enter a subnet mask on the LAN behind your P 2812HNU 51c Tunnel access Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the remote IPSec router from remote IP that can use the VPN tunnel The remote IP addresses must correspond addresses to the remote IPSec router s configured local IP addresses Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address es both the same Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address but not both You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses as long as only one is active at any time Use the drop down menu to choose Single Address or Subnet Select Single Address with a single IP address Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask IP Address When the remote IP address type is configured to Single Address for VPN enter a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router When the remote IP address type is configured to Subnet enter a static IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN Table 75 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec Setting gt Manual continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP When the remote IP address type is configured to Single Address Subnetmask t
245. cal network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In Multi Tenant Unit MTU applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and 132 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residi
246. call After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it hang up the phone USA Three Way Conference Use the following steps to make three way conference calls P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 1 When you are on the phone talking to someone party A press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone 2 Diala phone number directly to make another call to party B 3 When party B answers the second call press the flash key to create a three way conversation 4 Hang up the phone to drop the connection 5 Ifyou want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections with party A on line and party B on hold press the flash key 6 If you want to go back to the three way conversation press the flash key again 7 Ifyou want to separate the activated three way conference into two individual connections again press the flash key This time the party B is on line and party A is on hold 9 10 2 4 Phone Functions Summary The following table shows the key combinations you can enter on your phone s keypad to use certain features Table 69 Phone Functions Summary ACTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION O8 Call transfer Transfer a call to another phone See Section 9 10 2 2 on page 227 Europe type and Section 9 10 2 3 on page 229 USA type 66 Call return Place a call to the last person who called you O5 Enable Do Not Disturb Use these to
247. can change this in Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting System This displays whether the P 2812HNU 51c is functioning as a router or Mode a bridge CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the P 2812HNU 51c s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the P 2812HNU 51c is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications for example using QoS see Chapter 19 on page 307 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 7 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Memory This field displays what percentage of the P 2812HNU 51c s memory is Usage currently used Usually this percentage should not increase much If memory usage does get close to 100 the P 2812HNU 51c is probably becoming unstable and you should restart the device See Section 28 4 on page 376 or turn off the device unplug the power for a few seconds Interface Status Interface This column displays each interface the P 2812HNU 51c has Status This field indicates whether or not the P 2812HNU 51c is using the interface For the DSL interface this field displays LinkDown line is down or Up line is up or connected For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface this field displays Up when the P 2812HNU 51c is using the interface and NoLink when the line is disconnec
248. ces are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a device is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct information SSID channel and security If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct information This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 7 11 3 3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it However every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server This is a server used in businesses more than in homes If you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network 7 11 3 4 Encryption 174
249. cess schedule for a specific user on your network Figure 175 Time Restriction Configuration Add Access Time Restriction This page adds time of day restriction to a special LAN device connected to the Router To restrict the LAN device enter the MAC address of the LAN device To find out the MAC address of a Windows based PC go to command window and type ipconfig all User Name MAC Address Days ofthe week Mon rue wed thu rri sat sun O Click to select oO oO O Fi o o Start Blocking Time hh mm End Blocking Time hh mm Back IC Save Apply P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 23 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 121 Time Restriction Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter the name of the user MAC Address Enter the MAC address of the LAN user s computer to which this schedule applies Days of the week Select check boxes for the days that you want the P 2812HNU 51c to perform parental control Start Blocking Enter the time period of each day in 24 hour format during which Time parental control will be enforced End Blocking Time Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Save Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 2812HNU 51c 23 3 The URL Filter Screen Use this screen to configure URL filtering settings to block t
250. ch host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address This is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Clear this if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP This field is not available for a PPPoA connection Enable IGMP Select this check box to have the P 2812HNU 51c act as an IGMP proxy on this connection This allows the P 2812HNU 51c to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Enable MLD Multicast Proxy Select this check box to have the P 2812HNU 51c act as an MLD proxy on this connection This allows the P 2812HNU 51c to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup IPoE This screen displays when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN Service Configuration screen Figure 44 WAN Configuration IPoE WAN IP Settings Enter information provided to you by your ISP to configure the WAN IP settings Notice If Obtain an IP address automatically is chosen DHCP client will be enabled If Use the following Static IP address is chosen enter the WAN IP address
251. ch terminates a VP or VC segment End to end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection where an ATM link is terminated Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest neighboring ATM device End to end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end to end PVC Note The DSLAM to which the P 2812HNU 51c is connected must also support ATM F4 and or F5 to use this test Note This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer 2 interface Figure 201 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt OAM Ping Test OAM Ping Test OAM Ping Test F5 Segment Test DISABLED ADSL link is down tests not done VPIVCI 085 Y F4 segment F4 end end F5 segment F5 end end The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 137 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt OAM Ping Test LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test F4 segment Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test F4 end end Press this to perform an OAM F4 end to end loopback test F5 segment Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test F5 end end Press this to perform an OAM F5 end to end loopback test P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories e Power Hardware Con
252. circuit switched telephone network You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP companies provide VoIP service Circuit switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second Kbps in each direction to handle a telephone call VolP can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth SIP The Session Initiation Protocol SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit switched telephone networks SIP Identities A SIP account uses an identity sometimes referred to as a SIP address A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI Uniform Resource Identifier A SIP account s URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the way an e mail address identifies an e mail account The format of a SIP identity is SIP Number SIP Service Domain SIP Number The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the symbol A SIP number can use letters like in an e mail address johndoe your ITSP com for example or numbers like a telephone
253. con to delete the WAN connection Add Click Add to create a new connection 5 5 1 Internet Connection Configuration Click the Edit or Add button in the WAN Service screen to configure a WAN connection P 2812HNU 51c Users Guide 107 Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 5 1 1 WAN Interface This screen displays when you add a new WAN connection Figure 40 WAN Configuration WAN Interface WAN Service Interface Configuration Select a layer 2 interface for this service ptmo 0_0_1 v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 WAN Configuration WAN Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a layer 2 Select ptmO to use the DSL port as the WAN port and use the VDSL interface for this technology for data transmission service g Select atmx or ipoax where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer 2 interfaces using different VPI and or VCI values to use the DSL port as the WAN port and use the ADSL technology for data transmission Select eth4 if you want to use the Ethernet WAN port as the WAN port Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 5 1 2 Service Type If you set the DSL link type to PPPoA or IPoA for the ATM interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface you only need to configure the Enter Service Description fiel
254. cribes the labels in this screen Table 107 QoS Policer Setup Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Select to enable or disable this policer Name Enter the descriptive name of this policer P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Table 107 QoS Policer Setup Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Meter Type Select a traffic metering algorithm used in this policer The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted Each token represents one byte The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size The Single Rate Three Color Marker srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate CIR the Committed Burst Size CBS and the Excess Burst Size EBS The Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR See Section 19 8 on page 324 for more information Committed Rate Specify the guaranteed rate at which packets are admitted to the network This is to specify how many bytes of tokens are added to a bucket every second Committed Burst Size Specify the guaranteed amount of bytes that are admitted at the committed rate This is the maximum size of the first token bucket in a traffic meterin
255. ct No Address Setup if you do not want any IP address for this device This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices Select Dynamic address if you do not have a static IP address assigned by the system administrator or your cable or DSL provider You can choose one of the dynamic address assignment method Select DHCP if you have a DHCP server running on your local network Network addresses are then obtained automatically from the server To automatically search for free IP and then assign it statically select Zeroconf To use 8 Network Card Setup General Address onfiguration Name Ethernet v D Dynamic Address IP Address D No IP Address for Bonding Devices Statically assigned IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Cancel 6 Select Dynamic Address DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Hostname fields 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the Hostname DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided YaST2 linux h20z Enterthenamefor L Network Settings this computer
256. d 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program excep
257. d by your ISP PORT PI CI Connection Type Service Name IP Address Service State A MLD Multicast Service Category UBR r AE es ihe 7 5 3 0 8 35 IPoE ipoe_0_8_35 Automatically Assigned Enabled Enabled Full Cone NAT Enabled Celie miele die 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Click Apply Save to have this interface to be effective Click Back to make any modifications The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 WAN Configuration Configuration Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Port VPI VCI This is the DSL port number VPI and VCI for an ATM connection This displays N A for an Ethernet WAN conenction or not available for a PTM connection Connection Type Service Name This is the encapsulation method used by this connection This is the name of the service Service Category This is the ATM traffic class This field is blank for a PTM or Ethernet WAN conenction IP Address This shows whether the WAN IP address is assigned by the ISP manually configured or not configurable Service State This shows whether this service is active or not NAT This shows whether NAT is active or not for this connection NAT Type This shows the type of NAT the P 2812HNU 51c uses on this connection Firewall This shows whether Firewall is active or not for this connection P 2812HNU 51c User s G
258. d eaitesieasshndsaccmbtinecaraeinsacs 235 102 The al eect rca ate SEEN ene ene nee a a a iaai a a 236 10 2 1 Example of Accessing Your Shared Files From a Computer cccssscceeeeeenees 237 Chapter 11 Sparing a USB POTN a ccccasicscsssscesaccansascesejaanasensansenaneaexeacasacsdanecuanactassasaasantaneasansninanmsiasnecses 239 TT CSIR VE akin aiabresa Auta mca ae aa aaa en Mana marae 239 Tels Whal Vou Can Do nihe chapio ss secarcesck a were suscncacaluctancesvdeierh e a 239 Ta What rou Need TO KOW soeia ee Ea E RAA SER 240 Pedee aa ESI E T A TE A E E A E E A E T 240 114 The Prini Serwer SCTE da tcsiccedariiasocsdarinsndedcduianaaccdarisnndercdlaoneonddaxiuesed a ia 241 1L5Ada a Now Primer Using WIndows ass sscines ca ditsns taceid sodtedaend wosdeeeta sondedeera woatieeiabdiaeatniors 242 11 6 Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X occ cccissecciecesceaterteetcieaeteeee cossteneenteeeniaeens 245 TUT Mac OS PO ANG VO sirrinin ann a a 245 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Table of Contents Tee Bae OS TOS ANG TG eas E Ee 248 11 7 P 2812HNU 51c Print Server Compatible USB Printers 0 ccccceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 252 Chapter 12 IPSec VPI siiiasycininciinsipiiuiniinsnciasaiiiesintateaieadnisadacinis dintaratiaienadda aiii 253 Me MSIE sanidic casindesdecaendndsacdasianeds A AA 253 121 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ss cea sionisendsakeuscecus tisuvavanuid wsnadoanabdsdunaasia aa 253 Pe aT UNE O TON oia 254 Wee Bo VO
259. d in this screen Figure 41 WAN Configuration Service Type WAN Service Configuration Select WAN service type PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet Bridging Enter Service Description pppoe_0_11_35 Mtag VLAN ID for egress packets Enter 802 1P Priority 0 7 Enter 802 10 VLAN ID 1 4094 C Enable IPv6 for this service Figure 42 WAN Configuration Service Type PPPoA or IPoA WAN Service Configuration Enter Service Description pppoa_O_0_35 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 WAN Configuration Service Type LABEL DESCRIPTION Select WAN Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP service type Choices are PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet and Bridging Enter Service Specify a name for this connection or use the automatically generated Description one P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 22 WAN Configuration Service Type LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate Limit Enter the maximum transmission rate in Kbps for traffic sent through the WAN connection Otherwise leave this field blank to disable the rate limit This field is not available for an ATM connection Tag VLAN ID Select this option to add the VLAN tag specified below to the outgoing for egress traffic through this connection packets This field is available when the layer 2 interface is in VLANMUX mode
260. d initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s
261. d new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site or www zyxel com to use to upgrade your device s performance Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your P 2812HNU 51c What You Can Do in this Chapter The Firmware screen lets you upload firmware to your device Section 28 2 on page 372 e The Configuration screen lets you backup and restore device configurations Section 28 3 on page 374 You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default The Restart screen lets you restart your P 2812HNU 51c Section 28 4 on page 376 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 371 Chapter 28 Tools 28 2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance gt Tools to open the Firmware screen Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your P 2812HNU 51c The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Do NOT turn off the P 2812HNU 51c while firmware upload is in progress Figure 188 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware Firmware Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal router firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from website If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you 372 must first extract the binary BIN file In some cases you may need to reconfigure
262. device Note that the access point AP is not always the registrar and the wireless client is not always the enrollee All WPS certified APs can be a registrar and so can some WPS enabled wireless clients By default a WPS devices is unconfigured This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar if it supports both functions If the registrar is unconfigured the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly generated Once a WPS enabled device has connected to another device using WPS it becomes configured A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee you must reset it to its factory defaults P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 179 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 11 4 4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup The following figure shows an example network In step 1 both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured When WPS is activated on both they perform the handshake In this example AP1 is the registrar and Client 1 is the enrollee The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network since it is unconfigured and has no existing
263. device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration PBC is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS enabled device and allowing them to connect automatically You do not need to enter any information Not every WPS enabled device has a physical WPS button Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another Look for a WPS button on each device If the device does not have one log into its configuration utility and locate the button see the device s User s Guide for how to do this for the P 2812HNU 51c see Section 7 7 on page 165 Press the button on one of the devices it doesn t matter which For the P 2812HNU 51c you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds Within two minutes press the button on the other device The registrar sends the network name SSID and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee If you need to make
264. ding Table 97 Policy Forwarding Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 16 Policy Forwarding P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide DNS Route 17 1 Overview DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it In addition to the system DNS server s each WAN interface service is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server s The P 2812HNU 51c uses a system DNS server in the order you specify in the WAN gt Internet Connection screen to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry After the P 2812HNU 51c receives a DNS reply from a DNS server it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table In the following example the DNS server 168 92 5 1 obtained from the WAN interface ptm0 100 is set to be the system DNS server The DNS server 10 10 23 7 is obtained from the WAN interface ppp1 123 You configure a DNS route fo
265. dit Screen This screen lets you create or edit a port forwarding rule Select User Define in the Service Name field or click the rule s Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to open the following screen Figure 82 Port Forwarding Edit Rule Setup V Active Service Name WAN Interface External Start Port External End Port Internal Start Port Internel End Port Server IP Address Protocol The following ta ipoe_eth4_1feth4_1 v 69 69 69 69 192 168 1 99 UDP v ble describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Port Forwarding Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it This field is not editable if you are configuring a User Define rule Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule This field is read only if you click the Edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 51 Port Forwarding Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port forwarding rules External Start Enter the original destination port for the packets Port To forward only one port enter the port number again in the External End Port field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External End Port field Ex
266. dress Table 147 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 148 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 64 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 149 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 150 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1
267. ds you will hear a busy tone You can enable CCBS on the called number again e If you manually call the number on which you have enabled CCBS before the CCBS timeout period expires the P 2812HNU 51c disables CCBS on the called number e If you call a second number before the first called number s CCBS timeout period expires the P 2812HNU 51c stops calling the first number until you finish the second call Select this option to activate CCBS on the P 2812HNU 51c MWI Message Waiting Indication Select this if you want to hear a waiting beeping dial tone on your phone when you have at least one voice message Your VoIP service provider must support this feature Expiration Time Keep the default value for this field unless your VoIP service provider tells you to change it Enter the number of seconds the SIP server should provide the message waiting service each time the P 2812HNU 51c subscribes to the service Before this time passes the P 2812HNU 51c automatically subscribes again Hot Line Warm Line Enable Select this to enable the hot line or warm line feature on the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Table 57 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Warm Line Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c dial the specified warm line number after you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad for a period of
268. e IPSec VPN 12 1 Overview A virtual private network VPN provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site to site lines A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling encryption authentication access control and auditing It is used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses TCP IP for communication Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a standards based VPN that offers flexible solutions for secure data communications across a public network like the Internet IPSec is built around a number of standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality data integrity and authentication at the IP layer The following figure is an example of an IPSec VPN tunnel Figure 127 VPN Example e ew ew ew ee es ee m 12 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e The IPSec VPN screen lets you view the configured VPN policies and add edit or remove a VPN policy Section 12 3 on page 255 e The Status screen lets you display and manage the current active VPN connections Section 12 4 on page 266 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 253 Chapter 12 IPSec VPN 12 2 What You Need to Know A VPN tunnel is usually established in two phases Each phase establishes a security association SA a contract indicating what security parameters the P 2812HNU 51c and the remote IPSec router will use The first phase establishes an Internet Key Exchange IKE SA between the P
269. e Specify the key combinations that you can enter to turn the no answer call forward function off Call Forward Specify the key combinations that you can enter to forward incoming When Busy calls to the phone number you specified in the SIP gt SIP Account Enable screen if the phone port is busy Call Forward Specify the key combinations that you can enter to turn the busy When Busy forward function off Disable One Shot Call Specify the key combinations that you can enter to activate call waiting Waiting Enable on the next call only One Shot Call Specify the key combinations that you can enter to deactivate call Waiting Disable waiting on the next call only Do Not Disturb Enable Specify the key combinations that you can enter to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you Do Not Disturb Disable Specify the key combinations that you can enter to turn this function off Call Completion Specify the key combinations that you can enter to disable CCBS ona on Busy call Subscriber CCBS Deactivate Outgoing SIP Specify the key combinations that you can enter to select the SIP account that you use to make outgoing calls If you enter 12 by default lt SIP account index number gt lt the phone number you want to call gt 1201 12345678 for example the P 2812HNU 51c uses the first SIP account to call 12345678 Dial Plan Dial Plan Enable Select this to activate the dia
270. e s capability The smaller the bucket size the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size For example use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps Single Rate Three Color Marker The Single Rate Three Color Marker srTCM defined in RFC 2697 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user defined rate the Committed Information Rate CIR and two burst sizes the Committed Burst Size CBS and Excess Burst Size EBS The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets CBS and EBS Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate called Committed Information Rate CIR When the first bucket CBS is full new tokens overflow into the second bucket EBS P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 327 Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS All packets are evaluated against the CBS If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red The following shows how tokens work
271. e POE Service Name RemoteMgmt 300 Service Category IP Address Automatically Assigned Service State Enabled AT Disabled NAT Type Symmetric NAT Disabled MESA RH Enabled IGMP Multicast Disabled Click Apply Save to have this interface to be effective Click Back to make any modifications P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 9 The Internet Connection screen should look like the following Layer 2 Interface Internet Connection 3G Backup Wide Area Network WAN Service Setup Choose Add or Remove to configure a WAN service over a selected interface Current Mode is ETH WAN Active WAN Mode is selected with the switch on the back of the device isterrace vescrntion Type Rate viansozip vianNuntd conntd 1omp Nar Firewall tvs muo Moai H A N A N A N A odify atmo ipoe_0_8_35 ATM IPOE N Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled g wt 100 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled g iif ptm0 100 ipoe_0_0_1 100 PTM IPoE N A Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Internet 200 PTM PPPoE k A RemoteMgmt 300 PTM IPoE 7 3 2 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Es 1 eth4 100 ipoe_eth4 100 ETH IPoW Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled DSL Connections Status 1 Go to the Status screen Check and write down the WAN IP addresses assigned by your ISP for the WAN connections in PTM mode you configured 2 and 3 in this e
272. e based on the RIP packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other routers in this interface Select Active to have the P 2812HNU 51c advertise its route information and also listen for routing updates from neighboring routers Enabled Select the check box to activate the settings Apply Save Click Apply Save to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Quality of Service QoS 19 1 Overview Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand Configure QoS on the P 2812HNU 51c to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves these steps 1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows 2 Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow The P 2812HNU 51c assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion allowing time sensitive applications to flow more smoothly Time sensitiv
273. e 340 22 2 What You Need to Know Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a Separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following e Dynamic port mapping e Learning public IP addresses e Assigning lease times to mappings P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the P 2812HNU 51c allows multicast messages on the LAN only All UPnP
274. e This shows the maximum data rate in Kbps allowed for traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no limit on transmission rate Vlan8021p This indicates the 802 1P priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no priority level assigned VianMuxld This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection This displays N A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned Connld This shows the index number of each connection This displays N A when the interface used by the connection is in Default Mode IGMP This shows whether IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is activated or not for this connection IGMP is not available when the connection uses the bridging service NAT This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection NAT is not available when the connection uses the bridging service Firewall This shows whether the firewall is activated or not for this connection The firewall is not available when the connection uses the bridging service IPv6 This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection IPv6 is not available when the connection uses the bridging service MLD This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery MLD is activated or not for this connection MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection Click the Remove i
275. e Web Configurator Table 6 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Trigger Port Use this screen to change your P 2812HNU 51c s port triggering settings DMZ Host Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen ALG Use this screen to allow SIP sessions to pass through the P 2812HNU 51c VoIP SIP SIP Account Use this screen to configure your P 2812HNU 51c s Voice over IP settings Use this screen to set which phone ports use which SIP accounts SIP Service Use this screen to configure the SIP server information QoS for Provider VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan Phone Region Use this screen to select your location and call service mode Phone Book Speed Dial Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you call often Call History Call History Use this screen to view the summary list of received dialed and Summary missed calls Outgoing Calls Use this screen to view detailed information for each outgoing call you made Incoming Calls Use this screen to view detailed information for each incoming call from someone calling you USB Services File Sharing Share Configuration Use this screen to enable file sharing via the P 2812HNU 51c Print Server Printer Configuration Use this screen to enable the print server on the
276. e a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IG
277. e and features The P 2812HNU 51c supports Pv4 IPv6 dual stack and can run Pv4 and IPv6 at the same time See Appendix F on page 483 for more information about IPv6 3G 3G Third Generation is a digital packet switched wireless technology Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data It allows fast transfer of voice and non voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address Get this information from your ISP 5 4 The Layer 2 Interface Screen The P 2812HNU 51c must have a layer 2 interface to allow users to use the DSL port or Ethernet WAN port to access the Internet The screen varies depending on the interface type you select Note The ATM PTM and Ethernet layer 2 interfaces cannot work at the same time Figure 35 Layer 2 Interface PTM or Ethernet Interface PM M Current Mode ETH WAN DSL PTM Interface Configuration Choose Add or Remove to configure DSL PTM interfaces AEA E ptmo VlanMuxMode Enabled mi EET Figure 36 ahi Interface ATM Interface ATM Current Mode PTM ATM WAN DSL ATM Interface Configuration Choose Add or Remove to configure DSL ATM interfaces MEAO A E A atmo 8 EoA DefaultMode Enabled
278. e applications include both those that require a low level of latency delay and a low level of jitter variations in delay such as Voice over IP VoIP or Internet gaming and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers 19 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e The General screen lets you lets you enable or disable QoS set the bandwidth and allow the P 2812HNU 51c to automatically assign priority to upstream traffic according to the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence or packet length Section 19 3 on page 309 e The Queue Setup screen lets you lets you configure QoS queue assignment Section 19 4 on page 311 e The Class Setup screen lets you add edit or delete QoS classifiers Section 19 5 on page 313 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 307 Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS e The Policer Setup screen lets you add edit or delete QoS policers Section 19 5 on page 313 e The Monitor screen lets you view the P 2812HNU 51c s QoS related packet statistics Section 19 7 on page 323 19 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter QoS versus Cos QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the same flow are given the same priority CoS class of service is a way of managing traffic in a network by groupi
279. e certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Private Key This read only text box displays the private key in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the private key into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Signing Request This read only text box displays the request information in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form This displays null in a signed certificate Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Load Signed This button is available only in a certification request details screen Certificate Click this to import a certificate signed by the CA to replace the request 14 3 4 Load Signed Certificate Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates and then Load Signed or the Load Signed Certificate button in the Certificate Details screen of a certification request to open the Load Certificate screen Follow the instructions in this screen to save a valid certificate to repalce the request 288 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 14 Certificate
280. e device interface Description Type Rate vians02ip vontiuxid connid 1eme nar Firewall mwe mio Modify N A N A odify H atmo ipoe_O_8_35 ATM IPOE N A N A Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled g i pppi pppoe_0_0_33 ATM PPPoE Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled atm2 ipoe_0_0_34 ATM IPOE Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ptm0 100 ipoe_0_0_1 100 PTM IPoE Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled eth4 100 ipoe_eth4 100 ETH IPoW Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled 2 3 2 Setting Interface Groups This part shows examples of creating multiple networks groups with the WAN services that you have configured in the previous section P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials Follow the steps below to map traffic from LAN 1 to PVC 1 and traffic from LAN 2 and LAN 3 to PVC 2 Table 4 DSL Connection Groups GROUP LAN IP ADDRESS LAN INTERFACE WAN INTERFACE GR1 192 168 2 x LAN1 ppp1 0 33 GR2 192 168 3 x LAN2 LAN3 atm2 0 34 Note Before configuring interface groups make sure you are connected to LAN 4 which will not be in a group other than the default group Otherwise you need to use the IP address of the new group to access the P 2812HNU 51c after you apply the changes Note You can also use policy forwarding to map traffic from a LAN port to a specific PVC but you need to enter the source IP address port number and or MAC add
281. e ey sas ea Sacahttd aaa tue eta ald sou uA ie 379 Poupenn cha elese tc cacaiasioss enaincnan ee usu eecatl cna ogni ced gs Ue tase genen synameeas tuenadenbnmsmuantenas 385 PROMI SOCAN GANGS soraia a a a a Aaaa EE aE OE 395 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 9 Contents Overview P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users Guide cc cacti ees ater cece baaa aa aaa aan eid 3 D u ument Conventio mS ne ee ay 5 OU NANNY ass echt ee ade racecar Ea Eiaa a a a cetalen tins 7 ey ge 2 eee eo ne ee ee eer ee eee ee 9 Table of 211 See ee ee ae eee ee ae ee eee ae eee ome 11 Part l Usei 3 eee 21 Chapter 1 introducing the P 2812HNU 5 C isisasisiansassataasniianesicniansaasnssanannnssdinnsesteraasansasiaanesdadansdasasaaanaaann 23 TEON ON piskannaa R boGeeladeiecmad beamlaaite 23 1 2 Ways to Manage ihe P 2812HNU 5D1C ncercsniriniirini a 24 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the P 2812HNU 510 ssesssssesssssssssssssrrsssrnsssnnssrnssrenssressrenssens 24 1 4 Applications for the P 2812ANU 510 sasusissrnsdeninennssusnansus isnon ana EE aaa 24 141 Memel ACCESS sioiias a aN 24 LAS VolP momet Cale oascssiobedaee a 27 Te USE Fe SPA naa T 27 Vd A EEE Ee a E A A E A aciaaaiieediccomnsceiancdbadeadien nededeascaes 28 Te PE Se TENON ifinia na ea EE A SOENS 29 Teas USNO Tile Peet E onna 29 TE CEDES GORE araona ES 30 Chapter 2 TONAS aiioe aaa Aa aa 33 AE E E E E E E E T 33 22 How TO Setup
282. e following screen Figure 181 Interface Grouping Criteria Criterion Source MAC Address O DHCP option 60 DHCP option 61 IAID DUID type Hardware type Time Link layer address O DHCP option 125 Enterprise Number Manufacturer OUI Product Class Model Name Serial Number DUID LLT P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 24 Interface Group The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 126 Interface Grouping Criteria LABEL DESCRIPTION Source MAC Enter the source MAC address of the packet Address DHCP Option 60 Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 of the matched traffic such as the type of the hardware or firmware DHCP Option 61 Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic IAID Enter the Identity Association Identifier LAID of the device for example the WAN connection index number DUID Type Select DUI D LLT DUID Based on Link layer Address Plus Time to enter the hardware type a time value and the MAC address of the device Select DUI D EN DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number to enter the vendor s registered enterprise number Select DUI D LL DUID Based on Link layer Address to enter the device s hardware type and hardware address MAC address in the following fields Select Other to enter any string that identifies the device
283. e of virtual channels e Virtual Circuits A series of virtual paths between circuit end points Figure 200 Virtual Circuit Topology Virtual Circuit End to End lt 4 gt Segment K K ATM Switch Virtual Path Virtual Channel Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points In an ATM cell header a VPI Virtual Path Identifier identifies a link formed by a virtual path a VCI Virtual Channel Identifier identifies a channel within a virtual path A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit F4 cells operate at the virtual path VP level while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel VC level F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections but use different predefined VCI values F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC connections and are distinguished from data cells by a predefinded Payload Type Identifier PTI in the cell header Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types e segment F4 flows VCI 3 e end to end F4 flows VCI 4 segment F5 flows PTI 100 e end to end F5 flows PTI 101 OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availbility between two DSL devices Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 29 Diagnostic whi
284. e physical Ethernet WAN port The number after the dot represents the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection The number after the underscore _ represents the index number of connections through the same interface null means the entry is not valid Description This shows the descriptive name of this connection 8 and 35 or O and 1 are the default VPI and VCI numbers The last number represents the index number of connections over the same PVC or the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection null means the entry is not valid Received P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 2 4 Route Info Table 10 Status gt WAN Service Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bytes This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface Drops This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface Transmitted Bytes This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface Pkts This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface Errs This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface Drops This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface Refresh
285. e power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution e If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source e Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one e Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord e Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s e If you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE Key stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical ps and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Safety Warnings P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users EE 2 ee ne ee nee ene ee ae ee eee 21 InTeCUE ING Ine PZSIZANU SIC seai eae 23 MUA NANG sea T A T I A A A A E isan A E A E A T sansa bends 33 itioducmg Me Web COniguratoi uconirosiiismiuass
286. e printer software already installed before they can use the printer Follow your printer manufacturers instructions on how to install the printer software on your computer P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer Note Your printer s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your computer Connect your printer to the P 2812HNU 51c instead 11 4 The Print Server Screen The print server screen is used to enable the print server function on the P 2812HNU 51c and confirm that the P 2812HNU 51c and the USB printer are able to communicate successfully Click USB Services gt Print Server to display the Print Server screen Figure 105 USB Services gt Print Server Printer Configuration Printer Server Enable Print Server Printer Printer Name Printer Model USB_PRINTER null q Note When you set up a network printer that is attached to this device print server enter http 192 168 1 1 631 printers USB_PRINTER as the URL to access the print server Apply Save Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 USB Services gt Print Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Print Server Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c act as a print server Printer Name This displays the descriptive name of the associated printer for its recognition on the print server network This name is displayed on a computer on the pr
287. e to you e What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support IEEE 802 119 for example What is the most appropriate standard to use e What security options do the other wireless devices support WPA PSK for example What is the best one to use e Do the other wireless devices support WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup If so you can set up a well secured network very easily Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non WPS devices manually although this is somewhat more complicated to do e What advanced options do you want to configure if any If you want to configure advanced options ensure that you know precisely what you want to do If you do not want to configure advanced options leave them alone 152 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 4 The General Screen Note If you are configuring the P 2812HNU 51c from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the P 2812HNU 51c s SSID or security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the P 2812HNU 5ic s new settings Click Network gt Wireless LAN to open the General screen Figure 60 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection Auto Current 11 Bandwidth 20MHz Control
288. ead through this chapter Basics Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called TCP IP TCP IP in turn is a set of application protocols that perform specific functions An extension number called the TCP port or UDP port identifies these protocols such as HTTP Web FTP File Transfer Protocol POP3 E mail etc For example Web traffic by default uses TCP port 80 When computers communicate on the Internet they are using the client server model where the server listens on a specific TCP UDP port for information requests from remote client computers on the network For example a Web server typically listens on port 80 Please note that while a computer may be intended for use over a single port such as Web on port 80 other ports are also active If the person configuring or managing the computer is not careful a hacker could attack it over an unprotected port P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 275 Chapter 13 Firewall Some of the most common IP ports are Table 83 Common IP Ports 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POP3 Default Filtering Policies Filtering rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply The default rule for incoming traffic blocks all incoming connections from the WAN to the LAN If you wish to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN you will need to create custom rules to
289. ecessary P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 3 How to Use ATM QoS with Multiple PVCs and Interface Groups Note Voice traffic will not be affected by the user defined QoS settings on the P 2812HNU 51c It always gets the highest priority The P 2812HNU 51c allows you to have more than one PVC using the ATM layer 2 interface You can apply different ATM QoS settings to traffic through different PVCs In this example real time or video service such as using a webcam to send photos or uploading media content to share videos and images on a blog comes from LAN 1 and is forwarded out through PVC 1 0 33 Non time sensitive data transfers such as e mail or FTP come from LAN 2 or LAN 3 and are forwarded out through PVC 2 0 34 The maximum upstream transmission speed of your ADSL port is 1 Mbps You want to give the real time traffic fixed bandwidth 400 Kbps and higher priority over the general data transmission which shares the bandwidth 600 Kbps Table 2 ATM QoS and Group Settings TRAFFIC TYPE LAN PVC ATM QOS BANDWIDTH GROUP Real time or video LAN1 atm1 0 33 CBR 400 Kbps GR1 service Non time sensitive LAN2 LAN3 atm2 0 34 NonRealtime 600 Kbps GR2 data VBR Note To apply different QoS priorities to different applications over a PVC use the Advanced gt QoS screens The packet level QoS feature is not applicable to a PVC with CBR or Realtime VBR enabled P
290. ecific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2010 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieva
291. ect the check box and click Apply to have the P 2812HNU 51c establish a wireless link with the selected wireless device SSID This field is available only when you select Enabled Scan in the Bridge Restrict field This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range BSSID This field is available only when you select Enabled Scan in the Bridge Restrict field This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range Refresh Click Refresh to update the Remote Bridges MAC Address table when Bridge Restrict is set to Enabled Scan Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 2812HNU 51c 7 9 The Wireless Scheduling Screen The wireless LAN can be scheduled to disable on certain days and at certain times Use this screen to view the wireless scheduling rules and enable or disable a rule on the P 2812HNU 51c To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 1 67 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Note Using the Wireless LAN gt General screen or the WPS button to turn off or on the wireless LAN has priority over wireless power off scheduling Figure 72 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling q Note f 1 Power off scheduling rules apply only when the wireless LAN is activated Wireless LAN Power Off Scheduling A maximum of 16 entries can be configured a Active 1 g Rule Name ton Tue wed Thu F
292. ect this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier 802 1P This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a priority level between 0 and 7 from the drop down list box 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VLAN ID IP Protocol This field is available only when you select 802 1Q in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095 This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and select the protocol service type from TCP UDP ICMP or IGMP If you select User defined enter the protocol service type number IP Packet Length This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length from 28 to 1500 in the fields provided DSCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided TCP ACK This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field If you select this option the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK Acknowledge flag DHCP This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field Select this option and select a DHCP option If
293. ed LABEL DESCRIPTION Modify Click the View button to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate or certification request Click the Load Signed button to import a valid certification to replace the request Click the Remove button to delete the certificate or certification request You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use Create Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the P Certificate 2812HNU 51c generate a certification request Request Import Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate Certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the P 2812HNU 51c 14 3 1 Create Certificate Request Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates and then Create Certificate Request to open the My Certificate Create screen Use this screen to have the P 2812HNU 51c generate a certification request Figure 141 Create Certificate Request Create new certificate request To generate a certificate signing request you need to include Common Name Organization Name State Province Name and the 2 letter Country Code for the certificate Certificate Name Common Name Organization Name State Province Name Country Region Name US United States v Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Create Certif
294. ed Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using Auto IKE key management Authentication Method Select Pre Shared Key to use a pre shared key for authentication A pre shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation It is called pre shared because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection Select Certificates X 509 to use a certificate for authentication Pre Shared Key This field is available only when you select Pre Shared Key in the Authentication Method field Type from 8 to 31 case sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal 0 9 A F characters You must precede a hexadecimal key with a 0x zero x which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key For example in 0x0123456789ABCDEF Ox denotes that the key is hexadecimal and 0123456789ABCDEF is the key itself Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre shared key You will receive a PYLD_ MALFORMED payload malformed packet if the same pre shared key is not used on both ends Certificates This field is available only when you select Certificates in the Authentication Method field Select the certificate you want to use from the drop down list box You can create import and configure certificates in the Security gt Certificates screens NAT Traversal Select
295. elect the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the P 2812HNU 51c from the WAN Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 21 Remote Management 21 6 The IP Address Screen Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt IP Address to open the following screen Use this screen to specify the trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the P 2812HNU 51c Figure 171 IP Address Access Control IP Address The IP Address Access Control mode if enabled permits access to local management services from IP addresses contained in the Access Control List If the Access Control mode is disabled the system will not validate IP addresses for incoming packets The services are the system applications listed in the Service Control List Access Control Mode Disable Enable 192 168 1 99 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 117 IP Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Access Control Select Enable to activate the secured client list Select Disable to Mode disable the list without deleting it IP Address This is the IP address of the trusted computer from which you can manage the P 2812HNU 51c Remove Select this check box and click the Remove button to delete this entry from the P 2812HNU 51c Add Click this button to create
296. embedded in the data stream The SIP ALG translates the P 2812HNU 51c s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if you enable the SIP ALG P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Use this screen to enable or disable the SIP VoIP ALG in the P 2812HNU 51c To access this screen click NAT gt ALG Figure 87 NAT gt ALG ALG Active SIP ALG Each field is described in the following table Table 55 NAT gt ALG LABEL DESCRIPTION Active SIP ALG Select this check box to allow SIP sessions to pass through the P 2812HNU 51c SIP is a signaling protocol used in VolP Voice over IP the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings 8 7 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the P 2812HNU 51c features described in this chapter Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT Table 56 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO 7 FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer
297. en will appear Click Tools to go back to the Firmware screen Figure 191 Error Message P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 373 Chapter 28 Tools 28 3 The Configuration Screen Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears in this screen as shown next Figure 192 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload File Path Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults Password will be 1234 LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset to server Reset Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up save the P 2812HNU 51c s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your P 2812HNU 51c is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the P 2812HNU 51c s current configuration to your computer
298. enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device IGD 1 0 See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP 22 3 The UPnP Screen Click Advanced gt UPnP to display the screen shown next See Section 22 1 on page 339 for more information Figure 173 Advanced gt UPnP UPnP Setup v Activate Universal Plug and Play UPnP feature q Note Enable NAT in WAN service before enabling UPnP Apply Save P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPnP The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 119 Advanced gt UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Activate Universal Plug Select this check box to enable UPnP Be aware that anyone and Play UPnP Feature could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the P 2812HNU 51c s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Apply Save Click this to save the setting to the P 2812HNU 51c 22 4 Installing UPnP in Windows This section shows you how to configure or install UPnP in Windows 22 4 1 Windows 7 Windows 7 already has UP
299. end logs from the P 2812HNU 51c to an external syslog server Universal Plug and Play UPnP A UPnP enabled device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 31 Product Specifications Table 139 Firmware Specifications continued QoS Quality of Service You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service HTTPS or FTP traffic for example from a computer on a network LAN or WAN for example can access the P 2812HNU 51c PPPoE Support RFC2516 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet emulates a dial up connection It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out PPPoE dial on demand Packet Filters VDSL Standards Your device s packet filtering function allows added network security and management VDSL line coding ITU T G 993 2 DMT modulation DSL handshake procedure protocol ITU T G 994 1
300. ending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means m
301. er Header Header Header Transport Mode Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet In Transport mode the IP packet contains the security protocol AH or ESP located after the original IP header and options but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet Such as TCP and UDP With ESP protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process Therefore the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN With the use of AH as the security protocol protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process Tunnel Mode Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption This is the most common mode of operation Tunnel mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers e Outside header The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway e Inside header The inside IP header contains
302. er and your P 2812HNU 51c The key is not sent over the network 7 4 5 MAC Filter This screen allows you to configure the P 2812HNU 51c to give exclusive access to specific devices Allow or exclude specific devices from accessing the P 2812HNU 51c Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Use this screen to change your P 2812HNU 51c s MAC filter settings Click the Edit button in the Wireless LAN gt General screen The following screen displays Figure 65 Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter MAC Filter MAC Restrict Mode Disabled Allow Deny aC Adres TT ocify The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Restrict Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the table below Mode Select Disabled to turn off MAC address filtering Select Allow to permit access to the P 2812HNU 51c MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the P 2812HNU 51c Select Deny to block access to the P 2812HNU 51c MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the P 2812HNU 51c This is the ind
303. er shows you how to configure system related settings such as system time password name the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval What You Can Do in this Chapter e The General screen lets you configure system settings Section 26 2 on page 363 The Time Setting screen lets you set the system time Section 26 3 on page 364 26 2 The General Screen Use the General screen to configure system settings such as the system password Click Maintenance gt System to open the General screen Figure 184 Maintenance gt System gt General UserName Password UserName admin Old Password New Password Retype to Confirm A Caution Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 26 System Settings The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 129 Maintenance gt System gt Genera LABEL DESCRIPTION UserName Type the user name you use to access the system Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the P 2812HNU 51c Retype to Type the new password again f
304. er the DHCP clients Enable IGMP Select this option to activate IGMP snooping This allows the P Snooping 2812HNU 51c to passively learn multicast group ponda Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c forward multicast packets to a Mode port that joins the multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports Blocking Mode Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c block all unknown multicast packets from the WAN Enable IP Alias Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the P 2812HNU 51c IP Address Enter the IP address of your P 2812HNU 51c in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for Mask example 255 255 255 0 factory default Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 4 The LAN IPv6 Screen Click Network gt LAN gt I Pv6 to open the I Pv6 screen See Section 5 7 on page 125 for background information about Pv6 Use this screen to configure the Pv6 settings for your P 2812HNU 51c s LAN interface Figure 57 LAN gt IPv6 IPv6 Site Prefix Configuration Type Delegated from WAN WAN Interface selected ipoe_0_0_1 123 ptm0 123 Static Site Prefix DHCPv6 Setup M Enable DHCPv6 Server Setup Standard Mode Blocking Mode Site Prefix Length 64 bits Router Adv
305. erface Use the following Static DNS IP address First DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Second DNS Server 0 0 0 0 IGMP Snooping v Enable IGMP Snooping Q Standard Mode Blocking Mode IP Alias Enable IP Alias IP Address IP Subnet Mask P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 32 LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN TCP IP Group Name Select the interface group for which you want to configure the LAN TCP IP settings See Chapter 13 on page 117 for how to create a new interface group IP Address Enter the LAN IPv4 address you want to assign to your P 2812HNU 51c in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 factory default DHCP Setup Active DHCP Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent Otherwise deselect this to not have the P 2812HNU 51c provide any DHCP services The DHCP server will be disabled DHCP Server Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c assign IP addresses and provide subnet mask gateway and DNS server information to the network The P 2812HNU 51c is the DHCP server for the network When the P 2812HNU 51c acts as a DHCP server the following items need to be set
306. ers ASCII string or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F preceded by Ox for each key 7 4 3 WPA 2 PSK In order to configure and enable WPA 2 PSK authentication click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 63 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2 PSK R ooa wes wes station wos J advencedsetun O Wireless Setup Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection Auto Y Current 11 Bandwidth 40MHz Control Sideband Lower Common Setup Network Name SSID ZyKEL4171B4 C Hide Network Name SSID C Enable Wireless Multicast Forwarding WMF q Note Only IGMP v2 report message is supported for wireless multicast forwarding function BSSID 00 23 F8 41 71 B5 Security Mode WPA2 PSK Y F Active Compatible WPA PSK Compatible v Encryption TKIP 4ES Pre Shared Key Group Key Update Timer 0 sec MAC Filter P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 1 57 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 37 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Generate This field is only available for WPA PSK Key Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c automatically generate an SSID and pre shared key The SSID and Pre Shared Key fields will not be configurable when you select this option Security Mode Choose WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK fr
307. ertisement Setup E Send Router Advertisement E Enable MLD Snooping gmat The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 33 LAN gt IPv6 LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv6 Site Prefix Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask IPv6 uses an address prefix to Configuration represent the network address The P 2812HNU 51c uses the prefix to Type generate an IPv6 address Delegated from Select this option to automatically obtain an Pv6 network prefix from WAN the service provider or an uplink router WAN Select a WAN interface through which you want to get an IPv6 network Interface prefix selected You should already have configured a WAN service with IPv6 enabled Static Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 network prefix for the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN interface Site Prefix Enter the Pv6 prefix that the P 2812HNU 51c uses to generate its LAN IPv6 address Site Prefix An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start Length from the left in the address compose the network address This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Table 33 LAN gt IPv6 LABEL DESCRIPTION Router Advertisement Setup Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters such as IPv6 prefix and DNS informati
308. es Network Settings ma Location Connections General DNS Hosts Point to point connec This network interface is not c 7 Help gt Close P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 4 In the Authenticate window enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button Q Authenticate x System policy prevents modifying the configuration An application is attempting to perform an action that requires privileges Authentication as one of the users below is required to perform this action B CJ chris gt gt Details cancel all Authenticate rE In the Network Settings window select the connection that you want to configure then click Properties Network Settings Location l E Connections General DNS Hosts b Wil ed c r n a d a Point to point connec This network interface is not c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 437 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Properties dialog box opens a etho Properties E Connection Settings gt Configuration IP address Subnet mask Gateway address cancel e In the Configuration list select Automatic Configuration DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address
309. es n a Dial string APN null Connection Nailed UP Obtain an IP Address Automatically Use the following static IP address IP Address Obtain DNS info dynamically Use the following static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server q Note Entering the wrong PIN code 3 times will lock SIM card The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 3G Backup LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable 3G Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c use the 3G connection Backup as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails Card Descriptioin This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in the P 2812HNU 51c Otherwise it displays n a P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 123 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 30 3G Backup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 3G Status User Name This field displays e NoDevice when no 3G card is inserted e Disabled when the 3G WAN is not activated e Up when the 3G WAN connection is up Down when the 3G connection is down e NoResponse when there is no response from the inserted 3G card e NeedPIN if the PIN code you entered in the PIN field is not the right one for the 3G card you inserted e NeedPUK if you enter the PIN Personal Identification Number code incorrectly for three times and the SIM card is blocked by your ISP or e DamagedSIM when the SIM card i
310. es the server s IP address to 2 and port to B Both 4 D and 4 E can send packets to 2 B since 1 A has already sent packets to 4 The P 2812HNU 51c will perform NAT on the packets from 4 D and 4 E and P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup send them to the server at IP address 1 port A Packets have not been sent from 1 Ato 3 or 5 so 3 and 5 cannot send packets to 1 A Figure 53 Restricted Cone NAT Example a GD Port Restricted Cone NAT Port restricted cone NAT maps all outgoing packets from an internal IP address and port to a single IP address and port on the external network In the following example the P 2812HNU 51c maps the source address of all packets sent from internal IP address 1 and port A to IP address 2 and port B on the external network A host on the external network IP address 3 and Port C for example can only send packets to the internal host if the internal host has already sent a packet to the external host s IP address and port A server with IP address 1 and port A sends packets to IP address 3 port C and IP address 4 port D The P 2812HNU 51c changes the server s IP address to 2 and port to B Since 1 A has already sent packets to 3 C and 4 D they can send packets back to 2 B and the P 2812HNU 51c will perform NAT on them and send them to the server at IP address 1 port A P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Packets have not been sent from 1
311. ess of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network Fragmentation A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks Threshold while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy 7 11 3 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network 7 11 3 1 SSID Normally the P 2812HNU 51c acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the P 2812HNU 51c does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 11 3 2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 1 73 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network see the device s User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the P 2812HNU 51c which devi
312. ess security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network Wireless security methods available on the P 2812HNU 51c are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the P 2812HNU 51c identity The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your P 2812HNU 51c Table 155 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption EEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA Most Secure WPA2 Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the P 2812HNU 51c and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional 472 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are e User based identification that allows for roaming e Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting managemen
313. esses to the P 2812HNU 51c See Chapter 7 Wireless LAN in the User s Guide for more information cannot use WDS connection 1 You can use WDS only when WPS is disabled or wireless security is set to No Security WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK The wireless security settings apply to both WDS links and the connections between the P 2812HNU 51c and any wireless clients 2 WDS is only compatible with other ZyXEL Devices of the same model 30 7 UPnP When using UPnP and the P 2812HNU 51c reboots my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh My Network Places gt Local Network P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 1 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN port or from your computer 2 Re connect the Ethernet cable The Local Area Connection icon for UPnP disappears in the screen Restart your computer cannot open special applications such as white board file transfer and video when I use the MSN messenger 1 Wait more than three minutes 2 Restart the applications P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the P 2812HNU 51c s hardware and firmware features 31 1 Hardware Specifications Table 138 Hardware Specifications Dimensions 240 W x 170 D x 60 H mm Weight 420 g Power Specification 1
314. et Prefix Length Enter the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask provided by your ISP Static WAN Gateway I Pv6 Address Enter the gateway IPv6 address provided by your ISP Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue IPoA This screen displays only when you set the DSL link type to IPoA for the ATM interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface Figure 45 WAN Configuration IPoA WAN IP Settings WAN IP Address WAN Subnet Mask DSL PTM Interface Configuration Enter information provided to you by your ISP to configure the WAN IP settings 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 WAN Configuration IPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP Address Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP WAN Subnet Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP Mask P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 25 WAN Configuration IPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue 5 5 1 4 NAT IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation The screen is available only when you select IP over Ethernet in the WAN Service Configuration screen or set the DSL link type to IPoA for the ATM interface and configure a WAN connection using the ATM interface Figure 46 WAN Con
315. ettings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network Windows Vista XP 2000 Mac OS 9 OS X and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP IP on your computer If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP make sure that your network s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet In this appendix you can set up an IP address for e Windows XP NT 2000 on page 418 e Windows Vista on page 421 e Windows 7 on page 425 e Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 on page 429 e Mac OS X 10 5 and 10 6 on page 432 e Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME on page 435 e Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE on page 440 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 417 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows XP NT 2000 1 2 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT Click Start gt Control Panel user Internet Explorer L My Documents A Outlook Express m 4 My Recent Documents Y Paint im My Pictures Files and Settings Transfer W A BY Command Prompt E My Music Acrobat Reader 4 0 My Computer Tour Windows xP Windows Movie Maker 4 Printers and Faxes Help and Support Search All Programs gt L Run g OFF Ko Turn Off Computer untitled Paint In the Control Panel click the Network Con
316. etup The screen appears as shown 170 Figure 74 Wireless LAN gt Advanced Setup 802 11 Mode Preamble Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold 2347 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 Number of Wireless Stations Allowed 16 Output Power 100 v Multicast Rate 18 Mbps v 802 11 Protection Advanced Setup 802 11b g Mixed vw Auto Ww Long Y Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Wireless LAN gt Advanced Setup Output Power LABEL DESCRIPTION RTS CTS Enter a value between 0 and 2432 Threshold Fragmentation This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter a value Threshold between 256 and 2432 Number of Specify the maximum number from 1 to 64 of the wireless stations that Wireless may connect to the P 2812HNU 51c Stations Allowed Set the output power of the P 2812HNU 51c If there is a high density of APs in an area decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs Select one of the following 20 40 60 80 or 100 Multicast Rate Select a data rate at which the P 2812HNU 51c transmits wireless multicast traffic If you select a high rate multicast traffic may occupy all the bandwidth and cause network congestion P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 47 Wireless LAN gt Advanced Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 11 Mode Select 802 11b Only
317. everity level of the log System This field displays the system module from which the logs come Message This field states the reason for the log 27 3 The Log Settings Screen Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the P 2812HNU 51c is to send logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the P 2812HNU 51c is to record and display P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 27 Logs To change your P 2812HNU 51c s log settings click Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings The screen appears as shown Figure 187 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings memory V Active Log Level Mode Log Settings Syslog Logging If the log mode is enabled the system will begin to log all the selected events For the Log Level all events above or equal to the selected level will be logged If the selected mode is Remote or Both events will be sent to the specified IP address and UDP port of the remote syslog server If the selected mode is Local or Both events will be recorded in the local Syslog Server IP Address Syslog Server UDP Port Local Vv The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 132 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select to enable or disable system logging Log Level Select the severity level of the logs that you want the P 2812HNU 51c to display record and send to the log server The P 2812HNU 51c displays a
318. ex number of the MAC address MAC This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied Address access to the P 2812HNU 51c Modify Click the Remove icon to delete the entry Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes Add Click this to create a new MAC filtering rule 7 4 6 Adding a New MAC Filtering Rule Click the Add button in the MAC Filter screen The following screen displays Figure 66 Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter gt Add Add MAC Filter Address MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the P 2812HNU 51c in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Back Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes Apply Click this to save your changes and go back to the previous screen 7 5 The More AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple wireless networks on the P 2812HNU 51c Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt More AP The following screen displays Figure 67 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Mo
319. f the peer content depends on the peer ID type For IP type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection For DNS or E mail type a domain name or e mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces although trailing spaces are truncated The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string Phase 1 Phase 2 Mode Select Main or Aggressive from the drop down list box Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode Encryption Select DES 3DES AES 128 ES 192 or AES 256 from the drop Algorithm down list box When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput This implementation of AES uses a 128 bit 192 bit or 256 bit key AES is faster than 3DES P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN Table 75 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec Setting gt Manual continued
320. f00 8 The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses Table 159 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS DESCRIPTION FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local node FF01 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local node FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 All hosts on a local connected link FF02 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local connected link FF05 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 All routers on a local site FF05 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 All DHCP severs on a local site 484 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group Table 160 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FFOO oO FF01 FF02 FF03 FF04 FF05 FFO6 FFO7 FFO8 FFO9 FFOA FFOB FFOC FFOD FFOE lo fo oO O oO To T oO O T oO O T gt O o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l s o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l ls o l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l FFOF Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and Pv6 subnet mask compose of 128 bit binary digits which are divided into eight 16 bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notat
321. features described in this chapter Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The P 2812HNU 51c can work in bridge mode or routing mode When the P 2812HNU 51c is in routing mode it supports the following methods IP over Ethernet IP over Ethernet IPoE is an alternative to PPPoE IP packets are being delivered across an Ethernet network without using PPP encapsulation They are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells PPP over Ethernet Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP PPPoE is an IETF P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 125 Chapter 5 WAN Setup standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for bo
322. fer of files including TCP 21 large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP User Defined 2 Internet Group Management Protocol MULTI CAST is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or
323. ff The P 2812HNU 51c is not receiving power PHONE 1 2 Green On A SIP account is registered for the phone port Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incoming call Orange On A SIP account is registered for the phone port and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account Off The phone port does not have a SIP account registered USB Green On The P 2812HNU 51c recognizes a USB connection Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is sending receiving data to from the USB device connected to it Off The P 2812HNU 51c does not detect a USB connection WAN Green On The P 2812HNU 51c has an Ethernet connection with a device on the WAN Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is sending receiving data to from the WAN Off The P 2812HNU 51c does not have an Ethernet connection with the WAN ETHERNET Green On The P 2812HNU 51c has a successful 1000 Mbps 1 4 Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network LAN Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 1000 Mbps Orange On The P 2812HNU 51c has a successful 10 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network LAN Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is sending or receiving data to from the LAN at 10 100 Mbps Off The P 2812HNU 51c doe
324. ffic matches a class you configured in the Class Setup screen If you select Ethernet Priority I P Precedence or Packet Length and assigned by traffic does not match a class configured in the Class Setup screen the P 2812HNU 51c assigns priority to unmatched traffic based on the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence or packet length See Section 19 8 on page 324 for more information If you select None traffic which does not match a class is mapped to the default queue with the lowest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 19 4 The Queue Setup Screen Click QoS gt Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next Use this screen to configure QoS queues for egress traffic shaping Figure 159 QoS Queue Setup Queue Setup Queue Setup Create a new Queue maximum 7 configurable entries for WAN port upstream and maximum 3 configurable entries for LAN WLAN downstream The QoS function has been disabled Queues would not take effects Ro Active Name Interface Priority Weight Buffer Management Rate Limit Modify 1 DT g a tk WwW N q2_w2 WAN 2 yi 0 H q3_w3 WAN 3 3 DT 0 g w q3_wia WAN 3 1 DT 0 g T a q3_wib WAN 3 1 DT 0 y T M VoiceQueue WAN 1 1 DT 0 amp i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 102 QoS Queue Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Add
325. figuration NAT IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation IPoE IPoA Network Address Translation Settings Network Address Translation NAT allows you to share one Wide Area Network WAN IP address for multiple computers on your Local 4rea Network LAN E Enable NAT Symmetric NATO Port Restricted Cone NAT Restricted Cone NAT Full Cone NAT C Enable Firewall IGMP Multicast C Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy Back The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 WAN Configuration NAT IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation IPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable NAT Select this option to activate NAT on this connection Select the type of NAT you want the P 2812HNU 51c to use for traffic through this connection Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate Firewall on this connection Enable IGMP Select this check box to have the P 2812HNU 51c act as an IGMP Multicast Proxy proxy on this connection This allows the P 2812HNU 51c to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group It can reduce multicast traffic significantly Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 11 7 Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 5 1 5 Default Gateway The screen is not available when you select Bridging in the WAN Service Configuration screen Figure 47 WAN
326. g algorithm Excess Burst Size Specify the additional amount of bytes that are admitted at the committed rate besides the committed burst size This is the maximum size of the second token bucket in the srTCM Peak Rate Specify the maximum rate at which packets are admitted to the network The peak rate should be greater than or equal to the committed rate This is to specify how many bytes of tokens are added to the second bucket every second in the trTCM Peak Burst Specify the maximum amount of bytes that are admitted at the committed Size rate This is the maximum size of the second token bucket in the trTCM Conforming Specify the action that the P 2812HNU 51c takes on green marked Action packets Select Pass to forward the packets Select DSCP Mark to assign a specified DSCP number between 0 and 63 to the packets and forward them The packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network Partial Specify the action that the P 2812HNU 51c takes on yellow marked Conforming packets Action Select Pass to forward the packets Select Drop to discard the packets Select DSCP Mark to assign a specified DSCP number between 0 and 63 congestion on the network P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide to the packets and forward them The packets are dropped if there is Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Table 107 QoS Policer Setup Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Non Specify
327. g section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator 2 2 3 2 Creating and Using a Profile A profile lets you automatically connect to the same wireless network every time you use the wireless client You can also configure different profiles for different networks for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an access point configured for WPA PSK security In this example the SSID is SSID_Example3 the profile name is PN_Example3 and the pre shared key is ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey You have chosen the profile name PN_Example3 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next Click Add to configure a new profile Figure 16 ZyXEL Utility Profile Connect a a T Add Delete Edit Profile Info Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 11b g Channel Auto Security DISABLE 2 The Add New Profile screen appears The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks which are displayed in the Scan Info box Click on Scan if you want to search again You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list Figure 17 ZyXEL Utility Add New Profile gt Profile Name gt SSID gt
328. g two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B Figure 221 Subnetting Example After Subnetting p 192 168 1 0 25 192 168 1 128 25 eon eb oe oe oe Gus aaa ss P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 2 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 2 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast ad
329. ge Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period the Warranty Period from the date of purchase The Warranty Period varies by region Check with your vendor and or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect
330. ghbor devices CCMs within an MA CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 379 Chapter 29 Diagnostic e Loopback test checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response LBR from its target after it sends the Loop Back Message LBM If no response is received there might be a connectivity fault between them e Link trace test provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where the fault is If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP this may indicate a fault Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to the line connectivity status report 29 3 The General Diagnostic Screen Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic to open the screen shown next Ping and traceroute help check availability of remote hosts and also help troubleshoot network or Internet connections Figure 198 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt General General Info TCP IP Address URL or IP Address Ping Traceroute The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 135 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP IP Address Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection or trace the route packets take to Ping Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered Traceoute Click
331. h which the service is forwarded Trigger Port The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the P 2812HNU 51c to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Start This is the first port number that identifies a service End This is the last port number that identifies a service Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service Open Port The open port is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The P 2812HNU 51c forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Start This is the first port number that identifies a service End This is the last port number that identifies a service Protocol This is the transport layer protocol used for the service Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below No This is the rule index number read only Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Server Name This field displays the name of the service used by the packets for this virtual server WAN Interface This field displays the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 52 NA
332. he default route or 127 0 0 0 for the loopback interface which is used mainly for self test The destination 224 0 0 0 is for multicasting packets or reserved for testing But if you are not using multicast applications just The destination 255 255 255 255 is used to find computers when an IP address is not known For example before the DHCP IP address of your computer is determined your computer sends packets with the destination looking for DHCP servers on the P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Table 141 route print Command Output OUTPUT DESCRIPTION Netmask The destination subnet mask of packets that this route entry is to route The subnet mask can be the apropriate subnet mask for a network 255 255 255 255 for a host or 0 0 0 0 for the default route Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer should send the matched packets Interface The IP address of an physical interface on this computer used to send the matched packets for this route entry Metric The metric hop count of this route Normally the lower the number the faster to a destination Default Gateway The IP address of the gateway through which this computer sends all the rest packets if this computer cannot find any other matched routes for the packets Persistent Routes This section lists all routes that are manually configured In this example the 172 16 1
333. he priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest priority if the WAN interface is connected Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces Selected DNS Server Available WAN Interfaces Interfaces pppl atm2 Use the following Static DNS IP address Primary DNS server E a Secondary DNS server Back next P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 8 The summary screen displays Click Apply Save to save your changes and go back to the Internet Connection screen WAN Setup Summary Make sure that the settings below match the settings provided by your ISP Jt ama ae O 0 34 Ta TL E ate POE Service Name ipoe_0_0_34 Tate ee ee VBR Nnrt IP Address Automatically Assigned Service State Enabled a Enabled NAT Type Full Cone NAT Disabled oln Z eF 2 a a ASAE Disabled IGMP Multicast Disabled Click Apply Save to have this interface to be effective Click Back to make any modifications 9 The Internet Connection screen should look like the following Layer 2 Interface 4 Internet Connection 3G Backup Wide Area Network WAN Service Setup Choose Add or Remove to configure a WAN service over a selected interface Current Mode is PTM ATM WAN Active WAN Mode is selected with the switch on the back of th
334. he users on your network from accessing certian web sites Click Advanced Setup gt Parental Control gt URL Filter to open the following screen Figure 176 Parental Control gt URL Filter URL Filter maximum of 100 entries can be configured Enable URL Filter Blocking list Pe active address Poe Mody 1 WWW example cam 80 g Ww P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 351 Chapter 23 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 122 Parental Control gt URL Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable URL Filter Select the check box to enable URL filtering on the P 2812HNU 51c Blocking list The P 2812HNU 51c prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below This is the index number of the rule Active Select the check box to enable the filtering rule Address This is the URL of the web site in this rule Port This is the port number the web server uses to forward HTTP traffic Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule Add Click Add to create a new rule Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 2812HNU 51c 23 3 1 Adding URL Filter Click the Add button in the URL Filter screen to open the following screen Figure 177 URL Filter Configuration Add URL Filter URL Address Port Number
335. he wireless client to a network 2 2 3 1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL utility as in the following diagram The wireless client is labeled C and the access point is labeled AP gt eae ow There are three ways to connect the client to an access point e Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured e Manually connect to a network e Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point AP which is configured for WPA PSK security and connected to the Internet Before you connect to the access point you must know its Service Set IDentity SSID and WPA PSK pre shared key In this example the SSID is SSID_Example3 and the pre shared key is ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen 1 Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown next Figure 12 ZyXEL Utility Site Survey Site Information ssp Channel Signal Network T
336. hich is the message carrying standard the Internet runs on So Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals Speech over the Internet or another network that uses the Internet Protocol SIP SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device like a computer or the P 2812HNU 51c send messages to another In VoIP these messages are about phone calls over the network For example when you dial a number on your P 2812HNU 51c it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device the number you dialed to take part in the call SIP Accounts A SIP account is a type of VoIP account It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet When you set the P 2812HNU 51c to use your SIP account to make calls the P 2812HNU 51c is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the Internet Strictly speaking you don t need a SIP account It is possible for one SIP device like the P 2812HNU 51c to call another without involving a SIP service provider However the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another How to Find Out More
337. his field is not available When the remote IP address type is configured to Subnet enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router Protocol This field displays ESP and the P 2812HNU 51c uses ESP Encapsulation Security Payload for VPN The ESP protocol RFC 2406 provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH Key Exchange Select Auto I KE or Manual from the drop down list box Auto I KE Method provides more protection so it is generally recommended Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using Auto IKE key management Encryption Select DES 3DES AES aes cbc or ESP_NULL from the drop down Algorithm list box When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56 bit key Triple DES 3DES is a variation on DES that uses a 168 bit key As a result 3DES is more secure than DES It also requires more processing power resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput This implementation of AES aes cbc in Cipher Block Chaining CBC mode uses a 128 bit key AES is faster than 3DES Select ESP_NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption When you select ESP_NULL you do not enter an encryption key Encryption
338. hone services available through the P 2812HNU 51c s phone ports you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider 9 10 2 1 The Flash Key Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time a few hundred milliseconds before releasing it On newer telephones there should be a flash key button that generates the signal electronically If the flash key is not available you can tap press and immediately release the hook by hand to achieve the same effect However using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise With manual tapping if the duration is too long it may be interpreted as hanging up by the P 2812HNU 51c You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key 9 10 2 2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe Type Call Service Mode Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 227 Chapter 9 Voice After pressing the flash key if you do not issue the sub command before the default sub command timeout 2 seconds expires or issue an invalid sub command the current operation will be aborted Table 67 European Flash Key Commands SUB COMMAND COMMAND DESCRIPTION Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call Switch back to the call if there is no second call Flash 0 Drop the call prese
339. ial up Preferences Address e Network Connections Network Identification Bridge Connections Network Tasks Advanced Settings Optional Networking Components fl Create a nem eannertinn 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add or remove components of Windows xP To add of remove a component click the checkbox 4 shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components Management and Monitoring Tools Networking S es Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a variety of specialized network telated services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 9 MB P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 5 In the Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Networking Services To add of remove a component click the check box 4 shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Subcomponents of Networking Services CO RIP Listener 0 0 MB O 24 Simple TCP IP Services 0 0 MB amp Universal Plug and Play Description A
340. ic WEP in the wireless network Note It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption The other types of encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your P 2812HNU 51c you can also select an option WPA compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA compatible option in the P 2812HNU 51c Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every device in the wireless network must have the same key 7 11 4 WiFi Protected Setup Your P 2812HNU 51c supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Each WPS connection works P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 1 75 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 11 4 1 between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the
341. ical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs e Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional ante
342. icate Request LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters not including spaces to identify this certificate Common Name Select a radio button to identify the certificate s owner by IP address domain name or e mail address Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation domain name or e mail address in the field provided The domain name or e mail address can be up to 31 ASCII characters The domain name or e mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string P 2812HNU 51c Users Guide Chapter 14 Certificate Table 87 Create Certificate Request continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Organization Name Type up to 127 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs You may use any character including spaces but the P 2812HNU 51c drops trailing spaces State Province Type up to 127 characters to identify the state or province where the Name certificate owner is located You may use any character including spaces but the P 2812HNU 51c drops trailing spaces Country Region Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is Name located Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to begin certificate or certification request generation After you click Apply the Certificate Request Details screen displays Click Load Signed Certificate to import a cer
343. iccsescssescscscacstastatiasasiassdiansedsdstassaraiseacasessassadaniasiniaadasiss 339 2 WOME ie viccat on a eheeea eile ee Se 339 22 1 1 What Yoo Can Doin this Chapter 4 cite ssiindecs natin iia N 339 22 2 What You Need io KNOW sorsra aE EEA 339 PS Ihe UPDP Chee it aeoeaii oa a ai 340 224 Installing UPF n NGON asna Insel ennai meaNiaed 341 Peal WHINGOWS Z oein a E 341 Oe COWS AP oaa e a aun dubeeetauaeeedpeatemmentaes 342 Be LONO URNE m VOAS A E ania a i emiatiinaa 343 22 5 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device ccccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeaes 344 225 2 Web Gonigurator Easy ACCESE sirni ionidni arana 346 Chapter 23 Paremal COn Olaren a a a 349 PN OVEN r A 349 20 1 1 What Yot Can Doin this Chapter aicsctsinscnicccdnsunsatccasaedesderncnieeeteanen ice docbieiedantuaeegscee 349 23 2 The Time Restricion Sree aspris riai annann AS SAE A AARNE aE ANADA 349 2021 Adding a Sohedule sirrinin a ete 350 ec Fhe URL PINS SOO ai eosa eet hs pate acne cope deh tea ate a 351 233 1 OCG WAS FANE ana 352 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 24 MPR ER GOND saa aS a acc ces ac eee eee ede 353 TR LET La 1 a E mere Cement CeCe nT er te coer eeN CREE eT crete Memento or Sen Cr enna acres 353 2011 What rot Can Do in this Chaplet x icscccdachniciccnsundcicvessedescceiaaseaciuannmpesdvoneeapiedetaneascte 353 a42 The Merate Group SGre ainiin aa aA TNA 353 24 2 1 Intertace Group Conigurat oN saissetiae eea TA 355 242 2 mer
344. ice atm2 0_0_34 v 3 Select IP over Ethernet and click Next WAN Service Configuration Select WAN service type PPP over Ethernet PPPoE IP over Ethernet Bridging Enter Service Description ipoe_0_0_34 C Enable IPv6 for this service P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 4 Select Obtain an IP address automatically and click Next WAN IP Settings Enter information provided to you by your ISP to configure the WAN IP settings Notice If Obtain an IP address automatically is chosen DHCP client will be enabled If Use the following Static IP address is chosen enter the WAN IP address subnet mask and interface gateway Obtain an IP address automa cally _ Enable DHCP Option 60 Vendor class Identifier 0023f84171b4 C Enable DHCP Option 61 IAID DUID type DUID EN Identifier GadS3crf C Enable DHCP Option 125 Manufacturer OUI o023f8 Product class P 2812HNU Sic Model name P 2812HNU 5ic 0023f84171b4 Serial nmuber jO023f84171b4 Use the following Static IP address WAN IP Address WAN Subnet Mask WAN gateway IP Address m 5 Select Enable NAT and Full Cone NAT then click Next Network Address Translation Settings Network Address Translation NAT allows you to share one Wide Area Network WAN IP address for multiple computers on your Local Area Network LAN Enable
345. iei aaea aiiis 73 Technical Referente cicsssiseincsssiensasintasscsinsaniasserdasccsasssiaaiasiaiadsassssiasteneasasaaianianeciansaaiaidaieaianiaass 79 ee eee E E E E A E E A E E 81 MOAN fe NPD casts rhs E A E A A NE OEE ES sean ducinaainds 97 EAN SEND criei a smo venidadeummeunicaioaeladm teaindattelasasetenis 137 Omane EAN araen a A EASE 149 Network Address Translation NAT csciceeccccctecnettecied eaeeccae de eeescontesmedcantedendesaat aeania waa 183 io to EE EE E E AI AE E E A E E A A E A 195 FIG SPAN aa AE N 233 Shao A USE FET orara E iud aauehnnieanecis 239 PP eRe PA E E E E E E E eee E T 253 Bliss viniani AA T E rarer pore 275 Eh III EEL A A E E A A E E E E E E E E 281 Sae POE Ace iar A E a 293 FRR Tr PINE E T N E E NA A E A T S 297 DNS FOUG egi E a a EN 301 A T T A A ceed E E T A E E T 305 Quali OT Serice JOS senenn A A R A 307 Dynamic DNS SOUD siriana a E A 329 Romaoi Manoa mE i Peete terres tm rer et terre t eer eran terres tre errr rr ern te rere terre ttt 331 Unversal Fiuran Pay TUF WE sicuani 339 Parental COON acomiada a a aE a eae 349 oaee OU a a errr Tmt nee een ree 353 ENO 8 Serer eee nee erer Merete tener ee Creer teen Tc ment errr tee nnee tren meer eer ee ree nr rrr errr tre re ter 359 EPS DAY DEE iara canoe aaarcaitaten NTA ANNE 363 arse vast Steeda soe A O SUE Ss cen a A EE E A TN A Sawai aeons a 367 NTN ic cS Cacti E E ce ga cai E eee Same cele un E cmc ee eee erteeees 371 DONO cei hcg ppeesuctiasta pantera whe
346. if your VoIP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls This allows the P 2812HNU 51c to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the P 2812HNU 51c to keep it from re translating the IP address since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server Outbound Proxy Port Enter the SIP outbound proxy server s listening port if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value RTP Port Range Start Port End Port Enter the listening port number s for RTP traffic if your VoIP service provider gave you this information Otherwise keep the default values To enter one port number enter the port number in the Start Port and End Port fields To enter a range of ports e enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start Port field e enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Table 58 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider continued LABEL DESCRIPTION SRTP Support When you make a VoIP call using SIP the Real time Transport Protocol RTP is used to handle voice data transfer The Secure Real time Transport Protocol SRTP is a security profile of RTP It is designed to provide encryption and authentication for the RTP data in both unicast and multicast app
347. ime VBR Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Apply Save Click this button to save your changes and go back to the previous screen 5 5 The Internet Connection Screen Use this screen to change your P 2812HNU 51c s WAN settings Click Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection The summary table shows you the configured WAN services connections on the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup To use NAT firewall or IGMP proxy in the P 2812HNU 51c you need to configure a WAN connection with PPPoE or PoE Note When a layer 2 interface is in VLAN MUX Mode or MSC Mode you can configure up to eight WAN services for each interface Figure 39 Internet Connection Layer 2 Interface Internet Connection Wide Area Network WAN Service Setup Choose Add or Remove to configure a WAN service over a selected interface Current Mode is ETH WAN Active WAN Mode is selected with the switch on the back of the device aterface Descrstion Tyne Rate viansozin viandiuxtd Connid 1eme Nar Firewall 1pv6 MLD moar atmo ipoe_0_8_35 ATM IPOE N A N A N A N A Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled g f ptm0 100 ipoe_0_0_1 100 PTM IPoE N A T 100 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Eg mi eth4 100 ipoe_eth4 100 ETH IPoW N A 1 100 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Eg mi The following table describes the la
348. in the DUI D field Hardware Enter the 16 bit hardware type of the device from which the traffic type comes For example Ethernet is 1 and Experimental Ethernet is 2 Time Enter the time in seconds since midnight UTC January 1 2000 the DUID is generated Link layer Enter the MAC address of the device address Enterprise Enter the vendor s 32 bit enterprise number registered with the IANA number Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Identifier Enter a unique identifier assigned by the vendor DUID Enter the DHCP Unique Identifier DUID of the device DHCP Option 125 Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic Enterprise Enter the vendor s 32 bit enterprise number registered with the IANA number Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Manufacturer Specify the vendor s OUI Organization Unique Identifier It is usually OUI the first three bytes of the MAC address Product Class Enter the product class of the device Model Name Enter the model name of the device Serial Enter the serial number of the device Number Back Click this button to return to the previous screen without saving any changes Apply Click this button to save your settings back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 357 Chapter 24 Interface Group P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 25 1 25 1 1 E mail Notification Overview A mail server is
349. innensecnnaiennee 161 To We MEE AP GOOO orca nn ieiiein teh seed tunaeNion ei aIE a 162 Dk VPN AP ECE coisas iene can Paci ecient Sas aici acral uae a hasnt lain wees atin 163 TS Wer ce IBGE 226 iosuccaissanuebedcenconeenatctanuebe Saraunnenstesdanueneeteadeece aenadbacerciaaanuraatmeddneecieraneniecs 163 of The WPS Staion GOGEN sncsenincnndanimioiiki isidin RE AibieRMUMe 165 FO hE NDS GOON ae 166 7 9 The Wireless Sohedulihg SONOS risorsi aaan aa E 167 7 9 1 Adding a WLAN Power off Scheduling Rule s ssssssessressessnerrnenessnsrnnesnsrnneneennnrnnnennns 169 7 0 The Advanced Sep SGroan acarieni eani RA 170 fal TEC RESINS dashin aei aan a A oE E a 171 EL Wireless Network OVerVioW sa ccerissiearsoncissearasesannnansthtsaaeaaui iE Eaa i 172 FeV Addmonal Wireless Terme siirde oiriin aoaaa A a naan 173 fka Wireless secuit OVa Vaw airaa ANENA 173 LILA WIF Po ected So senina A A 175 Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT sscccccssseseeeeneeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenseneeeeneeeeeeeensenesneneees 183 Be Pee aoaea mur saneued cueeva acd punesaaeta iedaanisibee 183 8 11 What Yu Can Do in thie Chapter xc secesass roewencerirspacesnutinorasabacanniinteaa wbspceailunn eaten 183 8 2 What You Need to KNOW ac ssterasts codecs sanncenet anaa E ion A N 183 83 The Porn Forwarding SCEN acess iaxpdnasioangnteerd rai parse Naa Ra 184 8 3 1 The Por Forwarding Edit SCIOS sseccercssecccctisccvassesedielaasiacacdtadelaguelassnaniemineunenias 186 P 2812HNU 51c
350. int server network when a print job is executed Printer Model This displays the model name of the printer currently connected to the P 2812HNU 51c print server Apply Save Click Apply Save to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 11 5 Add a New Printer Using Windows This example shows how to connect a printer behind the P 2812HNU 51c to your computer using the Windows XP Professional operating system Some menu items may look different on your operating system 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Printers and Faxes to open the Printers and Faxes screen Click Add a Printer Figure 106 Printers Folder S Printers and Faxes File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q J B m B Printers and Faxes Printer Tasks See Also Troubleshoot printing 8 Get help with printing Other Places G Control Panel y Scanners and Cameras oO My Documents A My Pictures 3 My Computer A Acrobat PDF Writer Ssa WebWorks Rasterizer PRT405 on zytwpt0l Adobe PDF Microsoft Office Doc Fie i v E co PRT402 on 2ytwpt0l Microsoft XPS Document 2 The Add Printer Wizard screen displays Click Next Figure 107 Add Printer Wizard Welcome Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you in
351. io channels to increase throughput The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding This field is available only when you set the 802 11 Mode to 802 11n Only or 802 11b g n Mixed in the Advanced Setup screen Control Sideband This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth field to 40MHz Set whether the control channel set in the Channel field should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel bands This field is available only when you set the 802 11 Mode to 802 11n Only or 802 11b g n Mixed in the Advanced Setup screen Network Name SSID The SSID Service Set Dentity identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated Wireless devices associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN Note If you are configuring the P 2812HNU 51c from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the P 2812HNU 51c s SSID or wireless security settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the
352. ion Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character 1 10 A F Each block s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters For example FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF FCOO 0000 0000 0000 Interface ID In IPv6 an interface ID is a 64 bit identifier It identifies a physical interface for example an Ethernet port or a virtual interface for example the management IP address for a VLAN One interface should have a unique interface ID EUI 64 The EUI 64 Extended Unique Identifier defined by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers is an interface ID format designed to adapt with I Pv6 It is derived from the 48 bit 6 byte Ethernet MAC address as shown next EUI 64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address See the following example MAC 00 13 49 ff 12 34 56 EUI 64 02 13 49 oo E 34 56 Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6 addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated Unlike DHCPv6 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration the owner and status of addresses don t need to be maintained by a DHCP server Every I Pv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when
353. iority if the WAN interface is connected Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces Selected DNS Server Interfaces Available WAN Interfaces Use the following Static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server Back Next 7 The summary screen displays The VLAN ID is appended to the service name you specified automatically Click Apply Save to save your changes and go back to the Internet Connection screen WAN Setup Summary Make sure that the settings below match the settings provided by your ISP Connection Ty PPPoE ma Category IP Address Automatically Assigned Service State Enabled NAT Disabled NAT Type Symmetric NAT Disabled Click Apply Save to have this interface to be effective Click Back to make any modifications Back K Apply Save P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials DSL Connection for Remote Management 1 Goto the WAN gt Internet Connection screen Click Add Layer 2 Interface Internet Connection 3G Backup Wide Area Network WAN Service Setup Choose Add or Remove to configure a WAN service over a selected interface Current Mode is PTM ATM WAN Active WAN Mode is selected with the switch on the back of the device PES SEN OE RESTS EE CD PC atmO ipoe_O_8_35 ATM IPOE N A N a NZA N
354. irtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 51 Example of Traffic Shaping Cell Rate PC ys SCR Time P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 127 Chapter 5 WAN Setup ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate cells may be dropped Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time VBR RT or non real time VBR nRT co
355. is screen shows the P 2812HNU 51c s general device and network status information Use this screen to access the statistics and client list Network WAN Layer 2 Use this screen to add or remove an ATM PTM or Ethernet layer 2 Interface interface Internet Use this screen to configure ISP parameters WAN IP address Connection assignment and other advanced properties 3G Backup Use this screen to configure the 3G WAN connection LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN TCP IP DHCP and IP alias settings I Pv6 Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings for your P 2812HNU 51c LAN interface Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings WLAN authentication security settings and MAC filtering rules More AP Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the P 2812HNU 51c WPS Use this screen to enable WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup and view the WPS status WPS Station Use this screen to use WPS to set up your wireless network WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System links to other access points Scheduling Use this screen to configure the times your wireless LAN is turned off Advanced Use this screen to configure the advanced wireless LAN settings Setup NAT Port The NAT screens are available only when you enable NAT in a Forwarding WAN connection Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing th
356. is shows the PIN Personal Identification Number of the P 2812HNU 51c Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push button method Generate Click this button to have the P 2812HNU 51c create a new PIN WPS Status This displays Configured when the P 2812HNU 51c has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the P 2812HNU 51c or you click Release_ Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings Release_Co This button is available when the WPS status is Configured but not nfiguration configurable if you disable WPS Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the P 2812HNU 51c Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 7 The WPS Station Screen Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button Configuration PBC or PIN Configuration Note If you select No Security in the Wireless LAN gt General screen and click Push Button in the WPS Station
357. isk icon Mac OS X in this example on your desktop to open the Mac HD window Figure 113 Mac OS X HD P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 12 Open the Applications folder Figure 114 Macintosh HD Folder System User Guides And Information 6 Music D Documents Tm Pictures Marble Blast Gold Nanosaur 2 o QuickTime Player Safari a System Preferences ZyXEL USBWirelessUtility L 35 items 25 58 GB available P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 14 Double click the Printer Setup Utility icon Figure 116 Utilities Folder a0ea Utilities lt gt Gm a Disk Utility Grab Grapher A Network 7 i 4 Mac OS X i a BE Desktop Installer Java Keychain Access rii zyxel l f i A Applications A w ay A Migration Assistant Netinfo Manager Network Utility i Movies 6 Music 3 R e Ra 5 Documents gt Pictures ODBC Administrator Printer Setup Utility Remote Install Mac OS X a 24 items 25 58 GB available 15 Click the Add icon at the top of the screen Figure 117 Printer List Add aee Printer List Status Kind 16 Click the IP Printer tab to set up your printer e Press the alt key and click More Printers in the Printer Browser screen e Select Advanced from the top drop down list e Select Inte
358. isplay properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 213 Internet Options Security AE General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings O Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites f This zone contains all Web sites you Gree haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone 3 Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites C Custom Level D Default Level OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 449 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window Security Settings Settings 5 Scripting B Active scripting O prome 3 Allow paste operations via script O Disable
359. ithout saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 19 5 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add edit or delete QoS classifiers A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming interface For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow You can give different priorities to traffic that the P 2812HNU 51c forwards out through the LAN WLAN or WAN interface Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly Similarly give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Ea Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Click QoS gt Class Setup to open the following screen Figure 161 QoS Class Setup General Class Setup Create a new Class maximum of 32 entries can be configured Class P n z F rward YLAN ID ricci etase clossifcoion eterio rotnar paee eocar remato a roai a example Class Setup From Intf LANL Ether Type IPv6 Unchange Unchange Unchange Unchange q2_w2 g Ww The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 104 QoS Class Setup Classification LA
360. join the network Once an unauthorized person has access to the network she he can either steal information or introduce malware malicious software intended to compromise the network For these reasons a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network or understand the data carried on it These security standards do two things First they authenticate This means that only people presenting the right credentials often a username and password or a key phrase can access the network Second they encrypt This means that the information sent over the air is encoded Only people with the code key can understand the information and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key These security standards vary in effectiveness Some can be broken such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol WEP Using WEP is better than using no security at all but it will not keep a determined attacker out Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly For example the WPA PSK security standard is perfectly secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker s software to guess for example a twenty letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters but it is not very secure if you use a Short key which is very easy to guess P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 151 Chapter 7 Wireless
361. k gt Wireless LAN screens Use these screens to set up your P 2812HNU 51c s wireless connection e The General screen lets you turn the wireless connection on or off set up wireless security and make other basic configuration changes Section 7 4 on page 153 You can also configure the MAC filter to allow or block access to the P 2812HNU 51c based on the MAC addresses of the wireless stations e The More AP screen lets you set up multiple wireless networks on your P 2812HNU 51c Section 7 5 on page 162 e Use the WPS screen and the WPS Station screen to use WiFi Protected Setup WPS WPS lets you set up a secure network quickly when connecting to other WPS enabled devices Use the WPS screen see Section 7 6 on page 163 to enable or disable WPS generate a security PIN Personal Identification Number and see information about the P 2812HNU 51c s WPS status Use the WPS Station see Section 7 7 on page 165 screen to set up WPS by pressing a button or using a PIN P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN e The WDS screen lets you set up a Wireless Distribution System in which the P 2812HNU 51c acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points Section 7 8 on page 166 e The Scheduling screen lets you set the times your wireless LAN is turned off Section 7 9 on page 167 The Advanced Setup screen lets you change the wireless mode and make other advanced wireless configuration changes Section 7 10
362. k this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing 10 2 1 Example of Accessing Your Shared Files From a Computer You can use Windows Explorer to access the file storage devices connected to the P 2812HNU 51c Note The example in this User s Guide shows you how to use Microsoft s Windows XP to browse your shared files Refer to your operating system s documentation for how to browse your file structure 1 Open Windows Explorer to share files in the attached USB device using Windows Explorer browser 2 In Windows Explorer s Address bar type a double backslash followed by the IP address of the P 2812HNU 51c the default IP address of the P 2812HNU 51c is 192 168 1 1 and press ENTER A screen asking for password authentication appears Type the user name and password you use to access the system and click OK The default system user name is admin or user and the default system password is 1234 or user Figure 103 File Sharing via Windows Explorer amp ZyZEL_Gateway 192 168 1 1 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Bak a us Search ie Folders E Address W 192 168 1 1 Folders Desktop My Documents a O Adobe D Corel User Files E D My eBooks e f E My Music 4 3 My Pictures D My Received Files B My Shapes 3 My Videos User name E admin E Y My Computer My Network Places Password wane Enti
363. ke sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your P 2812HNU 51c will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the P 2812HNU 51c unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation fo
364. l is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number e If the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number e Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 161 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication IPSEC_TUNNEL Header tunneling protocol uses this service AI M New I CQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHOP Client BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix G Common Services Table 161 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation IPSEC_TUNNEL Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast trans
365. l plan rules you specify in the text box provided See Section 9 4 1 on page 210 for how to set up a rule Dialing Interval Selection Dialing Interval Selection Enter the number of seconds the P 2812HNU 51c should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it makes the phone call The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers If you select Immediate Dial Enable you can press the pound key to tell the P 2812HNU 51c to make the phone call immediately P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide regardless of this setting Chapter 9 Voice Table 58 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Immediate Dial Enable Immediate Dial Enable Select this if you want to use the pound key to tell the P 2812HNU 51c to make the phone call immediately instead of waiting the number of seconds you selected in the Dialing Interval Selection field If you select this dial the phone number and then press the pound key The P 2812HNU 51c makes the call immediately instead of waiting You can still wait if you want Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 9 4 1 Dial Plan Rules A dial plan defines the dialing patterns such as the length and range of the digits for a telephone number It also includes country codes access codes area c
366. l system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Your use of the P 2812HNU 51c is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 511 Appendix Legal Information e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations
367. lWyYot HOKxVi2z zCLr4z4g6LLDzg2Tr2acyusc yt pO4 b1LEROMEC AWE AAAAANAOGCSGGSIb3S DQOEBBAUAAS4GBAECLDVzZLS1 hYMDLLS7sUsJhibxXkrsalVzsIsjxRdbanlgKdqr2 pXozYtSterBvSA7MHLoZXKSq0QzD8 Zr YeSAZRHfxJqDvdbkt 1UBnV40GOWAndm2 t Iley54AY EMCZJ99dAfVILC 8J5H PoopxQju96ZvG8Lz7uMlhkVzLrceit END CERTIFICATE REQUEST Load Signed Certificate P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 287 Chapter 14 Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Certificate Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate If you want to change the name type up to 31 characters to identify this certificate You may use any character not including spaces Type This field displays general information about the certificate signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate request means this is a certification request Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN Organization O State ST and Country C Certificate This read only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form This displays null in a certification request You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste th
368. ld Select this option to play a customized recording when you put people on hold IVR Play Index Select the tone to play when you put someone on hold This field is configurable only when you select Music On Hold See Section 9 10 on page 216 for information on how to record these tones Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 9 4 The SIP Service Provider Screen Click VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider to open the SIP Service Provider screen Use this screen to configure the SIP server information QoS for VoIP calls the numbers for certain phone functions and dialing plan Figure 90 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider Service Provider Selection Service Provider Selection ServiceProvider 1 General SIP Service Provider Name ServiceProvider 1 SIP Local Port 5060 1025 65535 SIP Server Address changeme SIP Server Port 5060 1025 65535 REGISTER Server Address changeme REGISTER Server Port 5060 1025 65535 SIP Service Domain changeme RFC support C Support Locating SIP Server RFC 3263 Z RFC 3262 Require 100rel Bound Interface Name Bound Interface Name pppo3Go Outbound Proxy NOTE Use Outbound Proxy if Outbound Proxy Address isn t empty Outbound Proxy Address Outbound Proxy Port 5060 1
369. lds are grayed out and not applicable and the Transport Type can also be set to AUTO if you select this option P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Table 58 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider continued LABEL DESCRIPTION RFC 3262 RFC 3262 defines a mechanism to provide reliable transmission of SIP provisional response messages which convey information on the processing progress of the request This uses the option tag 100rel and the Provisional Response ACKnowledgement PRACK method Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c include a SIP Require Supported header field with the option tag 100rel in all INVITE requests When the P 2812HNU 51c receives a SIP response message indicating that the phone it called is ringing the P 2812HNU 51c sends a PRACK message to have both sides confirm the message is received If you select this option the peer device should also support the option tag 100rel to send provisional responses reliably Bound Interface Name Bound Interface Name If you select LAN or Any_WAN the P 2812HNU 51c automatically activates the VoIP service when any LAN or WAN connection is up If you select Multi_WAN you also need to select the pre configured WAN connections The VoIP service is activated only when one of the selected WAN connections is up Outbound Proxy Outbound Proxy Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server
370. le WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g or 5GHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna is a theoret
371. licant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA 2 you need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 A 256 bit Pairwise Master Key PMK is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client 478 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs 4 The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 229 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example INTERNEJ WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clie
372. lications SRTP uses the Advanced Encryption Standard AES cipher for data encryption The P 2812HNU 51c supports encryption using AES with a 128 bit key To protect data integrity SRTP uses a Hash based Message Authentication Code HMAC calculation with Secure Hash Algorithm SHA 1 to authenticate data HMAC SHA 1 produces a 80 or 32 bit authentication tag that is appended to the packet Both the caller and callee should use the same algorithms to establish an SRTP session SRTP Support Select this option to enable SRTP on the P 2812HNU 51c Crypto Suite Select the encryption and authentication algorithm set used by the P 2812HNU 51c to set up an SRTP media session with the peer device Select AES_CM_128 HMAC_SHA1_80 or AES _CM_128 HMAC_SHA1_ 32 to enable both data encryption and authentication for voice data Select AES_CM_128_ NULL to use 128 bit data encryption but disable data authentication Select NULL_CIPHER_HMAC_SHA1_ 80 to disable encryption but require authentication using the default 80 bit tag DTMF Mode DTMF Mode Control how the P 2812HNU 51c handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons You should use the same mode your VolP service provider uses RFC2833 send the DTMF tones in RTP packets InBand send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compressi
373. llows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 8 MB 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next 22 5 Using UPnP in Windows XP This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the P 2812HNU 51c Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the P 2812HNU 51c Turn on your computer and the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 22 5 1 3 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway Right click the icon and select Properties Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q sxx B PO Search E Folders 5 Address e Network Connections l Internet Gateway Network Tasks Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device mip Rename this connection view status of this connection E Change settings of this connection Disable LAN or H Status Create Shortcut E 4 Rename Properties In the I nternet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were au
374. ly Exceptions JV Enable JavaScript Advanced IV Enable Java r Fonts amp Colors Default Font Times New Roman 7 Size 16 v Advanced Colors r File Types HE H Configure how Firefox handles certain types of files Manage Cancel Help 4 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 453 Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure
375. mber In the full SIP URI this is the part before the Number symbol You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters Authentication User Name Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters Password Enter the user name for registering this SIP account exactly as it was given to you You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters Apply To Phone Select a phone port on which you want to make or receive phone calls for this SIP account If you map a phone port to more than one SIP account there is no way to distinguish between the SIP accounts when you receive phone calls The P 2812HNU 51c uses the most recently registered SIP account first when you make an outgoing call If a phone port is not mapped to a SIP account you cannot receive or make any calls on the phone connected to this phone port Advanced Basic Click Advanced to display and edit more information for the SIP account Click Basic to display and configure the basic SIP account settings URI Type Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the P 2812HNU 51c sends the SIP number SIP include the SIP service domain name TEL do not include the SIP service domain name Voice Features P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Table 57 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Account continued
376. means that the first 32 bits 2001 db8 is the subnet prefix P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 Link local Address A link local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network the LAN It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4 You can have the same link local address on multiple interfaces on a device A link local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80 10 The link local unicast address format is as follows Table 158 Link local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 0 Interface ID 10 bits 54 bits 64 bits Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4 A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3 Unspecified Address An unspecified address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 or is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address It is similar to 0 0 0 0 in IPv4 Loopback Address A loopback address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 or 1 allows a host to send packets to itself It is similar to 127 0 0 1 in I Pv4 Multicast Address In IPv6 multicast addresses provide the same functionality as Pv4 broadcast addresses Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6 A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group A multicast address has a predefined prefix of f
377. mmunication capabilities You may access the Internet in one of these ways e You can have super fast secure Internet access over analog POTS telephone lines The P 2812HNU 51c supports both Packet Transfer Mode PTM and Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM and can be backward compatible with ADSL ADSL2 and ADSL2 e You can use an Ethernet WAN port for Internet access through the Ethernet WAN connection e You can use 3G as your WAN and access the Internet via a 3G network The P 2812HNU 51c also allows you to use a traditional analog telephone to make Internet calls You can use Quality of Service QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Please refer to the following description of the product name format e H denotes an integrated 4 port hub switch e N denotes IEEE 802 11n wireless functionality There is an embedded mini PCI module for IEEE 802 11b g n wireless LAN connectivity e U denotes a USB port used to set up a 3G WAN connection via a 3G wireless card or share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive The P 2812HNU 51c can also function as a print server with an USB printer connected Only use firmware for your P 2812HNU 51c s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your P 2812HNU 51c Models ending in 1 for example P 2812HNU 51c denote a device that works over the analog telephone
378. n 14 4 on page 289 14 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter Certification Authority A Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates Anyone can then use the certification authority s public key to verify the certificates You can use the P 2812HNU 51c to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority Certificate File Format The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 14 Certificate e PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X 509 certificate into a printable form 14 3 The Local Certificates Screen Click Security gt Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen This is the P 2812HNU 51c s summary list of certificates and certification requests Figure 140 Local Certificates Local Certificates Local Certificates Add View or Remove certificates from this page Local certificates are used by peers to verify your identity Maximum
379. n that devices need to process the frame across the network IEEE 802 1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Table 109 IEEE 802 1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL TRAFFIC TYPE Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class
380. nP installed To enable it 1 Click Start gt Control Panel and select Network and I nternet 2 Click Network and Sharing Center 3 In the Network and Sharing window set Network Discovery to On This activates the UPnP feature in Windows 7 jo E Network and Intenet Network and Sharing Center 4 Search 2 we s Tas Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices View full map Connect to a network Set up a connection or network A Bue d cag pam Manage network connections DIMENSION8250 Network Internet Diagnose and repair This computer x Network Private network Customize Access Local and Internet Connection Local Area Connection View status Network discovery On v ile sharing n Public folder sharing o Off Printer sharing Off Password protected sharing On Seealso Media sharing Off Internet Options Show me all the files and folders I am sharing Windows Firewall Show me all the shared network folders on this computer P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 22 4 2 Windows XP To install the UPnP in Windows XP 1 Click Start and Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 In the Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Help S Operator Assisted Dialing Q sax V pi 75 D
381. name assigned to your P 2812HNU 51c by your Dynamic DNS provider You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma Interface Select the WAN interface to use for updating the IP address of the domain name User Name Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Email If you select TZO in the Service Provider field enter the user name you used to register for this service Key If you select TZO in the Service Provider field enter the password you used to register for this service Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 21 1 21 1 1 Remote Management Overview This chapter explains how to configure the remote management and access control settings on the P 2812HNU 51c What You Can Do in this Chapter e The TR 069 screen lets you configure the P 2812HNU 51c s TR 069 auto configuration settings Section 21 3 on page 333 The TR 064 screen lets you enable management via TR 064 on the P 2812HNU 51c Section 21 3 on page 333 The SNMP screen lets you configure your SNMP settings Section 21 4 on page 334 e The Service Control screens let you configure through which interface s users can use which service s to manage the P 2812HNU 51c Section 21 5 on page 336 e The IP Address screens let you configure from which IP address es users can u
382. nd date manually Get from Time Server Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c get the time and date from the time server you specified below First NTP time server Second NTP time server Third NTP time server Fourth NTP time server Fifth NTP time server Select an NTP time server from the drop down list box Otherwise select Other and enter the IP address or URL up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length of your time server Select None if you don t want to configure the time server Check with your SP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 26 System Settings P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Logs 27 1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the P 2812HNU 51c s logs The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the P 2812HNU 51c log and then display the logs or have the P 2812HNU 51c send them to a syslog server 27 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e The View Log screen lets you see the logs for the categories
383. nd records the logs with the severity level equal to or higher than what you selected Mode Select Local to record the logs and store them in the local memory of the P 2812HNU 51c only Select Remote to send logs to the specified log server Select Both to record the logs and store them in the local memory and also send logs to the log server Syslog Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the log server IP Address Syslog Server Enter the UDP port of the log server UDP Port Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 27 Logs 370 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 28 1 28 1 1 Tools Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your P 2812HNU 51c Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware manage configuration files and restart your P 2812HNU 51c Use the instructions in this chapter to change the device s configuration file or upgrade its firmware After you configure your device you can backup the configuration file to a computer That way if you later misconfigure the device you can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your previous settings You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to return the device to the original default settings The firmware determines the device s available features and functionality You can downloa
384. nds the data directly to the mapped MAC address If it does not the computer broadcasts an ARP request to the network The host whose MAC address maps to the IP address responds When you use ping to check the connection to a computer no response does not mean the computer is not alive on the network The destination computer may be configured not to respond to any ping requests However you can use the arp a command line utility to check the IP addresses and MAC addresses of your neighboring computers or devices Syntax arp a Parameters arp d inet_addr s inet_addr eth_addr The d parameter can be use alone to remove all entries from an arp table or in conjunction with an IP address to remove just that IP address inet_addr The s parameter allows you to add entries based on IP address inet_addr and or MAC address et h_addr There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting route To check the ARP table on a Windows XP computer Click Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt The Command Prompt screen appears Type arp a and press Enter The following examples show the typical output of this command C gt arp a Interface 172 16 1 28 on Interface 0x1000003 Internet Address Physical Address Type 172164155 00 00 aa 19 07 38 dynamic PYZ LG LeS 00 18 f3 f0 aa 34 dynamic 172 16
385. ndwidth Common Setup q Note BSSID Security Mode MAC Filter V Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection Auto Current 11 Control Sideband Network Name SSID ZyXEL4171B4 C Hide Network Name SSID C Enable Wireless Multicast Forwarding WMF 20MHz Only IGMP v2 report message is supported for wireless multicast forwarding function 00 23 F8 41 71 B5 No Security Y The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Wireless LAN gt General No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Choose No Security from the drop down list box Mode P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 4 2 WEP Encryption In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WEP from the Security Mode list Figure 62 Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP Encryption Wireless Setup Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection Auto Y Current 11 Bandwidth 20MHz Control Sideband Common Setup Network Name SSID ZyXEL4171B4 C Hide Network Name SSID C Enable Wireless Multicast Forwarding WMF q Note Only IGMP v2 report message is supported for wireless multicast forwarding function BSSID 00 23 F8 41 71 B5 Security Mode WEP v WEP Encryption 128 bit v q Note 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4
386. ne calling you Click VoIP gt Call History gt Incoming Calls The following screen displays Figure 95 VoIP gt Call History gt Incoming Calls Call History Incoming Calls SS a TT 01 01 2000 20 38 43 Missed 51268 0 00 00 2 01 01 2000 20 39 20 Phone 1 51268 0 00 05 3 01 12 2000 13 00 04 Phone 2 51267 0 00 17 4 01 12 2000 13 02 35 Missed 51267 0 00 00 5 01 13 2000 19 40 40 Phone 1 51268 0 05 21 6 01 13 2000 19 46 16 Phone 1 51268 0 33 46 z 01 13 2000 20 20 09 Phone 1 51268 0 23 53 Each field is described in the following table Table 63 VolP gt Call History gt Incoming Calls LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this button to renew the received call list Clear All Click this button to remove all entries from the received call list No This is a read only index number time This is the date and time when the call was made phone port This is the phone port on which you received the call Missed means the call was unanswered phone number This is the SIP number that called you duration This displays how long the call lasted 9 10 Technical Reference This section contains background material relevant to the Vol P screens 216 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice VoIP VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional
387. nections and LEDs e P 2812HNU 51c Access and Login e Internet Access e Phone Calls and VolP e USB Device Connection e Wireless LAN Troubleshooting e UPnP 30 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The P 2812HNU 51c does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the P 2812HNU 51c is turned on 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the P 2812HNU 51c 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the P 2812HNU 51c and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the P 2812HNU 51c off and on 5 If the problem continues contact the vendor P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 6 on page 30 2 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Turn the P 2812HNU 51c off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor 30 2 P 2812HNU 51c Access and Login forgot the IP address for the P 2812HNU 51c 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the P 2812HNU 51c by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start
388. nections icon amp Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help CS Bact pO search Folders Fa Address G Control Panel Vg Control Panel x Neti Midd Hardware B Switch to Category view Co ons See Also Game Windows Update Controllers P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties J ocal Area Connection Cl Standard PCI Fast Ethemet Adapte Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename 4 On the General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using B Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following items v Ej Client for Microsoft Networks B File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks 4 Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Altemate Configuration
389. net 203 69 113 18 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 203 69 113 18 bytes 32 time 6ms TTL 56 Reply from 203 69 113 18 bytes 32 time 6ms TTL 56 Reply from 203 69 113 18 bytes 32 time 6ms TTL 56 Reply from 203 69 113 18 bytes 32 time 7ms TTL 48 Ping statistics for 203 69 113 18 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum 6ms Maximum 7ms Average 6ms The number of bytes here indicates packet size As most data is broken up into smaller packets this makes the ping test fairly representative of a typical network connection The default packet size on Windows is 32 bytes Time is the number of milliseconds the data requires to make the roundtrip journey from your computer to the destination host and back again The lower the number the faster the connection between the two points Note Some hosts are deliberately configured to not respond to ping requests As such we suggest pinging two or three hosts when performing your ping test P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting If your ping test fails to get a response then you may see a message like this C gt ping www example com Pinging www example com 192 0 32 10 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 192 0 32 10 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss C gt
390. net File System CIFS protocol for its file sharing functions CIFS compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the P 2812HNU 51c CIFS protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows Linux Samba and other operating systems refer to your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility NFS Network File System NFS is a protocol most commonly used on Unix like systems in order to share files across the network P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 10 File Sharing Samba SMB is a client server protocol used by Microsoft Windows systems for sharing files printers and so on Samba is a free SMB server that runs on most Unix and Unix like systems It provides an implementation of an SMB client and server for use with non Microsoft operating systems File Transfer Protocol This is a method of transferring data from one computer to another over a network such as the Internet 10 1 3 Before You Begin Make sure the P 2812HNU 51c is connected to your network and turned on 1 Connect the USB device to one of the P 2812HNU 51c s USB ports Make sure the P 2812HNU 51c is connected to your network 2 The P 2812HNU 51c detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on Note If your USB device cannot be detected by P 2812HNU 51c see
391. net browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow e Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 e JavaScripts enabled by default e Java permissions enabled by default See Appendix C on page 445 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 3 1 1 Accessing the Web Configurator Make sure your P 2812HNU 51c hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Launch your web browser 3 Type https 192 168 1 1 or http 192 168 1 1 as the URL P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator 4 A password screen displays Enter the default admin user name admin and default admin password 1234 Otherwise enter the default user name user and user password user You cannot configure the VoIP and TR 069 settings with the user account The password displays in non readable characters If you have changed the password enter your password and click OK Click Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field Figure 23 Password Screen Connect to 192 168 1 1 A DSL Router User name gi admin Password esoe Cl Remember my password 3 2 Web Co
392. nfigurator Main Screen Figure 24 Main Screen Device Information User Name Model Number MAC Address Firmware Version DSL Firmware Version WAN 0 Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask WAN 1 Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask WAN 1 Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask Message admin P 2812HNU Sic 02 10 18 01 00 01 1 02 BLL 0 b1 d22i ATM IPOE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PTM IPOE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ETH IPoW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Refresh Interval i x Apply System Uptime 2 days 2 hours 6 minutes Current Date Time 03 Jan 2000 02 06 34 System Mode Routing Bridging CPU Usage E 17 83 Memory Usage 33 Interface Status DSL Link Down kbps kbps ETH WAN NoLink N A LANL NoLink N A LANZ Up 100M Full LANS NoLink LAN4 NoLink N A WLAN Up 150M 3G USB NoDevice N A More Status 74 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 3 Introducing the Web Configurator As illustrated above the main screen is divided into these parts A title bar e B navigation panel e C main window D status bar 3 2 1 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure P 2812HNU 51c features The following tables describe each menu item Table 6 Navigation Panel Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Status Th
393. nformation Hardware Address Network Interface en1 ne ae ee 00 30 65 25 6a b3 Traceroute Whois Finger PortScan Transfer Statistics Sent Packets 1230 IP Address es 10 0 2 2 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 11 Mbit s Recv Packets 1197 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Apple Collisions 0 Model Wireless Network Adapter 802 11 Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment GNOME using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation Note Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME 1 Click System gt Administration gt Network Te Authorizations E Hardware Drivers Help and Support SE About GNOME Co About Ubuntu Hardware Testing a Language Support Window D out 5 network E Network Tools 2 When the Network Settings window opens click Unlock to open the Authenticate window By default the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password i
394. ng similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types CoS technologies include IEEE 802 1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ Differentiated Services or DS IEEE 802 1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field which replaces the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header Tagging and Marking In a QoS class you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP DiffServ Code Point value IEEE 802 1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet When the packet passes through a compatible network the networking device such as a backbone switch can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker Traffic Shaping Bursty traffic may cause network congestion Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre configured data transmission rate using buffers or P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS queues Your P 2812HNU 51c uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate Traffic Rate Traffic Rate Traffic Time Time Before Traffic Shaping After Traffic Shaping Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Tr
395. ng the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the P 2812HNU 51c The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your P 2812HNU 51c but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your P 2812HNU 51c will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the P 2812HNU 51c unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must hav
396. ng within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 Bits Multicast IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Internet Group Multicast Protocol IGMP is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1
397. ngs 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information Windows 7 This section shows screens from Windows 7 Enterprise 1 Click Start gt Control Panel RS Snipping Tool Calculator i lt a XPS Viewer aim g Windows Fax and Scan Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Ae Magnifier Help and Support gt All Programs 2 Inthe Control Panel click View network status and tasks under the Network and Internet category Ga Control Panel v 4 Adjust screen resolution Adjust your computer s settings View by Category Y K System and Security User Accounts and Family Safety 4 Review your computer s status iad Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer isd Set up parental controls for any user Find and fix problems 3 Appearance and Personalization Network and Internet Ay Change the theme i Change desktop background d i 7 Hardware and Sound Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods View devices and printers D Add a device a Change display language lt j Programs A Ease of Access ry Uninst
398. ning use of the Open Sourced Components or by applicable law you may not market co brand private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software or any part thereof You may not use the Software or any part thereof in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity You may not cause assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material Acknowledgements licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the Software and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms ZyXEL has provided as part of the Software package access to certain third party software as a convenience To the extent that the Software contains third party software ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information You agree to reasonably communicate the terms P 281
399. nly Call Waiting Specify the key combinations that you can enter to put a call on hold Enable when you are answering another Call Waiting Specify the key combinations that you can enter to turn the call waiting Disable function off IVR Specify the key combinations that you can enter to set up Interactive Voice Response IVR IVR allows you to record custom caller ringing tones the sound a caller hears before you pick up the phone and on hold tones the sound someone hears when you put their call on hold Internal Call Specify the key combinations that you can enter to call the phone s Call Transfer connected to the P 2812HNU 51c Specify the key combinations that you can enter to transfer a call to another phone P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice Table 58 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Unconditional Specify the key combinations that you can enter to forward all incoming Call Forward calls to the phone number you specified in the SIP gt SIP Account Enable screen Unconditional Call Forward Disable Specify the key combinations that you can enter to turn the unconditional call forward function off No Answer Call Forward Enable Specify the key combinations that you can enter to forward incoming calls to the phone number you specified in the SIP gt SIP Account screen if the calls are unanswered No Answer Call Forward Disabl
400. nnas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide IPv6 Overview IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 1038 IP addresses IPv6 Addressing The 128 bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16 bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons This is an example IPv6 address 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1la2f 0000 IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways e Leading zeros in a block can be omitted So 2001 0db8 1a2b 0015 0000 0000 1la2 0000 can be written as 2001 db8 1a2b 15 0 0 1la2f 0 e Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address So 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1a2 0000 0000 0015 can be written as 2001 0db8 1la2f 0000 0000 0015 2001 0db8 0000 0000 1la2f 0015 2001 db8 la2 0 0 15 Or 2001 db8 0 0 la2f 15 Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask Pv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address An I Pv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits start from the left in the address compose the network address The prefix length is written as x where x is a number For example 2001 db8 1a2b 15 1la2f 0 32
401. nnections The VBR RT real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth a PCR is specified but is only available when data is being sent An example of an VBR RT connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image s changing dynamics The VBR nRT non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation It is commonly used for bursty traffic typical on LANs PCR and MBS define the burst levels SCR defines the minimum level An example of an VBR nRT connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers However UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth An example application is background file transfer IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and default gateway P 2812HNU 51c
402. not an exact representation of your device P 2812HNU 51c Computer Notebook computer Firewall Telephone Switch Router 6 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information e Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports e Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling e Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device e Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if th
403. not configurable when you set 802 11 Mode to 802 11b Only Preamble Select a preamble type from the drop down list menu Choices are Long or Short The default setting is Long See the appendix for more information This field is not configurable and the P 2812HNU 51c uses Short when you set 802 11 Mode to 802 11g Only 802 11n Only or 802 11b g n Mixed Apply Click this to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Reset Click this to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 11 Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth For more information see the appendix P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 171 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 11 1 Wireless Network Overview The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 75 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B use the access point AP to interact with the other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your P 2812HNU 51c is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines e Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set Dentity e If two wireless networks overlap they should use a different channel Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel
404. nsparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols RIP I RIP II ICMP ATM QoS SNMP v1 and v2c with MIB II support RFC 1213 IP Multicasting IGMP v1 and v2 IGMP Proxy Management Embedded Web Configurator Remote Firmware Upgrade SNMP v1 amp v2c with MIB II Embedded FTP TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and configuration file backup and restore Syslog TR 069 TR 064 Supported Operating Systems e Windows 7 Vista XP 2000 e Mac OS 9 OS X P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 31 Product Specifications The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the P 2812HNU 51c Table 140 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator NAT RFC 1661 The Point to Point Protocol PPP RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2364 PPP over AAL5 PPP over ATM over ADSL RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet PPPoE RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 2766 Network Address Transl
405. nstitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto This License Agreement the rights granted hereunder the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties Note Some components of this product incorporate source code covered under the open source code licenses To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses please check ZyXEL Technical Support support zyxel com tw to get it P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements Open Source Packages for P 2812HNU 51c 3RD PARTY VERSION WEB ADDRESS OF THE SOFTWARE LICENSE SOFTWARE TERM MIPS Linux kernel 2 6 21 5 http www linux mips org Bridge Utils 1 2 http bridge sourceforge net bftpd 1 0 24 http www bftpd org busybox 1 0 0 http www busybox net Dhcpv6 http sourceforge net proj ects wide dhcpv6 Dnsmasq 2 48 http www thekelleys org uk dnsmasq Dproxy dproxy http dproxy sourceforge net nexgen ebtables 2 0 6 http ebtables sourceforge net iproute2 2 4
406. nternet but cannot make VolP calls 1 Make sure you have the VoIP gt SIP Account and SIP Service Provider screens properly configured 2 The PHONE light should come on Make sure that your telephone is connected to the PHONE port 3 You can also check the VoIP status in the Status screen 30 5 USB Device Connection The P 2812HNU 51c fails to detect my USB device 1 Disconnect the USB device 2 Reboot the P 2812HNU 51c 3 If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply make sure it is connected to an appropriate power source that is on 4 Re connect your USB device to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 30 6 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting cannot access the P 2812HNU 51c or ping any computer from the WLAN wireless AP or router 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the P 2812HNU 51c 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802 11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the P 2812HNU 51c 4 Make sure your computer with a wireless adapter installed is within the transmission range of the P 2812HNU 51c 5 Check that both the P 2812HNU 51c and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings 6 Check if MAC Filter is configured to deny wireless access to certain MAC addr
407. ntly on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer Flash 1 Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold Flash 2 1 Switch back and forth between two calls 2 Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call 3 Separate the current three way conference call into two individual calls one is on line the other is on hold Flash 3 Create three way conference connection Flash O8 Transfer the call to another phone European Call Hold Call hold allows you to put a call A on hold by pressing the flash key If you have another call press the flash key and then 2 to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold Press the flash key and then 0 to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line Press the flash key and then 1 to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold there will be a remind ring European Call Waiting This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone directory number If there is a second call to a telephone number you will hear a call waiting tone Take one of the following actions e Reject the second call Press the flash key and then press 0 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9
408. nts The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key The key itself is not sent over the network but is derived from the PSK and the SSID P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 479 Appendix E Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 230 WPA 2 PSK Authentication Security Parameters Summary 480 INTERNEJ Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 157 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD KEY ENCRYPTIO ENTER IEEE 802 1X MANAGEMENT N METHOD MANUAL KEY i PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP AES No Enab
409. number 1122334455 Vol P provider com for example SIP Service Domain The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP URI For example if the SIP address is 1122334455 Vol P provider com then Vol P provider com is the SIP service domain P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 217 Chapter 9 Voice SIP Registration Each P 2812HNU 51c is an individual SIP User Agent UA To provide voice service it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents as well as its current IP address for the routing of incoming SIP requests After successful registration the SIP server knows that the users identified by their dedicated SIP URIs are represented by the UA and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client UAC running in the VoIP gateway the P 2812HNU 51c The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER message as well as the relevant user and authorization data A SIP registration has a limited lifespan The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan If it does not do so the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar s database and the connection broken The P 2812HNU 51c attempt
410. o view the parameters for any given command enter help command ipconfig The ipconfig command line utility allows you to display current network TCP IP configuration settings and in some cases adjust them When you have network connectivity problems the first thing you should do is run this command to ensure that your device or computer does in fact have an IP address as well as display the source of that IP address such as a default gateway Syntax ipconfig Parameters ipconfig release renew There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now The following examples show the typical output of this command C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix example com TP AGAVSS Sst ol Mo te de eae BAe Ge CEOD DL 6B ed SUbNeE Maske r vt ae ee oe eo A AP EOD 255 25510 Default Gateway 1 1 1 4 CENS P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting Here you can see that the device has IP address of 1 1 1 1 and example com is its Domain Name Server DNS If the device is disconnected then you would see the following instead Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Media State Media disconnected If the device is connected but cannot get an IP address then you would see Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection s
411. odes local numbers long distance numbers or international call prefixes For example the dial plan 2 9 xxxxxx does not allow a local number which begins with 1 or 0 Without a dial plan users have to manually enter the whole callee s number and wait for the specified dialing interval to time out or press a terminator key usually the pound key on the phone keypad before the P 2812HNU 51c makes the call The P 2812HNU 51c initializes a call when the dialed number matches any one of the rules in the dial plan Dial plan rules follow these conventions The collection of rules is in parentheses e Rules are separated by the bar symbol x stands for a wildcard and can be any digit from 0 to 9 e A subset of keys is in a square bracket Ranges are allowed For example 359 means a number matching this rule can be 3 5 or 9 26 8 means a number matching this rule can be 2 6 7 8 or The dot appended to a digit allows the digit to be ignored or repeated multiple times Any digit 0 9 after the dot will be ignored For example 01 means a number matching this rule can be O 01 0111 01111 and so on P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice e lt dialed number translated number gt indicates the number after the colon replaces the number before the colon in an angle bracket lt gt For example lt 1212 gt xxxxxxx means the P 2812HNU 51c automatically prefixe
412. odulation Pulse Code Modulation PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits SIP Call Progression The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call A calls B Table 64 SIP Call Progression A B 1 INVITE gt lt ____ ____ 2 Ringing lt __ ______ 3 K 4 ACK r 5 Dialogue voice traffic 6 BYE EN 7 OK 1 A sends a SIP INVITE request to B This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call 2 B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing 3 B sends an OK response after the call is answered 4 Athen sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call 5 Now A and B exchange voice media talk 6 After talking A hangs up and sends a BYE request 7 B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers Usually the SIP UAC sets up a phone call by sending a request to the SIP proxy server Then the proxy server looks up the destination to which the call should be forwarded according to the URI requested by the SIP UAC The request may be forwarded to more than one proxy server before arriving at its destination P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 221 Chapter 9 Voice The response to the request goes to all the proxy ser
413. of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services DS field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for differen
414. of the layer 2 interface Qos This displays whether QoS Quality of Service is enabled on the P 2812HNU 51c Remove Click the Remove button to delete this interface from the P 2812HNU 51c A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the interface Note You cannot remove the layer 2 interface when a WAN service is associated with it Add Click this button to create a new layer 2 interface 5 4 1 Layer 2 Interface Configuration Click the Add button in the Layer 2 Interface screen to open the following screen Use this screen to create a new layer 2 interface At the time of writing you can configure only one PTM or Ethernet layer 2 interface on the P 2812HNU P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 51c You can have multiple ATM layer 2 interfaces using different VPI and or VCI values The screen varies depending on the interface type you select Figure 37 Layer 2 Interface Configuration DSL ATM DSL ATM Interface Configuration ATM P C Configuration This screen allows you to configure an ATM PYC identifier VPI and VCI select DSL latency select a service categoryS Otherwise choose an existing interface by selecting the checkbox to enable it vPI 0 255 o VCI 32 65535 35 Select DSL Link Type Eo4 is for PPPoE IPoE and Bridge Eoa O PPPoA O IPoA Encapsulation Mode C MUX v Service Category Non Realtime VBR v Peak Cell Rate
415. of this device and all persons Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS 210 of the Industry Canada Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device 512 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix Legal Information This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication IMPORTANT NOTE Device for the band 5150 5250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co channel mobile satellite systems users should also be cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users meaning they have priority of the bands 5250 5350 MHz and 5650 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and or damage to LE LAN devices IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance N
416. oftware Speech Startup Disk Universal Update Access 5 Select the Printing tab and click the icon to add a new printer Figure 124 Print amp Fax eoo Print amp Fax gt Show All Q rino Faxing Sharing In Menu Printer No printer is selected Selected Printer in Print Dialog Last Printer Used Default Paper Size in Page Setup A4 E g rf Click the lock to prevent further changes 6 Click the Advanced button on the Add Printer toolbar to set up your printer If the Advanced button doesn t appear Ctrl click the toolbar select Customize Toolbar and then drag the Advanced button onto the toolbar e Select Internet Printing Protocol HTTP from the Type drop down list e Select Another Device from the Device drop down list e In the URL field enter http 192 168 1 1 631 printers USB_ PRINTER as the URL to access the print server P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer Note If you change the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN IP address use the new IP address in the URL to access the print server e Enter a descriptive name for the printer and where it is located e Select your printer manufacturer from the Print Using drop down list and then select a printer model Click Add to save and close the Printer Browser configuration screen Figure 125 Add Printer ETTO Default Fax IP Windows Advanced Add Printer 0
417. ol Protocol lnternet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP 1Pv4 Properties window opens Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties E General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 5 Use the Following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically 5 Use the Following DNS server addresses Advanced ETE 8 Select Obtain an I P address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following I P Address and fill in the I P address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Setti
418. om the drop down list box Active This field is only available for WPA2 PSK Select this if you want the P Compatible 2812HNU 51c to support WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK simultaneously Encryption Select the encryption type TKIP AES or TKIP AES for data encryption Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES Select TKI P AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES Pre Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP sends a new Update Timer group key out to all clients 7 4 4 WPA 2 Authentication Use this screen to configure and enable WPA or WPA2 authentication click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the General screen Select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list Note WPA or WPA2 is not available if you enable WPS before you configure WPA or WPA2 in the Wireless LAN gt General screen P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Note If you select WPA or WPA2 in the Wireless LAN gt General screen the WDS and WPS features are not available on the P 2812HNU 51c Figu
419. omputers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 223 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example GaSe WAN hg g 192 168 1 88 QBSsesesaseeg sea se2q ee ee ee ee Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 224 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example SESS SSS ee ee e 8 r I 192 168 1 1 WAN I D i LAN a I pi 1 192 168 1 1 SS 7 i I 4 Se BE eee eee ee P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Wireless LANs Note Your specific P 2812HNU 51c may not support all of the wireless security types described in this appendix See the product specifications for more information about which wireless security types are supported Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each othe
420. on Router solicitation is a request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets Send Router Advertisement Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c send router advertisement messages to the LAN hosts Note The LAN hosts neither generate global IPv6 addresses nor communicate with other networks if you disable this feature DHCPv6 Setup Enable DHCPv6 Server Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c act as a DHCP server to assign and pass Pv6 network addresses prefixes and DNS server information to its DHCP clients MLD Setup Multicast Listener Discovery MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network Enable MLD Snooping Select this option to activate MLD snooping on the P 2812HNU 51c This allows the P 2812HNU 51c to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership It helps reduce multicast traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c 6 5 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the P 2812HNU 51c features described in this chapter P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup LANs WANs and the ZyXEL Device The actual physical connection determines whether the P 28
421. on like G 729 and G 726 can distort the tones SI PI nfo send the DTMF tones in SIP messages Transport Type Transport Type Select the transport layer protocol TCP UDP or TLS used for SIP AUTO is available when you select the Support Locating SI P Server option If you select AUTO here the P 2812HNU 51c sends a DNS Name Authority Pointer NAPTR query to locate the SIP server and get the supported transport layer protocol s FAX Option This field controls how the P 2812HNU 51c handles fax messages G 711 Fax Select this if the P 2812HNU 51c should use G 711 to send fax Passthrough messages The peer devices must also use G 711 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 207 Chapter 9 Voice Table 58 VoIP gt SIP gt SIP Service Provider continued LABEL DESCRIPTION T 38 Fax Relay Select this if the P 2812HNU 51c should send fax messages as UDP or TCP IP packets through IP networks This provides better quality but it may have inter operability problems The peer devices must also use T 38 QoS Tag SIP DSCP Mark Setting Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for SIP voice transmissions The P 2812HNU 51c creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with this number to voice traffic that it transmits RTP DSCP Mark Setting Enter the DSCP DiffServ Code Point number for RTP voice transmissions The P 2812HNU 51c creates Class of Service CoS priority tags with
422. on 514 PSK 477 PTM 99 Q QoS 225 307 325 marking 308 setup 307 tagging 308 versus CoS 308 Quality of Service see QoS Quick Start Guide 73 R RADIUS 473 message types 473 messages 473 shared secret key 474 Reach Extended ADSL 398 Real time Transport Protocol see RTP registration product 514 related documentation 3 remote management TR 069 331 Remote Procedure Calls see RPCs 331 resetting your device 29 restore 375 RFC 1058 See RIP RFC 1389 See RIP RFC 1483 126 398 RFC 1631 183 RFC 1889 220 RFC 2131 See DHCP RFC 2132 See DHCP RFC 2364 398 RFC 2516 397 398 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Index RFC 2684 398 RIP 138 305 Routing Information Protocol see RIP route 410 route status 91 router features 24 routing information 90 Routing Information Protocol See RIP RPPCs 331 RTP 220 RTS Request To Send 470 threshold 469 470 S safety warnings 7 seamless rate adaptation 398 secure gateway address 254 security associations see VPN Security Parameter Index 261 segment loopback test 383 service access control 336 Service Set 154 Services 193 Session Initiation Protocol see SIP sharing files 236 silence suppression 224 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP Single Rate Three Color Marker see srTCM SIP 217 account 217 call progression 221 client 218 identities 217 INVITE request 221 223 number 217 OK response 223 proxy server 219 redirec
423. on t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 20 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Dynamic DNS screen Section 20 3 on page 330 to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the P 2812HNU 51c 20 2 What You Need To Know DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 20 Dynamic DNS Setup 20 3 The Dynamic DNS Screen To change your P 2812HNU 51c s DDNS click Advanced gt Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown Figure 166 Advanced gt Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup Service Provider v Host Name Interface ipoe _0_0_1_1ptm01 Y User Name Password Email Key The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 111 Advanced gt Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Provider Host Name Type the domain
424. on the P 2812HNU 51c Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the P 2812HNU 51c s configuration You can put it back on the P 2812HNU 51c later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Use this feature to have the P 2812HNU 51c assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your Protocol network Your device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server DHCP Relay where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients Dynamic DNS With Dynamic DNS Domain Name System support you can use Support a fixed URL www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The P 2812HNU 51c supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups See RFC 2236 Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your P 2812HNU 51c You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Logs Use logs for troubleshooting You can s
425. ooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings W Use HTTP 1 1 CO Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections K Java da J Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 fr canoe equites esa Java 2 1 4 1_0 for J Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 fr canoe equites esa requires restart 5 Microso ae Java Saale enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing Mozilla Firefox ff Restore Defaults Mozilla Firefox 2 0 screens are used here Screens for other versions may vary You can enable Java Javascripts and pop ups in one screen Click Tools then click Options in the screen that appears Figure 217 Mozilla Firefox Tools gt Options Merc Help Web Search Ctrl kK Downloads Add ons Ctrl J Web Developer Error Console Adblock Plus Page Info Ctrl Shift 4 EireFTP Clear Private Data 3 Session Manager Ctrl Shift Del Tab Mix Plus Options P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix C Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Click Content to show the screen below Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen Figure 218 Mozilla Firefox Content Security Ga mw Privacy Security Advanced Block pop up windows Exceptions IV Load images automatical
426. op Tail DT kbps Apply Cancel P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 QoS Queue Setup Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Select to enable or disable this queue Name Enter the descriptive name of this queue Interface Select the interface to which this queue is applied Priority Select the priority level from 1 to 4 of this queue The smaller the number the higher the priority level Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested Weight Select the weight from 1 to 8 of this queue If two queues have the same priority level the P 2812HNU 51c divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Buffer This field displays Drop Tail DT Drop Tail DT is a simple queue Management management algorithm that allows the P 2812HNU 51c buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full Once the buffer is full new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again packets are transmitted out of it Rate Limit Specify the maximum transmission rate in kbps allowed for traffic on this queue 0 means no rate limit Back Click Back to return to the previous screen w
427. or confirmation Confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 26 3 The Time Setting Screen To change your P 2812HNU 51c s time and date click Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the P 2812HNU 51c s time based on your local time zone Figure 185 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting Time Setting Current Time Current Time 00 44 17 Current Date 01 Jan 2000 Time and Date Setup Manual New Time hh mm ss 0 0 oO New Date yyyy mm dd a 0 0 Get from Time Server First NTP time server Second NTP time server Third NTP time server Fourth NTP time server Fifth NTP time server Time zone offset P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 26 System Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 130 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time Current Time This field displays the time of your P 2812HNU 51c Each time you reload this page the P 2812HNU 51c synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your P 2812HNU 51c Each time you reload this page the P 2812HNU 51c synchronizes the date with the time server Time and Date Setup Manual Select this option to enter the time a
428. order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any
429. ore time for sending data All IEEE 802 11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it and to provide more efficient communications Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it otherwise the P 2812HNU 51c uses long preamble Note The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 119 Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11 is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 119 access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 471 Appendix E Wireless LANs several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 154 IEEE 802 119 MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 48 54 Wireless Security Overview Wirel
430. ork An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the P 2812HNU 51c An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 114 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object va
431. ort N AH Tunnel N ESP Transport N ESP Tunnel Y VPN NAT and NAT Traversal NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet both data payload and headers with a hash value appended to the packet but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or destination address As a result the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either but the P 2812HNU 51c s NAT Traversal feature provides a way to handle this NAT traversal allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers Figure 137 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 271 272 Chapter 12 IPSec VPN 12 5 7 Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged In Figure 137 on page 271 when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA For NAT traversal to work you must e
432. other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the autho
433. ou don t know the name or address of the printer you can search for a printer that meets your needs What printer do you want to connect to Find a printer in the directory Connect to this printer or to browse for a printer select this option and click Next Name Example server printer Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office network URL 32 168 1 1 631 printers USB_PRINTER Example http server printers myprinter printer 5 Select the make of the printer that you want to connect to the print server in the Manufacturer list of printers 6 Select the printer model from the list of Printers P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 243 Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 7 If your printer is not displayed in the list of Printers you can insert the printer driver installation CD disk or download the driver file to your computer click Have Disk and install the new printer driver Click Next to continue Figure 110 Add Printer Wizard Printer Model Add Printer Wizard pm Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturer A Printers Gestetner S HP DeskJet 1000C oei E HP DeskJet 1100C infotec E HP DeskJet 1120C Iwatsu AHP DeskJet 1125C Kodak E HP DeskJet 1200C Ey This driver is digitally signed
434. out Select on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Max I dle Timeout field Max Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the P 2812HNU 51c automatically disconnects from the ISP O means the Internet session will not timeout P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 30 3G Backup continued Automatically LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address Address Use the following static IP address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static I P address Obtain DNS info dynamically Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Use the following Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c use the DNS server addresses static DNS IP you configure manually address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP server Secondary Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 5 7 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the P 2812HNU 51c
435. pecific DNS Suffix IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway oo oo oo oo In some cases your computer may be properly connected to the network or the P 2812HNU 51c but it is not receiving an IP address for whatever reason Use the release parameter followed by renew C gt ipconfig release Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IP Address 00s 00 Subnet Mask 000 0 Default Gateway C gt ipconfig renew Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix zyxel com TP AOGGSS So ede an e m on us ae a a Se POD LO GaL 2 Subnet Mask ae s a ee ey Bint ae a ADs LODZ Default Gateway 2 2 2 4 GENS P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting ping The ping command line utility allows you to verify the connection and latency between your computer and either the P 2812HNU 51c or other devices on the network If you cannot reach a target using this command then it may indicate possible network trouble Syntax ping target The target can be an IP address or a host name Parameters ping w timeout target The timeout parameter allows you to input the number of seconds in milliseconds that your computer waits for a reply The following examples show the typical output of this command C gt ping www zyxel com Pinging a1524 g akamai
436. ped on this interface Refresh Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Interval P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 14 Status gt LAN Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics 4 3 3 Client List DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the P 2812HNU 51c as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the P 2812HNU 51c provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured Click Status gt Client List to open the following screen The read only DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of all network clients using the P 2812HNU 51c s DHCP server Figure 33 Status gt Client List Client List Hostname MAC Address IP Address twpc11 01 00 21 85 0c 44 4b 192 168 1 33 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Status gt Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name This indicates the computer host name MAC Address Every Ethernet device has a
437. pendix E Wireless LANs An ESSID ESS I Dentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate Figure 227 Infrastructure WLAN Ethernet 7 oo Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs 470 hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is cur
438. propriate IP address 4 If you group a LAN port which your PC is attached to please re attach to other ports belonging to the Default group and configure LAN information for a new group The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 124 Interface Grouping LABEL DESCRIPTION This shows the index number of the entry Group Name This shows the descriptive name of the group WAN Interface This shows the WAN interfaces in the group LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group Criteria This shows the filtering criteria for the goup P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 24 Interface Group Table 124 Interface Grouping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Remove Click the Remove icon to delete the group Add Click this button to create a new group 24 2 1 Interface Group Configuration Click the Add button in the Interface Group screen to open the following screen Use this screen to create a new interface group Note An interface can belong to a group only Figure 180 Interface Group Configuration General Group Name WAN Interface WAN Interfaces used in the grouping PTM type None Oipoe_0_0_1 100 ptmo 100 O ipoe_0_0_1 123 ptmo 123 ATM type None Oipoe_0_8_35 atm0 ETH type None ipoe_eth4 100 eth4 100 Only support 0 or 1 WAN interface on each WAN type LAN Interface Grouped LAN Interfaces Available LAN Interfaces
439. provisions All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation Restrictions You may not publish display disclose sell rent lease modify store loan distribute or create derivative works of the Software or any part thereof You may not assign sublicense convey or otherwise transfer pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software Certain components of the Software and third party open source programs included with the Software have been or may be made available by ZyXEL listed in the below Table collectively the Open Sourced Components You may modify or replace only these Open Sourced Components provided that you comply with the terms of this License and any applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open Sourced Components which have been provided on the License Notice as below for the Software ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance technical or other support for the resultant modified Software You may not copy reverse engineer decompile reverse compile translate adapt or disassemble the Software or any part thereof nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License by applicable licensing terms gover
440. ption Dibbler a portable DHCP v6 This is DHCP v6 client i version 0 7 2 Path to executable C Program Files DHCPv6Client_dibbler dibbler client exe service d C Pr Startup type Automatic x Service status Stopped You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Start parameters GD 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPV6 server Example Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports I Pv6 by default DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer To enable IPv6 in Windows 7 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 1 Select Control Panel gt Network and Sharing Center gt Local Area Connection 2 Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 TCP I Pv6 checkbox to enable it 3 Click OK to save the change Local Area Connection Properties Networking Connect using a Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items oM Client for Microsoft Networks aos Packet Scheduler File and Printer Sharing M M v for Microsoft Networks Install Uninstall Properties Description TCP IP version 6 The latest version of the intemet protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Goan 4 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen 5 Select Start gt All
441. puter 11 6 2 Mac OS 10 5 and 10 6 This example shows how to connect a printer behind the P 2812HNU 51c to your computer using Mac OS X v10 6 2 Some menu items may look different on your operating system P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 1 Click the Finder icon on the Dock or double click your Mac hard disk icon Mac OS X in this example on your desktop to open the Mac HD window Figure 120 Mac OS X HD Mac O5 X Open the Applications folder Macintosh HD Folder Figure 121 System j Developer A Applications User Guides And Information pec sy Movies 6 Music Ry Documents aa Pictures a Marble Blast Gold Nanosaur 2 QuickTime Player Safari a ystem Preferences TextEdit ZyXEL E USBWirelessUtility Utilities Ear 35 items 25 58 GB available P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 4 Click the Print amp Fax icon Figure 123 System Preferences ee0 System Preferences lt ShowAll Q Personal an A Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp Dock International Security Spotlight Expos Screen Saver Hardware fe C G e 08 4 Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fa Sound Saver Mouse Internet amp Network Q Mac Network QuickTime Sharing System e pa b y u o a Accounts Date amp Time S
442. r 0023f84171b4 C Enable DHCP Option 61 IAID i l DUID type DUID EN Identifier 0ad53c7f C Enable DHCP Option 125 Manufacturer OUI oo23f8 Product class P 2812HNU Sic Model name P 2812HNU 5ic Serial nmuber 0023f84171b4 Use the following Static IP address WAN IP Address WAN Subnet Mask WAN gateway IP Address m P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 5 Make sure Enable NAT is not selected and click Next Network Address Translation Settings Network Address Translation NAT allows you to share one Wide Area Network WAN IP address for multiple computers on your Local Area Network LAN C Enable NAT C Enable Firewall IGMP Multicast C Enable IGMP Multicast Proxy 6 Keep the WAN interface ptm0 300 in this example in the Available Routed WAN Interfaces list to not have the clients use this interface as the default gateway Click Next Routing Default Gateway Default gateway interface list can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system default gateways but only one will be used according to the priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest priority if the WAN interface is connected No Backup WAN fucntion support Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Selected Default Available Routed WAN Gateway Interfaces Interfaces ppp1 200 iptmo 300_ J atmu ptmo 100 e
443. r example com to have the P 2812HNU 51c forward DNS requests for the domain name mail example com through the WAN interface ppp1 123 to the DNS server 10 10 23 7 Figure 154 Example of DNS Routing Topology WAN ptm0 100 ppp1 123 DNS 10 10 23 7 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 17 DNS Route 17 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The DNS Route screens let you view and configure DNS routes on the P 2812HNU 51c Section 17 2 on page 302 17 2 The DNS Route Screen Click Advanced gt DNS Route to open the DNS Route screen Figure 155 Advanced gt DNS Route DNS Route DNS Route DNS Route Setting 4 maximum of 20 entries can be configured Subnet Mask ECE example com 255 255 255 255 ppp1 123 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Advanced gt DNS Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name This is the domain name to which the DNS route applies Subnet Mask This is the network subnet mask for the resolved IP address WAN Interface This is the WAN interface through which the matched DNS request is routed Remove Select the check box of the entry you want to delete and click the Remove button Add Click this button to create a new entry Remove Click this button to delete the selected entry ies P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 17 DNS Route 17 2 1 DNS Route Edit
444. r they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 225 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 467 Appendix E Wireless LANs Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 226 Basic Service Set D Yy ess wg 2 r Q U 1 D ESS An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood 468 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Ap
445. r Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 100 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP Unused 6 bit 2 bit The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 3 The P 2812HNU 51c does not support DiffServ at the time of writing P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 9 10 2 Phone Services Overview Supplementary services such as call hold call waiting and call transfer are generally available from your VoIP service provider The P 2812HNU 51c supports the following services Call Hold e Call Waiting e Making a Second Call Call Transfer Call Forwarding e Three Way Conference Internal Calls e Call Park and Pickup e Do not Disturb Note To take full advantage of the supplementary p
446. r Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 222 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example 4 i 4 iA i I 1 I I I y 1 192 168 1 33 I I I BE I 192 168 1 33 Qauannnannanmn ee Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix D IP Addresses and Subnetting following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN c
447. r to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUST
448. raffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires If an IPSec SA times out then the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic Negotiation Mode The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security Association SA will be established for each connection through IKE negotiations e Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication phase 1 It uses 6 messages in three round trips SA negotiation Diffie Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces a nonce is a random number This mode features identity protection your identity is not revealed in the negotiation Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication phase 1 However the trade off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder and both parties want to use pre shared key authentication IPSec and NAT Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the P 2812HNU 51c NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet both data payload and headers with a hash value appended to the packet When using
449. ranslation NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 NAT gt Port Triggering gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it This field is not editable if you are configuring a User Define rule Service Enter a name to identify this rule This field is read only if you click the Edit Name icon in the Trigger Port screen WAN Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules Interface Trigger The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the Start Port P 2812HNU 51c to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers Trigger End Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Port Trigger Select the transport layer protocol from TCP UDP or TCP UDP Protocol Open Start The open port is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses Port when it sends out a particular service The P 2812HNU 51c forwards the traffic with this port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers Open End Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Port Open Select the transport layer p
450. rce Port Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source Destination IP Address Destination Subnet Mask Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Enter the destination subnet mask Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall Table 85 Firewall gt Incoming Add continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface Select Select All to apply the rule to all interfaces on the P 2812HNU 51c or select the specific WAN interface s to which this rule applies Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 279 Chapter 13 Firewall P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Certificate 14 1 Overview The P 2812HNU 51c can use certificates also called digital IDs to authenticate users Certificates are based on public private key pairs A certificate contains the certificate owner s identity and public key Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication 14 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the P 2812HNU 51c s CA signed certificates Section 14 4 on page 289 e The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the P 2812HNU 51c Sectio
451. re 64 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2 Wireless Setup Active Wireless LAN Channel Selection Auto Current 11 Bandwidth 20MHz Control Sideband Common Setup Network Name SSID ZyXEL4171B4 C Hide Network Name SSID C Enable Wireless Multicast Forwarding WMF q Note Only IGMP v2 report message is supported for wireless multicast forwarding function BSSID 00 23 F8 41 71 B5 Security Mode WPA2 v Active Compatible WPA Compatible Encryption TKIP AES VW WPA2 Preauthentication Disabled Y Network Re auth Interval 36000 sec Group Key Update Timer 0 sec Authentication Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Port Number 1812 Shared Secret MAC Filter The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 38 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop down list box Active This field is only available for WPA2 Select this if you want the P Compatible 2812HNU 51c to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously Encryption Select the encryption type TKIP AES or TKIP AES for data encryption Select TKIP if your wireless clients can all use TKIP Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES Select TKI P AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 159 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 38 Wireless LAN gt General WPA 2
452. re AP More AP Setup EAr 1 al Guest1 No Security g 2 oO Guest2 No Security g 3 A Guest3 No Security g Apply J The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Network gt Wireless LAN gt More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This is the index number of each SSID profile Select the check box to activate an SSID profile SSID Security An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the P 2812HNU 51c s BSSs The SSID Service Set Dentifier identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 41 Network gt Wireless LAN gt More AP LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 5 1 More AP Edit Use this screen to edit an SSID profile Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen The following screen displays Figure 68 Network gt Wireless LAN gt More AP Edit Common Setup
453. re Network C Microsoft Terminal Services Remember my password amp Microsoft Windows Network E ly Zyxel gty Workgroup Y ZyXEL_Gateway 192 168 1 E Web Client Network E k2 firmware H twnas1 zyxel com tw firmware on twnasD1 zyxel com tw E ey ftp2 zyxel com tw Connect to 192 168 1 1 Connecting to 192 168 1 1 Sa 2 objects Note Once you log in to the file share via your P 2812HNU 51c you do not have to log in again unless you restart your computer P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 237 Chapter 10 File Sharing P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Sharing a USB Printer This chapter describes how you can share a USB printer via your P 2812HNU 51c 11 1 Overview The P 2812HNU 51c allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN You can do this by connecting a USB printer to one of the USB ports on the P 2812HNU 51c and then allowing the computers connected to your network to communicate with the print server P 2812HNU 51c using the Internet Printing Protocol Figure 104 Sharing a USB Printer 11 1 1 What You Can Do in this chapter e The Print Server screen lets you enable the print server on the P 2812HNU 51c and get the model name of the associated printer Section 11 4 on page 241 e This chapter also shows you examples of adding a new network printer using Windows Section 11 5 on page 242 and adding a new network printer using Macintosh OS X Section 11 6 on page 245
454. red bandwidth to 8 kbps P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 223 Chapter 9 Voice Voice Activity Detection Silence Suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD detects whether or not speech is present This lets the P 2812HNU 51c reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting silent packets when you are not speaking Comfort Noise Generation When using VAD the P 2812HNU 51c generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection Echo Cancellation G 168 is an ITU T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk MWI Message Waiting Indication Enable Message Waiting Indication MWI enables your phone to give you a message waiting beeping dial tone when you have a voice message s Your VoIP service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842 Custom Tones IVR IVR Interactive Voice Response is a feature that allows you to use your telephone to interact with the P 2812HNU 51c The P 2812HNU 51c allows you to record custom tones for the Early Media and Music On Hold functions The same recordings apply to both the caller ringing and on hold tones Table 66 Custom Tones Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Total Time for All Tones 90
455. register the SIP account when you Inactive The SIP account is not active You can activate it in Vol P gt This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for Waiting the SIP account Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 12 VolP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Last Incoming This field displays the last number that called the SIP account The field Number is blank if no number has ever dialed the SIP account Last Outgoing This field displays the last number the SIP account called The field is Number blank if the SIP account has never dialed a number Call Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the P 2812HNU 51c Duration This field displays how long the current call has lasted Status This field displays the current state of the phone call Idle There are no current VoIP calls incoming calls or outgoing calls being made Dial The callee s phone is ringing Ring The phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call Process There is a VoIP call in progress DISC The callee s line is busy the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook Codec This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone port Peer Number This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port Phone Mapping Status Phone This field displays each phone port in the P 2812HNU 51
456. remote P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses The P 2812HNU 51c can distinguish up to 48 incoming SAs because you can select between three encryption algorithms DES 3DES and AES two authentication algorithms MD5 and SHA1 and eight key groups when you configure a VPN rule see Section 12 3 on page 255 The ID type and content act as an extra level of identification for incoming SAs The type of ID can be a domain name an IP address or an e mail address The content is the IP address domain name or e mail address Table 79 Local ID Type and Content Fields eae CONTENT IP Type the IP address of your computer DNS Type a domain name up to 31 characters by which to identify this P 2812HNU 51c E mail Type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify this P 2812HNU 51c The domain name or e mail address that you use in the Local ID Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e mail address Table 80 Peer ID Type and Content Fields PEER ID TYPE CONTENT IP Type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection DNS Type a domain name up to 31 characters by which to identify the remote IPSec router E mail Type an e mail address up to 31 characters by which to identify the remote IPSec router
457. rently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other Figure 228 RTS CTS a CTS Range Wireless AP a am Station ae D l Stations cannot a ACK E a A ze hear each other B They can hear the AP When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of res
458. ress of each packet that comes from the LAN port See Chapter 16 on page 297 for more information 1 Click Advanced Setup gt Interface Group to open the following screen Click Add to create a new interface group GR1 Interface Group Interface Group WAN a ee ee LANL atmo ptmd 100 rane LAN3 eth4 100 LANA 1 Default si WL_ZyXELo10001 atm2 WL_Guest1 WL_Guest2 WL_Guest3 Qu Note 1 Interface Grouping supports multiple ports to WAN interfaces and bridging groups Each group will perform as an independent network 2 When creating a new group you can select a LAN port manually or use criteria to group a LAN port automatically 3 If a criterion is configured for a specific client device please renew or reboot the client device attached to the modem to allow it to obtain an appropriate IP address 4 If you group a LAN port which your PC is attached to please re attach to other ports belonging to the Default group and configure LAN information for a new group Add P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 Enter GR1 as the Group Name In this group we will associate ppp1 PVC 1 as the WAN interface with LAN1 as the LAN interface Select pppoe_O_O_33 ppp1 from the WAN Interface list Select LAN1 from the Available LAN Interfaces list and click lt to add it to the Grouped LAN Interfaces Click Apply to finish the settings and go back to the Interface Group screen General Group
459. ri sat sun start End Remove example x x 13 00 17 00 w 2 x means power off The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN Power Off Scheduling This field displays the index number of a rule Active Select the check box to enable a rule Otherwise clear the check box to disable a rule without deleting it Rule Name This field displays the descriptive name of a rule Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun This field displays whether wireless power off scheduling is active on the day s x means the P 2812HNU 51c turns off the wireless LAN in the specified time period of the day s Start This field displays the time of day when power off scheduling starts and the P 2812HNU 51c turns off the wireless LAN End This field displays the time of day when power off scheduling ends and the P 2812HNU 51c turns on the wireless LAN again Remove Click the icon to delete a rule Add Click Add to create a new scheduling rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 9 1 Adding a WLAN Power off Scheduling Rule Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned off To open this screen click the Add button in the Wireless LAN gt Scheduling screen
460. riables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 21 Remote Management Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt SNMP to open the following screen Use this screen to configure the P 2812HNU 51c SNMP settings Figure 169 SNMP SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP allows a management application to retrieve statistics and status from the SNMP Configuration SNMP agent in this device Select the desired values and click Apply to configure the SNMP options SNMP Agent Disable Enable Read Community public Set Community private System Name ZyXEL System Location unknown System Contact unknown Trap Manager IP 0 0 0 0 Save Apply The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 115 SNM P LABEL SNMP Agent DESCRIPTION Select Enable to allow a manager station to manage and monitor the P 2812HNU 51c through the network via SNMP Otherwise select Disable Read Community Enter the Read Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests Set Community System Name Enter the Set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests Enter the system name of the
461. rk connections CION SS Network and Internet p Network and Sharing Center v i File Edit View Tools Help Tasks A Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices Connect to a network n Set up a connertinn nr network D Manage network connections TWPC99111 Internet Diagnose ana repair This computer a Not connected 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties LAN or High Sesed Internet T I x Loca Collapse group Left Arrow W toned x 2n Kta Expand all groups y nte Collapse all groups Disable Status Diagnose Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Note During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Networking Connect using aP Intel R PRO 1000 MT Desktop Connection This connection uses the following items M o Client for Microsoft Networks J Network Monitor3 Driver MI 5 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Inter anabasa 6 TCP P v6 EH hter et Protocol Version 4 TEP IP ya p Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder oa tig Uninstall Properties 2 Description Transmission Contr
462. rnet Printing Protocol using HTTP from the Device drop down list e Enter a descriptive name for the printer in the Device Name field e In the Device URL field enter http 192 168 1 1 631 printers USB_PRINTER as the URL to access the print server P 2812HNU 51c Note If you change the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN IP address use the new IP address in the URL to access the print server P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 247 Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer e Select your printer manufacturer from the Printer Model drop down list and then select a printer model Click Add to save and close the Printer Browser configuration screen Figure 118 Printer Browser aaa 7 O88 Printer Browser Advanced E Di Device internet Printing Protocol using HTTP B Device Name 192 168 1 1 Device URI http 192 168 1 1 631 printers USB_PRINTER Printer Model HP FH HP Laserjet 1300 Series HP Laserjet 1320 series 0 HP LaserJet 2100 Series a HP LaserJet 2200 v More Printers Add 17 The new network printer displays in the Printer List The default printer Name displays in bold type Figure 119 Printer List Printer List X 0 t ColorSync Show Info eee SO Add Delete Make Default http 192 168 1 1 HP Laserjet 1200 18 Your print server driver setup is complete You can now use the P 2812HNU 51c s print server to print from a Mac com
463. rogram means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the
464. rotocol from TCP UDP or TCP UDP Protocol Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT 8 5 The DMZ Host Screen In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen Figure 86 NAT gt DMZ Host DMZ Host Default Server q Note Enter IP address and click Apply to activate the DMZ host Clear the IP address field and click Apply to deactivate the DMZ host 192 168 1 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 54 NAT gt DMZ Host LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Note If you do not assign a Default Server the P 2812HNU 51c discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c 8 6 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway ALG A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses
465. route lookup to fail Gateway The route uses a gateway to forward traffic Host The target of the route is a host Reinstate The route is reinstated for dynamic routing Dynamic redirect The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect Modified redirect The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost The smaller the number the lower the cost Service This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route Interface This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded e br indicates the LAN interface e ptm indicates the VDSL WAN interface using PoE or in bridge mode e atmx where x starts from 0 and is the index number of ATM layer 2 interfaces using different VPI and or VCI values indicates the ADSL WAN interface using PoE PPPoA or in bridge mode pppoax indicates the ADSL WAN interface using PPPoA e jipoa0 indicates the ADSL WAN interface using IPoA e pppx where x starts from 1 and is the index number of PPP connection indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE e eth4 indicates the Ethernet WAN interface using PoE e 3G indicates the 3G WAN interface P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 3 VoIP Status Click Status gt VoIP Status to acce
466. rtificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed
467. rvice is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports Note Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP To access this screen click Network gt NAT The following screen appears Figure 81 NAT Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Service Name WAN Interface Server IP Address External port Internal port Protocol v ipoe_0_0_1 123 ptm0 123 192 168 1 Start 80 End 80 Start 80 End 80 TCP v Wy No Active ome arn Ee are te ree NOT Au AS Ort Ore Ort DEOL 25 1 69 69 odify TFTP eth4_1 192 168 1 99 amp P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 NAT Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name Select a pre defined service from the drop down list box The pre defined service port number s and protocol will display in the External port Internal port and Protocol fields
468. s 4 ms 4 ms he cl2r2 router tw 220 128 7 86 7 10 ms 7 ms 10 ms tp s2 c12r12 router tw 220 128 2 90 8 9 ms 7 ms 8 ms pr03 s2 tp tw 220 128 4 181 9 6 ms 6 ms 9 ms 220 128 3 249 NET IP tw 220 128 3 249 10 138 ms 137 ms 138 ms r1l pa NET IP net 211 72 108 129 11 138 ms 138 ms 138 ms po4 0 core01 sjc04 atlas com 154 54 11 129 12 128 ms 139 ms 140 ms te9 2 mpd01 sjc04 atlas com 154 54 0 173 13 140 ms 139 ms 136 ms 61 58 33 173 14 154 ms 153 ms 137 ms xe 0 0 0 r20 gin ntt net 129 250 16 161 15 154 ms 154 ms 137 ms as 2 r21 tokyjp01 jp ntt net 129 250 4 81 16 562 ms 553 ms 553 ms 38 106 6 34 17 554 ms 554 ms 553 ms po 2 r00 lsancal9 us ntt net 129 250 6 42 18 254 ms 254 ms 248 ms 204 1 254 150 19 154 ms 253 ms 154 ms 192 0 32 10 Trace complete C gt Here the tracert to www example com took 18 hops to reach its destination Looking at the latency data you ll see the first slow down happens at hop 10 The extremely low latency on the first few hops indicates a network local to the computer where the tracert command originated such as a home or office LAN The packets then move onto the local WAN such as your Internet Service Provider s network Because of the close proximity of those servers to your computer the latency remains low Once the data packets move out of the regional network to the first international server at hop 10 in this example the latency increases This is because of the distance
469. s a preceding Next Header value of 58 which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for Pv4 ICMPv6 is an integral part of I Pv6 IPv6 nodes use CMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions such as ping Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery MLD protocol defined in RFC 2710 is derived from Pv4 s Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 IGMPv2 MLD uses ICMPv6 message types rather than IGMP message types MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to GMPv3 MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4 MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group it sends an MLD Report message for that address An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group it can send a Done message to the router or switch The router or switch then sends a group specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to
470. s according to the default routing table If traffic of this class comes from a WAN interface and is in a queue that forwards traffic through the LAN WLAN interface the P 2812HNU 51c ignores the setting here DSCP Mark This field is available only when you select the Ether Type check box If you select Mark enter a DSCP value with which the P 2812HNU 51c replaces the DSCP field in the packets If you select Auto Mapping and there is a VLAN tag carried in the matched packets the P 2812HNU 51c will replace the IP ToS field with the 802 1p priority field If you select Unchange the P 2812HNU 51c keep the DSCP field in the packets 802 1p Mark Select a priority level with which the P 2812HNU 51c replaces the IEEE 802 1p priority field in the packets If you select Unchange the P 2812HNU 51c keep the 802 1p priority field in the packets VLAN ID Tag If you select Remark enter a VLAN ID number between 1 and 4095 with which the P 2812HNU 51c replaces the VLAN ID of the frames If you select Remove the P 2812HNU 51c deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out If you select Add the P 2812HNU 51c treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID If you select Unchange the P 2812HNU 51c keep the VLAN ID in the packets To Queue Select a queue that applies to this class You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already Criteria Configuration
471. s chapter 12 5 1 IPSec Architecture The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows Figure 134 IPSec Architecture IPSec Algorithms ESP Protocol RFC 2406 Encryption Algorithm AH Protocol RFC 2402 Authentication RFC 2403 i HMAC SHA 1 Algorithm eine P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 267 Chapter 12 IPSec VPN 12 5 2 IPSec Algorithms The ESP Encapsulating Security Payload Protocol RFC 2406 and AH Authentication Header protocol RFC 2402 describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure including implementation algorithms The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES Data Encryption Standard and Triple DES algorithms The Authentication Algorithms HMAC MD5 RFC 2403 and HMAC SHA 1 RFC 2404 provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols Key Management Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE ISAKMP or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN Encapsulation The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode At the time of writing the P 2812HNU 51c supports Tunnel mode only Figure 135 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation Original IP TCP Data IP Packet Header Header Transport Mode IPSec IP TCP Data Protected Packet Header Header Header Tunnel Mode IP IPSec IP TCP ite Protected Packet Head
472. s damaged or not inserted If a link displays in this field click the link to view more status information or enter the correct PIN or PUK Personal Unblocking Key code Type the user name of up to 70 ASCII printable characters given to you by your service provider Password Type the password of up to 70 ASCII printable characters associated with the user name above PIN A PIN Personal Identification Number code is a key to a 3G card Without the PIN code you cannot use the 3G card If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication enter the 4 digit PIN code 0000 for example provided by your ISP If you enter the PIN code incorrectly the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication leave this field blank Dial string Enter the phone number dial string used to dial up a connection to your service provider s base station Your ISP should provide the phone number For example 99 is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan APN Enter the APN Access Point Name provided by your service provider Connections with different APNs may provide different services such as Internet access or MMS Multi Media Messaging Service and charge method You can enter up to 31 ASCII printable characters Spaces are allowed Connection Select Nailed Up if you do not want the connection to time
473. s not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLO STATUS DESCRIPTION WLAN Green On The wireless network is activated and is operating in EEE WPS 802 11b g mode Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is communicating with other wireless clients Orange Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is setting up a WPS connection Off The wireless network is not activated DSL Green On The ADSL line is up Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is initializing the ADSL line Orange On The VDSL line is up Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is initializing the VDSL line Off The DSL line is down INTERNET Green On The P 2812HNU 51c has an IP connection but no traffic Your device has a WAN IP address either static or assigned by a DHCP server PPP negotiation was successfully completed if used and the DSL connection is up Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is sending or receiving IP traffic Red On The P 2812HNU 51c attempted to make an IP connection but failed Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server no PPPoE response PPPoE authentication failed Off The P 2812HNU 51c does not have an IP connection Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Tutorials 2 1 Overview This chapter describes e How
474. s not often sent directly from point A to point B rather it moves through a series of intermediate servers passed along until eventually the server closest to point B hands it off directly This command can be useful for helping determine whether your connection issues are happening locally somewhere in transit or at the destination end e Each step in the chain of connections is called a hop e The time it takes for a server at any given hop to pass the data packet is called latency and is measured in milliseconds When a tracert command is run it sends out a burst of three data packets per hop The results table therefore always displays three values for latency in addition to the IP address and domain name where available of the server on that leg of the journey Syntax tracert target The target can be an IP address or a host name Parameters tracert d h maximumhops target There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 407 Appendix A Network Troubleshooting 408 The following examples show the typical output of this command C gt tracert www example com Tracing route to www example com 192 0 32 10 over a maximum of 30 hops 1 lt 1 ms lt 1 ms lt 1 ms 172 23 x x 2 5 ms 4 ms 5 ms 172 23 x x 3 4 ms 4 ms 4ms 172 23 x x 4 5 ms 4 ms 6 ms 219 87 158 97 static tfn tw 219 87 158 97 5 6 ms 5 ms 4 ms 10 42 232 150 6 5 m
475. s ship with TCP IP already installed and enabled See your Windows documentation for details on installing or configuring TCP IP The Command Line Interface To open the Windows command line interface 1 Click Start gt Run 2 Inthe Run dialog box enter cmd then click OK Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you cmd 3 The Command Prompt window opens cx Command Prompt icrosoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2666 lt C Copyright 1985 2061 Microsoft Corp gt v0l Volume in drive C is ZyXEL Volume Serial Number is 7 CA 53F1 gt vol Command Syntax and Parameters Command descriptions always indicate the default syntax you must use when entering them on the command line Some commands require additional parameters in order to execute properly Some may have optional parameters Parameters are displayed as follows command parameter P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix A Network Troubleshooting For example the date command has the optional t and date parameters If you do not use either of them and enter just date by itself then the system shows you the date it is currently using and then prompts you to change it C gt date The current date is 2009 10 21 Enter the new date mm dd yy However if you use the t parameter it just displays the date and nothing more C gt date t 2009 10 21 CES T
476. s the translated number 1212 to the number you dialed before making the call This can be used for local calls in the US lt 9 gt XXX XXXXXXX means the P 2812HNU 51c automatically removes the specified prefix 9 from the number you dialed before making the call This is always used for making outside calls from an office xx lt 123 456 gt xxxx means the P 2812HNU 51c automatically translates 123 to 456 in the number you dialed before making the call e Calls with a number followed by the exclamation mark will be dropped e Calls with a number followed by the termination character will be made immediately Any digit 0 9 after the character will be ignored In this example dial plan 0 49 11 1 2 9 xx xxxxxxx 1 947 xxxxxxx you can dial 0 to call the local operator call 411 or 911 or make a long distance call with an area code starting from 2 to 9 in the US The calls with the area code 947 will be dropped 9 5 The Phone Region Screen Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the P 2812HNU 51c is in To access this screen click VoIP gt Phone gt Region Figure 91 VolP gt Phone gt Region Region Settings Region Settings USA NORTHAMERICA Call Service Mode Europs Type CAUTION When Region Settings is changed you need to reboot device to take settings effect Cancel P 2812HNU 51c User
477. s three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the P 2812HNU 51c itself as the gateway for each LAN network When you use IP alias you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN s logical networks subnets Note Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A and B Figure 59 Physical Network amp Partitioned Logical Networks A 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 Ethernet Interface B 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 24 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 147 Chapter 6 LAN Setup P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Wireless LAN 7 1 Overview This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing your wireless network including the following e Turning the wireless connection on or off e Configuring a name wireless channel and security for the network e Using WiFi Protected Setup WPS to configure your wireless network e Using a MAC Media Access Control address filter to restrict access to the wireless network See Chapter 2 on page 33 for a tutorial showing how to set up your wireless connection in an example scenario See Section 7 11 on page 171 for advanced technical information on wireless networks 7 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter This chapter describes the P 2812HNU 51c s Networ
478. s to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled the P 2812HNU 51c attempts to register the port immediately Authorization Requirements SIP registrations and subsequent SIP requests require a username and password for authorization These credentials are validated via a challenge response system using the HTTP digest mechanism as detailed in RFC3261 SIP Session Initiation Protocol SIP Servers SIP is a client server protocol A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests A SIP server responds to the SIP requests When you use SIP to make a VoIP call it originates at a client and terminates at a server A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server SIP User Agent A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls This means that SIP can be used for peer to peer communications even though it is a client server P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice protocol In the following figure either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call A and B can also both act as a SIP user agent to receive the call Figure 96 SIP User Agent SIP Proxy Server A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server In the following example you want to use client device A to call someone who is
479. se a service to manage the P 2812HNU 51c Section 21 6 on page 337 21 2 The TR 069 Screen TR 069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment CPE for example your P 2812HNU 51c can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server ACS TR 069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls RPCs between an ACS and a client device RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language XML format over HTTP or HTTPS An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the P 2812HNU 51c modify settings perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the P 2812HNU 51c You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 31 Chapter 21 Remote Management Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT to open the following screen Use this screen to configure your P 2812HNU 51c to be managed by an ACS Figure 167 TR 069 TRO69 TRO69 Inform Disable Enable Inform Interval 300 sec Min 30 sec 4cs URL ACS User Name admin 4CS Password console WAN Interface used by TR 069 client any_w4n O multi_Wan atmo Display SOAP messages on serial ptm0 100 eth4 100 Disable Enable Connection Request Authentication ConnectionRequest User Name admin ConnectionRequest Password Connection Request URL Apply Save The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 112
480. se the DNS server addresses Static DNS IP you configure manually address Primary DNS Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP server Secondary Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server The following fields are available only when you configure a WAN service with Pv6 enabled You can only enable IPv6 for a WAN service that uses the PPPoE or PoE encapsulation method over the ATM or PTM interface Obtain IPv6 DNS info from a WAN interface WAN Interface selected Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically Select a WAN interface through which you want to obtain the Pv6 DNS related information Use the following Static IPv6 DNS address Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure manually Primary IPv6 Enter the first Pv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP DNS server Secondary Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP IPv6 DNS server Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Next Click this button to continue P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 5 1 7 Configuration Summary This read only screen shows the current WAN connection settings Figure 49 WAN Configuration Configuration Summary WAN Setup Summary Make sure that the settings below match the settings provide
481. sed 126 multiprotocol encapsulation 126 N NAT 145 183 463 default server 192 DMZ host 192 external port 185 internal port 185 IPSec 270 port forwarding 184 port number 184 193 services 193 Symmetric 131 traversal 271 NAT example 194 NAT Types 129 negotiation mode 270 netstat 413 Network Address Translation see NAT network troubleshooting 401 arp 409 ipconfig 403 netstat 413 ping 405 route 410 tracert 407 NNTP 193 non proxy calls 212 good habits 24 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Index O OAM 383 398 OAM ping test 383 OK response 221 223 operation humidity 395 operation temperature 395 Operation Administration and Maintenance see OAM outside header 269 P Packet Transfer Mode 99 Pairwise Master Key PMK 477 479 Peak Cell Rate PCR 105 127 peer to peer calls 212 Per Hop Behavior see PHB 325 PHB 226 325 phone book speed dial 212 phone functions 231 ping 405 timeout 406 Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 126 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 194 POP3 193 275 276 ports 31 power adaptor 399 power specifications 395 PPP Point to Point Protocol Link Layer Protocol 398 PPP over ATM AAL5 398 PPP over Ethernet 398 PPPoE 126 Benefits 126 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 397 PPTP 194 preamble mode 471 pre shared key 274 print server 27 printer sharing 239 and LAN 240 requirements 240 product registrati
482. ses 4 In IPv6 all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses 486 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix F IPv6 Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information The IA type is the type of address in the IA Each IA holds one type of address IA_NA means an identity association for non temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields but an IA_TA option does not The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire After T1 the client sends the server S1 from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained a Renew message If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond the client sends a Rebind message to any available server S2 For an IA_TA the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client s discretion T2 l T1 oo I I I R I eee tO Se ie i toSt toS toS DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients When a client cannot use its link local address and a well known multicast addre
483. ss this screen Figure 30 VoIP Status SIP Status e Message i n Registration Registration Time Waiting Last Incoming Number Last Outgoing Number SIP1 Not Registered 123456 sipserver net No SIP2 Inactive changeme sipserver net No Call Status Account Peer Number 123456 changeme Phone Mapping Status Phone Outgoing Number Incomming Number Phone1 SIP1 123456 SIP1 123456 Phone2 SIP2 changeme SIP2 changeme Poll Interval s FMEBsec Each field is described in the following table Table 12 VolP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Status Account This column displays each SIP account in the P 2812HNU 51c Registration can change this in the Status screen Registered The SIP account is registered with a SIP server the SIP account with the SIP server the attempt failed The P turn on the P 2812HNU 51c or when you activate it SIP gt SIP Account Last This field displays the last time you successfully registered the SIP Registration account The field is blank if you never successfully registered this account URI This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account You can change these in the VoIP gt SIP screens Message P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account You Not Registered The last time the P 2812HNU 51c tried to register 2812HNU 51c automatically tries to
484. ss to locate a DHCP server on its network it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification remote ID option and the interface D option to the Relay Forward DHCPv6 messages The remote ID option carries a user defined string such as the system name The interface ID option provides slot number port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server The remote ID option if any is stripped from the Relay Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients The DHCP server copies the interface D option from the Relay Forward message into the Relay Reply message and sends it to the relay agent The interface D should not change even after the relay agent restarts Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix network address received from the ISP or a connected uplink router for its LAN The P 2812HNU 51c uses the received I Pv6 prefix for example 2001 db2 48 to generate its LAN IP address Through sending Router Advertisements RAs regularly by P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 487 Appendix F IPv6 multicast the P 2812HNU 51c passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for Pv6 ICMPv6 or ICMP for Pv6 is defined in RFC 4443 ICMPv6 ha
485. ssword This field displays the password of the sender s mail account Email Address This field displays the e mail address that you want to be in the from sender line of the e mail that the P 2812HNU 51c sends Requires TLS This field displays whether SSL TLS authentication is required for the mail server Remove Select the check box of the entry you want to delete and click the Remove button Add Click this button to create a new entry This button is not available if you have configured two entries Remove Click this button to delete the selected entry ies Email Notification Edit Click the Add button in the Email Notification screen Use this screen to configure the required information for sending e mail via a mail server Figure 183 Email Notification gt Add Email Notification Email Notification Email Notification Configuration Cl Requires TLS Mail Server Address Mail Server Port 25 Authentication Username Authentication Password Account Email Address P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 25 E mail Notification The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 128 Email Notification gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Requires TLS Select this option to enable SSL TLS authentication If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled you will not receive e mail Secure Socket Layer SSL and Transport Layer Security T
486. stall a printer or make printer connections 1 If you have a Plug and Play printer that connects through a USB port for any other hot pluggable port such as IEEE 1394 infrared and so on you do not need to use this wizard Click Cancel to close the wizard and then plug the printer s cable into your computer or point the printer toward your computer s infrared port and turn the printer on Windows will automatically install the printer for you To continue click Next Cancel P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 11 Sharing a USB Printer 3 Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer and click Next Figure 108 Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer The wizard needs to know which type of printer to set up Select the option that describes the printer you want to use O Local printer attached to this computer i To set up a network printer that is not attached to a print server LD use the Local printer option 4 Select Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office network and enter http 192 168 1 1 631 printers USB_ PRINTER as the URL to access the print server P 2812HNU 51c Click Next Note If you change the P 2812HNU 51c s LAN IP address use the new IP address in the URL to access the print server Figure 109 Add Printer Wizard Specify a Printer Add Printer Wizard Specify a Printer If y
487. stic gt 802 1ag continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance Association MA Name Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this MA The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or equal to 44bytes Maintenance Association MA Format Select the format which the P 2812HNU 51c uses to send this MA information in the domain MD Options are VID String and Integer If you select VID or Integer the P 2812HNU 51c adds the VLAN ID you specified for an MA in the CCM If you select String the P 2812HNU 51c adds the MA name you specified above in the CCM Note The MEPs in the same MA shoule use the same MA format Destination MAC Address Enter the target device s MAC address to which the P 2812HNU 51c performs a CFM loopback test Count Set how many times the P 2812HNU 51c send loopback messages LBMs 802 1Q VLAN ID Type a VLAN ID 0 4095 for this MA Maintenance End Point ID Enter an ID number 1 8191 for this MEP port Each MEP port needs a unique ID number within an MD The MEP ID is to identify an MEP port used when you perform a CFM action Status Continuity Check Message CCM This shows how many Connectivity Check Messages CCMs are sent and if there is any invalid CCM or cross connect CCM Loopback Message LBM This shows how many Loop Back Messages LBMs are sent and if there is any inorder or outorder Loop
488. sues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 474 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix E Wireless LANs authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital ce
489. system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service See Chapter 31 on page 395 for a full list of features P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c 1 2 Ways to Manage the P 2812HNU 51c Use any of the following methods to manage the P 2812HNU 51c e Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the P 2812HNU 51c using a Supported web browser e SNMP The device can be monitored by an SNMP manager See the SNMP chapter in this User s Guide e TR 069 This is an auto configuration server used to remotely configure your device 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the P 2812HNU 51c Do the following things regularly to make the P 2812HNU 51c more secure and to manage the P 2812HNU 51c more effectively e Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters e Write down the password and put it in a safe place e Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the P 2812HNU 51c to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the P 2812HNU 51c You could simply restore your last configuration 1 4 Applications for the P 2812HNU 51c Here are
490. t DSL Link Type field e LLC SNAP ROUTING In LCC encapsulation an IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE 802 1a SubNetwork Attachment Point SNAP header This is he ie only when you select IPoA in the Select DSL Link Type ield e LLC SNAP BRIDGING In LCC encapsulation bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header This is available only when you select EoA in the Select DSL Link Type field Service Category Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select Realtime VBR real time Variable Bit Rate for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation Select Non Realtime VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 19 Layer 2 Interface Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here This field is not available when you select UBR
491. t as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court
492. t includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson t h cryptsoft com P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The follo
493. t kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802 1p prioritization at layer 2 you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer 3 network IP precedence uses three bits of the eight bit ToS Type of Service field in the IP header There are eight classes of services ranging from zero to seven in IP precedence Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 325 Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the P 2812HNU 51c the P 2812HNU 51c can automatically base on the IEEE 802 1p priority level IP precedence and or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class The following table shows you the internal layer 2 and layer 3 QoS mapping on the P 2812HNU 51c On the P 2812HNU 51c traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Table 110 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping LAYER 2 LAYER 3 PRIORITY IEEE 802 1P QUEUE USER PRIORITY TOS IP DSCP IP PACKET ETHERNET PRECEDENCE LENGTH BYTE PRIORITY 0 1 0 000000 1 2 2 0 0 000000 gt 1100 3 3 1 001110 250 1100 001100 001010 001000 4 4 2 010110 010100 010010 010000 5 5 3 011110 lt 250 011100 011010 011000 6 6 4 1
494. t on a network RADIUS server e Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks e Authentication Determines the identity of the users Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network e Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access e Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access e Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 473 Appendix E Wireless LANs The following types of R
495. t server 219 register server 220 servers 218 service domain 217 URI 217 user agent 218 SIP ALG 192 SIP Application Layer Gateway 192 SMTP 193 SNMP 193 334 398 agent 334 and MIB 334 manager 334 network components 334 object variables 334 protocol operations 334 SNMP trap 194 speed dial 212 SPI 261 SRA 398 srTCM 327 static route 293 297 301 305 359 static VLAN status indicators 31 storage humidity 395 storage temperature 395 subnet 455 subnet mask 144 456 subnetting 458 supplementary services 227 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 105 Sustained Cell Rate SCR 127 Symmetric NAT 131 Symmetric NAT Outgoing 132 syntax conventions 5 system name 83 T Tag Control Information See TCI Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID TCI TCP IP 275 temperature 395 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP 476 three way conference 229 230 ToS 226 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Index TPID 132 TR 064 333 TR 069 331 ACS setup 331 authentication 332 tracert 407 trademarks 511 traffic shaping 127 transparent bridging 398 transport mode 268 trTCM 328 tunnel mode 269 Two Rate Three Color Marker see trTCM Type of Service see ToS U unicast 133 Uniform Resource Identifier 217 Universal Plug and Play 339 application 340 UPnP 339 cautions 340 forum 340 NAT traversal 339 security issues 340 USA type call service mode 229 USB printer sharing 239 USB features 27 USB printer 27 V VAD 22
496. tched Telecommunications System a Optimized originally 1x Evolution third generation 3G wireless Data Only also referred to as EV standard defined in 1TU DO EVDO or just EV is an specification is sometimes evolution of CDMA2000 1xRTT and marketed as 3GSM The UMTS enables high speed wireless uses GSM infrastructures and W connectivity It is also denoted as CDMA Wideband Code Division 1S 856 or High Data Rate HDR Multiple Access as the air interface 3 5G Packet HSDPA High Speed Downlink switched Packet Access is a mobile telephony protocol used for UMTS based 3G networks and allows for higher data transfer speeds y Fast A The International Telecommunication Union ITU is an international organization within which governments and the private sector coordinate global telecom networks and services P 2812HNU 51c Users Guide 135 Chapter 5 WAN Setup P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide LAN Setup 6 1 Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses e See Section 6 5 on page 143 for more information on LANs e See Appendix E on page 467 for more information on IP addresses and subnetting 6 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter e The IP screen le
497. ted For the WLAN interface it displays Up when WLAN is enabled or Disabled when WLAN is not active For the 3G WAN interface it displays e NoDevice when no 3G card is inserted e Disabled when the 3G WAN is not activated e Up when the 3G WAN connection is up e Down when the 3G connection is down e NoResponse when there is no response from the inserted 3G card e NeedPIN if the PIN code you entered in the WAN gt 3G Backup screen is not the right one for the 3G card you inserted e NeedPUK if you enter the PIN Personal Identification Number code incorrectly for three times and the SIM card is blocked by your ISP e or DamagedSIM when the SIM card is damaged or not inserted If a link displays in this field click the link to view more status information or enter the correct PIN or PUK Personal Unblocking Key code Rate For the DSL interface it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate For the LAN or Ethernet WAN interface this displays the port speed and duplex setting For the WLAN interface it displays the maximum transmission rate For the 3G WAN interface it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate More Status WAN Service Click this link to view packet specific statistics of the WAN Statistics connection s See Section 4 2 3 on page 89 Route Info Click this link to view the internal routing table on the P 2812HNU 51c See Section 4 2 4 on page 90
498. tem resources and interfaces LAN WAN and WLAN The Status screen also provides detailed information from DHCP and statistics from traffic P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Click Status to open this screen 4 2 Status Screen Figure 25 Status Screen Device Information User Name ning Model Number DSL Firmware Version IP Address Mode MAC Address Firmware Version WAN 0 Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask WAN 1 Information Mode IP Subnet Mask WAN 2 Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask IPv6 Address Mask IP 6 Scope WAN 1 Information Mode IP Address IP Subnet Mask LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask IPv6 Address Mask IPv6 Scope DHCP WLAN Information Channel WPS Status WDS Status AP 1 Information ESSID Status Security Registration Status Account Service Provider SIP Account b ServiceProvider 1 changeme min P 2812HNU Sic 02 10 18 01 00 01 1 02 BLL O b2 A2Zpv6C030c d22i ATM IPOE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PTM IPOE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PTM IPOE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 fe80 10 18ff fe01 9 64 Link Local ETH IPoW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 92 168 1 255 255 255 0 System Status System Uptime Current Date Time System Mode CPU Usage Memory Usage More Status Route Info VoIP Status Sia 1 db8 1a2b 15 10 18ff fe01 1 64 Global Server
499. terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix H Open Software Announcements c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But
500. ternal End Enter the last port of the original destination port range Port To forward only one port enter the port number in the External Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above Internal Start Enter the port number here to which you want the P 2812HNU 51c to Port translate the incoming port For a range of ports enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated Internal End Enter the last port of the translated port range Port Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here Address Protocol Select the transport layer protocol supported by this virtual server Choices are TCP UDP or TCP UDP Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 The Trigger Port Screen Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service coming in from the server on the WAN to the IP address of a computer on the client side LAN The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address In order to
501. th you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the P 2812HNU 51c rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the P 2812HNU 51c does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The P 2812HNU 51c encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM digital access multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC based multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP VC based Multiplexing In this case by prior m
502. th4 100 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 67 Chapter 2 Tutorials 7 Select the first option Keep the WAN interface ptm0 300 in this example in the Available WAN Interfaces list to not have the clients use this interface as the system DNS server Click Next Default DNS Server Configuration Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces OR enter static DNS server IP addresses for the system In ATM mode if only a single P C with IPoA or static IPoE protocol is configured Static DNS server IP addresses must be entered DNS Server Interfaces can have multiple WAN interfaces served as system dns servers but only one will be used according to the priority with the first being the higest and the last one the lowest priority if the WAN interface is connected Priority order can be changed by removing all and adding them back in again Select DNS Server Interface from available WAN interfaces Selected DNS Server Tnberfaces Available WAN Interfaces ppp1 200 ptmo 300 Use the following Static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server Back next 8 The summary screen displays Click Apply Save to save your changes and go back to the I nternet Connection screen The VLAN ID is appended to the service name you specified automatically WAN Setup Summary Make sure that the settings below match the settings provided by your ISP Connection Typ
503. that it needs your permission to continue P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 and then select Properties Networking Connect using AP Broadcom NetXtreme Gigabit Ethemet This connection uses the following items oM Client for Microsoft Networks M JS QoS Packet Scheduler M Fie File and Peer Sharing for Microsoft Networks v Link Layer Too ecavesy ener 1 0 Driver M Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Uninstall Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 427 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP I Pv4 Properties window opens Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IP v4 Properties Say General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server F Validate settings upon exit Pea ae Cancel 7 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically
504. that you selected in the Log Settings screen Section 27 2 on page 367 e The Log Settings screen lets you configure to where the P 2812HNU 51c is to send logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the P 2812HNU 51c is to record Section 27 3 on page 368 27 2 The View Log Screen Click Maintenance gt Logs to open the View Log screen Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen see Section 27 3 on page 368 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 367 Chapter 27 Logs The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills Figure 186 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log View Logs Display Medium v e Date Time severity system Message o 1 Jan 1 00 53 02 High System Event BCM96345 started BusyBox v1 00 2009 07 06 04 52 0000 2 Jan 1 00 53 02 Medium System Event kernel IPSEC SPU SUCCEEDED 3 Jan 1 00 53 02 Medium Ethernet kernel ethi Link UP 100 mbps full duplex The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 131 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Display Select a severity level of logs to view The P 2812HNU 51c displays the logs with the severity level equal to or higher than what you selected This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry Date Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Severity This field displays the s
505. the troubleshooting for suggestions P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 235 Chapter 10 File Sharing 10 2 The File Sharing Screen Use this screen to set up file sharing via the P 2812HNU 51c To access this screen click USB Services gt File Sharing Figure 102 USB Services gt File Sharing File Sharing e Host Name q Note Share Configuration Enable File Sharing Services SAMBA Server Configuration e Workgroup Name Please do not remove the USB Hard Disk when the USB Hard Disk is busy Apply Save ZyXEL Gateway WORKGROUP Each field is described in the following table Table 70 USB Services gt File Sharing LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable File Select this to enable file sharing through the P 2812HNU 51c Sharing Services Server Configuration Host Name This displays the P 2812HNU 51c system name Workgroup You can add the P 2812HNU 51c to an existing or a new workgroup on Name your network Enter the name of the workgroup which your P 2812HNU 51c automatically joins You can set the P 2812HNU 51c s workgroup name to be exactly the same as the workgroup name to which your computer belongs to Note The P 2812HNU 51c will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup In this case contact your network administrator Apply Click this to save your changes to the P 2812HNU 51c Reset Clic
506. the action that the P 2812HNU 51c takes on red marked packets Conforming Action Select Drop to discard the packets Select DSCP Mark to assign a specified DSCP number between 0 and 63 to the packets and forward them The packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network Regulated Classes Member Setting Available Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the Class QoS classifier Selected Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the Add gt gt Class button to move it to the Selected Class box To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box select it and use the Remove button Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS 19 7 The QoS Monitor Screen To view the P 2812HNU 51c s QoS packet statistics click Advanced gt QoS gt Monitor The screen appears as shown Figure 165 QoS gt Monitor Monitor Refresh Interval No Refresh vij Interface Monitor S 1 atmo 2 ptmo 100 3 ptm0 0 4 eth4 100 5 pppo3G0 6 LAN WLAN Queue Monitor q2_w2 q3_w3 q3_wla q3_wib VoiceQueue AT 1 2 3 4 5 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 QoS gt Monitor LABEL DESCR
507. the current version of the device s DSL modem code Firmware Version WAN Information Mode This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP IP Address This field displays the current IPv4 address of the P 2812HNU 51c in the WAN IP Soner This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN Mas I Pv6 This field displays the current IPv6 address and prefix length for the P Address 2812HNU 51c s WAN interface Mask IPv6 Scope This field displays whether the IPv6 address is a link local or global address LAN Information IP Address This field displays the current IPv4 address of the P 2812HNU 51c in the LAN Click this to go to the screen where you can change it IP Subnet This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN Mask IPv6 This field displays the current IPv6 address and prefix length for the P Address 2812HNU 51c s LAN interface Mask IPv6 Scope This field displays whether the IPv6 address is a link local or global address P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens Table 7 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the P 2812HNU 51c is providing to the LAN Choices are Server The P 2812HNU 51c is a DHCP server in the LAN It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN Relay The P 2812HNU 51c acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients None
508. the device or by checking the device s settings Note You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 8 The WDS Screen A Wireless Distribution System WDS is a wireless connection between two or more APs Use this screen to set up your WDS links between the P 2812HNU 51cs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device Once the security settings of peer sides match one another the connection between the devices is made Note You cannot use WDS when WPS is enabled or wireless security is set to WPA or WPA2 The wireless security settings apply to both WDS links and the connections between the ZyXEL Device and any wireless clients Note At the time of writing WDS is only compatible with other ZyXEL Devices of the same model Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS The following screen displays WDS is turned on and this screen is configurable when the ZyXEL Device s wireless security mode is No Security WEP or WPA 2 PSK Figure 71 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS WDS Operating Mode Access Point Bridge Y Bridge Restrict Enabled Scan Y Remote Bridges MAC Address a f aseo Fi ZyXEL 00 19 CB 04 E0 74 F ZyXEL 00 19 CB 04 E0 88 Fi ZyXEL 00 13 49 18 90 14 o ZyXEL 00 19 CB 00 00 02 i Note 1 The WDS function only works on the No Security WEP
509. the icon to display your current Internet connection status Y Internet Connection Status oo General Internet Gateway Status Duration Speed Activity Internet Internet Gateway 8 Received 5 943 With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the P 2812HNU 51c without finding out the IP address of the P 2812HNU 51c first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the P 2812HNU 51c Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places Network Connections File Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q sxx E S JO search gt Folders EJ Address Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Internet Connection fl Create a new connection Disabled Q Set up a home or small C W Internet Connection office network LAN or High Speed Internet See Also Local Area Connection i Network Troubleshooter Enabled PEIN we D Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Other Places C Control Panel J My Network Places HA My Documents 3 My Computer 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click on the icon for your P 2812HNU 51c and select I nvoke The web configurator login screen displays E My Network
510. this button to perform the traceroute function This determines the path a packet takes to the specified host P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 29 Diagnostic 29 4 The 802 1ag Screen Click Diagnostic to open the following screen Use this screen to perform CFM actions Figure 199 802 1ag 802 lag 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management 802 1ag is supported in PTM mode Maintenance Domain MD Name Maintenance Domain MD Level 2 Maintenance Association MA Name Maintenance Association MA integer Format Destination MAC Address Count 0 802 1Q VLAN ID 0 4095 0 Maintenance End Point ID 1 8191 0 Status Continuity Check Message CCM Sent CCM 0 invalid CCM No cross connect CCM No Loopback Message LBM Linktrace Message LTM Enable CCM Disable CCM Update CC status Send Loopback Send Linktrace The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 136 Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt 802 1ag LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1lag Connectivity Fault Management Maintenance Type a name of up to 39 printable English keyboard characters for this Domain MD MD Name The combined length of the MD Name and MA name must be less or equal to 44bytes Maintenance Select a level 0 7 under which you want to create an MA Domain MD Level P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 381 Chapter 29 Diagnostic Table 136 Maintenance gt Diagno
511. this number to RTP traffic that it transmits Timer Setting Expiration Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the Duration SIP register server before it is deleted The P 2812HNU 51c automatically tries to re register your SIP account when one half of this time has passed The SIP register server might have a different expiration Register Re Enter the number of seconds the P 2812HNU 51c waits before it tries send timer again to register the SIP account if the first try failed or if there is no response Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the P 2812HNU 51c lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session Min SE Enter the minimum number of seconds the P 2812HNU 51c lets a SIP session remain idle without traffic before it automatically disconnects the session When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions This field is the shortest expiration time that the P 2812HNU 51c accepts Phone Key Config Call Return Specify the key combinations that you can enter to place a call to the last number that called you One Shot Caller Specify the key combinations that you can enter to activate caller ID for Display Call the next call only One Shot Caller Specify the key combinations that you can enter to deactivate caller ID Hidden Call for the next call o
512. tificate signed by the CA to replace the request see Section 14 3 4 on page 288 Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen See Section 14 3 3 on page 286 for field information Figure 142 Certificate Request Details Certificate Request Details Certificate signing request successfully created Note a request is not yet functional have it signed by a Certificate Authority and load the signed certificate to this device Name cert Type request Subject CN ZyXEL O TW ST N4 C US MIIBAjCB4A BAD AS NO4wDAYDVOODEwVaeVhF TDELMAkKGALIUECHMNCVFcxC zaJBgN BAgTAKSBMQswCOYDVOQOQGEwIVUzCBnzaNBokqhkiGSwOBAQEF AAOBjQAaugGYKCgGYEA wtN4xn4nmv0 ZFyTrK2 eWwXHt 7MIOJ kqHU kK3 OAc YHEATRSF Bovk1xSFtSheqBhbX IttPORCEQW3SAErP91OZSaYmnybuwrx ja2 j UHvVHqhdGqubo f lNkap877uuWYot hOKxVi2 zCLr4z4qg6LLDzg2 Tr2acyuscyt pO4b 1 EROmEC AWE AAARAMAOGCSGGSIb3 DQEBBAUAASGBAECLDVzLS1EhYMDILS7sUsJhibxXkrsa0VzSIsjxRd6anlgKdqr2 pxXbzYt9tcrBvSA7MHLoZXKSq00zD8 Zr YesazZRHfxJqDvdbkt 1UBnV40GOWaAndm2 t TieySaY EMC ZI990fVILc 8I5H PoopxQju96ZvGBLz7uNlhkVzLreit Signing END CERTIFICATE REQUEST Request Back Load Signed Certificate 14 3 2 Import Certificate Click Security gt Certificates gt Local Certificates and then Import Certificate to open the Import Local Certificate screen Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the P 2812HNU 51c 284 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide
513. time Hot Line Select this to have the P 2812HNU 51c dial the specified hot line number immediately when you pick up the telephone Hot Line Enter the number of the hot line or warm line that you want the P Warm Line 2812HNU 51c to dial number Warm Line Enter a number of seconds that the P 2812HNU 51c waits before dialing Timer the warm line number if you pick up the telephone and do not press any keys on the keypad Enable Missed Select this option to have the P 2812HNU 51c e mail you a notification Call Email when there is a missed call Notification Mail Server Select a mail server for the e mail address specified below If you select None here e mail notifications will not be sent via e mail You must have configured a mail server already in the Email Notification screen Send Notifications are sent to the e mail address specified in this field If this Notification to Email field is left blank notifications will not be sent via e mail Missed Call Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e mail Email Title notifications that the P 2812HNU 51c sends Early Media Select this option if you want people to hear a customized recording when they call you IVR Play Index Select the tone you want people to hear when they call you This field is configurable only when you select Early Media See Section 9 10 on page 216 for information on how to record these tones Music On Ho
514. ting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon YaST Control Center linux h20z File Edit Help D Software amp Network Card DEA hal Network Services Novell AppArmor Q Security and Users Miscellaneous 4 When the Network Settings window opens click the Overview tab select the appropriate connection Name from the list and then click the Configure button YaST2 linux h20z Network Card 8 Network Settings Overview Obtain an overview of installed network cards Global Options Overview Hostname DNS Routing Additionally edit their configuration Name IP Address AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 DHCP Adding a Network Card Press Add to configure a new network card manually Configuring or Deleting Choose a network card to change or remove Then press Configure or Delete as desired AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 MAC 08 00 27 96 ed 3d Device Name eth etho Started automatically at boot IP address assigned using DHCP d Configure Delete Abort P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens click the Address tab Figure 206 openSUSE 10 3 Network Card Setup YaST2 linux h20z Address Setup Sele
515. to Set up a Wireless Network on page 33 e How to Use ATM QoS with Multiple PVCs and Interface Groups on page 43 e How to Allow Out of band Remote Management from the WAN on page 60 Note The tutorials featured in this chapter require a basic understanding of connecting to and using the Web Configurator on your P 2812HNU 51c For details see the included Quick Start Guide For field descriptions of individual screens see the related technical reference in this User s Guide 2 2 How to Set up a Wireless Network This tutorial gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters The wireless clients can access the Internet through an AP wirelessly 2 2 1 Example Parameters SSID SSID_Example3 Security WPA PSK Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey 802 11 mode IEEE 802 11b g n Mixed An access point AP or wireless router is referred to as AP and a computer with a wireless network card or USB PCI adapter is referred to as wireless client here We use the P 2812HNU 51c web screens and M 302 utility screens as an example The screens may vary slightly for different models P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 33 Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 2 2 Configuring the AP Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP 1 Open the Network gt Wireless LAN screen in the AP s web configurator Figure 8
516. tomatically created Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using Intemet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Settings Show icon in notification area when connected P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Advances Settings p Services Selec Ihe services unnig on pour ralak that Inlemet usei can anaes Services memege 192 1681 559859 27177 UDP mannsqe 192 166 1 91 7261 26097 UDP E meme 192 168 1997 7810 31771 TCR Service Settings Description of service Test Name or IP address for example 192 168 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on your network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TCP UDP Internal Port number for this service 144 Cancel 5 When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray 4 Internet Connection is now connected Click here for more information P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 22 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 22 5 2 Web Configurator Easy Access 7 Double click on
517. ts you set the LAN IPv4 address and subnet mask of your P 2812HNU 51c and configure other LAN TCP IP settings Section 6 4 on page 142 e The I Pv6 screen lets you set the IPv6 settings for your P 2812HNU 51c LAN interface Section 6 4 on page 142 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 1 37 Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 2 What You Need To Know IP Address Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number This is known as an Internet Protocol address Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your P 2812HNU 51c will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the P 2812HNU 51c unless you are instructed to do otherwise DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server This P 2812HNU 51c has a built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability DHCP Relay You can also configure the P 2812HNU 51c to relay client DHCP requests to a DHCP server and the server s responses back to the clients RIP RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers Multicast and IGMP Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways
518. ttings Section 8 4 on page 187 e The DMZ Host screen lets you configure a default server Section 8 5 on page 192 e The ALG screen lets you enable SIP ALG on the P 2812HNU 51c Section 8 6 on page 192 8 2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter NAT In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world 8 3 The Port Forwarding Screen This summary screen provides a summary of all port forwarding rules and their configuration In addition this screen allows you to create new port forwarding rules and delete existing rules You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web se
519. tup Use these screens to configure QoS policers Monitor Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics Dynamic DNS This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address Remote TRO69 Use this screen to configure the P 2812HNU 51c to be managed MGMT by an ACS Auto Configuration Server TRO64 Use this screen to enable management via TR 064 on the LAN SNMP Use this screen to to configure your P 2812HNU 51c s settings for Simple Network Management Protocol management ServiceControl Use this screen to configure which services protocols can access which P 2812HNU 51c interface IPAddress Use this screen to configure from which IP address es users can manage the P 2812HNU 51c UPnP General Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off Parental Time Use this screen to configure the days and times when the Control Restriction restrictions are enforced URL Filter Use this screen to prevent users of your netowrk from viewing inappropriate web content Interface Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group Group Email Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender Notification addresses on the P 2812HNU 51c Maintenance System General Use this screen to configure your device s name domain name management inactivity timeout and password Time Setting Use this screen to change your P 2812HNU 51c s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the level that you selected Log Settings
520. ty is used to show Ethernet statistics and current TCP IP network connections Syntax netstat With no parameters this command simply displays only active statistics for ports that are currently in use by one process or another Parameter netstat a e The a parameter displays all available listening ports and connections whether they are active or not while the e parameter displays Ethernet statistics There are other parameters but these are the only ones you need to use for now The following examples show the typical output of this command C gt netstat Active Connections Proto Local Address Foreign Address State TCP COMPUTERA 1056 localhost 5091 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 1091 localhost 27015 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 1120 localhost 40000 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3243 localhost 3244 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3244 localhost 3243 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3246 localhost 3247 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3247 localhost 3246 ESTABLISHED TEP COMPUTERA 5091 localhost 1056 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 5152 localhost 3245 CLOSE_WAT TCP COMPUTERA 27015 localhost 1091 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 40000 localhost 1120 ESTABLISHED TCP COMPUTERA 3229 1232 05 05 201 http CLOSE_WATI TCP COMPUTERA 3234 W216 2921055 ESTABLISHED TCP C
521. uide 121 Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 29 WAN Configuration Configuration Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Quality Of This shows whether QoS is active or not for this connection Service IGMP Multicast This shows whether IGMP multicasting is active or not for this connection MLD Multicast This shows whether MLD multicasting is active or not for this connection IPv6 This shows whether IPv6 is active or not for this connection Back Click this button to return to the previous screen Apply Save Click this button to save your changes 5 6 The 3G Backup Screen Use this screen to configure your 3G settings Click Network gt WAN gt 3G Backup At the time of writing the 3G cards you can use in the P 2812HNU 51c are Huawei E220 Huawei E169U and Qisda H21 Note The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use the signal strength to the service provider s base station and so on 122 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup If the signal strength of a 3G network is too low the 3G card may switch to an available 2 5G or 2 75G network Refer to Section 5 7 on page 125 fora comparison between 2G 2 5G 2 75G and 3G wireless technologies Figure 50 3G Backup 3G Backup General Enable 3G Backup Card Descriptioin n a 3G Status NoDevice Username Optional Password Optional PIN Optional PIN remaining authentication tim
522. ules and enable parental control on a specific user during certain periods Click Advanced Setup gt Parental Control to open the following screen Figure 174 Parental Control gt Time restriction Access Time Restriction A maximum of 16 entries can be configured Active gt Mon rue wed Thu Fri Sat Sun start Stop Modify 1 Bob 00 a0 c5 01 23 45 x x x x x 08 00 17 30 g w Add Apply P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 23 Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 120 Parental Control gt Time Restriction LABEL DESCRIPTION This shows the index number of the schedule Active Select the check box to enable the schedule username This shows the name of the user MAC This shows the MAC address of the LAN user s computer to which this schedule applies Mon Sun x indicates the day s on which parental control is enabled Start This shows the time when the schedule starts Stop This shows the time when the schedule ends Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the schedule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing schedule Add Click Add to create a new schedule Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c 23 2 1 Adding a Schedule Click the Add button in the Time Restriction screen to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a restricted ac
523. unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 This indicates the MAC address of the client computer IP Address This indicates the IP address assigned to this client computer P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide WAN Setup 5 1 Overview This chapter discusses the P 2812HNU 51c s WAN screens Use these screens to configure your P 2812HNU 51c for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 34 LAN and WAN See Section 5 7 on page 125 for advanced technical information on WAN 5 1 1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The Layer 2 Interface screen lets you view remove or add a layer 2 WAN interface Section 5 4 on page 101 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The Internet Connection screen lets you view and configure the WAN settings on the P 2812HNU 51c for Internet access Section 5 5 on page 105 Table 16 WAN Setup Overview LAYER 2 INTERFACE INTERFACE Ethernet DSL LINK TYPE CONNECTION MODE Default Mode VLAN MUX Mode MSC Mode INTERNET CONNECTION WAN SERVICE TYPE CONNECT
524. updated with the remote gateway s new WAN IP address P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN Finding Out More See Section 12 5 on page 267 for advanced technical information on IPSec VPN 12 2 1 Before You Begin If a VPN tunnel uses Telnet FTP WWW then you should configure remote management Remote MGMT to allow access for that service 12 3 The IPSec Screen The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator Figure 129 IPSec Summary Fields Local Netware i Remote Network s t Remote IPSec Router a m mm mm es m m m ee ee Local and remote IP addresses must be static Click Security gt IPSec VPN to open the IPSec VPN screen This is a menu of your IPSec rules tunnels The IPSec summary menu is read only Edit a VPN by clicking the Add button or a rule s Edit icon and then configuring its associated submenus Figure 130 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec VPN IPSec PN IPSec Connections A maximum of 4 IPSec tunnels can be configured Creat a new IPSec tunnel ate Behnken b hndi _ 9 new connection 10 4 2 3 192 168 1 35 192 168 2 27 g wi AGUTESSES P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 255 Chapter 12 IPSec VPN The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 73 Security gt IPSec VPN gt IPSec VPN LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click this button to configure a new VPN
525. ur to eight digits for the inserted 3G card again PIN remaining authentication times This field displays how many times you can still enter a wrong PIN code before your ISP blocks your SIM card Apply Click Apply to save the correct PIN code and replace the one you specified in the 3G Backup screen P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screens 4 2 2 3G Status NeedPUK Click the NeedPUK link under Interface Status of the Status screen to access this screen Use this screen to enter the PUK code to enable the 3G SIM card again Figure 27 Status gt Need PUK PUK code Note 3G Warning Status SIM card is locked Enter PUK code and new PIN code to unlock New PIN code PUK remaining authentication times 10 1 Please contact your service provider for PUK code 2 If PUK remaining authentication times reaches 0 your SIM card will be permanently damaged The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Status gt Need PUK LABEL PUK code DESCRIPTION If you enter the PIN code incorrectly three times the SIM card will be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet You should get the PUK Personal Unblocking Key code four to eight digits from your ISP Enter the PUK code to enable the SIM card If an incorrect PUK code is entered 10 times the SIM card will be disabled permanently You then
526. uration Protocol See DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 475 DYNDNS wildcard 329 E EAP Authentication 474 ECHO 193 echo cancellation 224 Encapsulation 125 MER 125 PPP over Ethernet 125 PPPOA 126 encapsulation 268 RFC 1483 126 encryption 476 WEP 157 end to end loopback test 383 ESP 268 ESS 468 ESSID 84 Europe type call service mode 227 Extended Service Set Dentification 154 Extended Service Set See ESS 468 F F4 cells 383 F4 F5 OAM 398 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Index F5 cells 383 FCC interference statement 511 file sharing 27 236 Finger 193 firmware upload 372 upload error 373 firmware version 83 flash key 227 flashing 227 fragmentation threshold 471 FTP 184 193 G G 168 224 G 992 3 398 G 992 4 398 G 992 5 398 H hidden node 469 host 364 host name 83 HTTP 193 275 276 HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol 372 humidity 395 IANA 145 463 IBSS 467 ID type and content 272 IEEE 802 119 471 IEEE 802 1Q 132 IGMP 133 138 146 version 133 IGMP proxy 398 IGMP v1 398 IGMP v2 398 IKE phases 269 importing certificates 284 288 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 467 initialization vector IV 477 inside header 269 Integrated Access Device 23 internal routing table 90 Internet access 24 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 463 Internet Key Exchange 269 Internet Protocol Security see IPSec Internet Protocol version 6 see Pv6 IP Address
527. used for the service Add Click this button to add a rule to the table below No This is the rule index number read only Active This field indicates whether the rule is active or not Clear the check box to disable the rule Select the check box to enable it Server Name This field displays the name of the service used by the packets for this virtual server WAN Interface This field displays the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded External Start This is the first external port number that identifies a service Port External End This is the last external port number that identifies a service Port P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 8 Network Address Translation NAT Table 50 NAT Port Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Internal Start This is the first internal port number that identifies a service Port Internal End This is the last internal port number that identifies a service Port Server IP This field displays the inside IP address of the server Address Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 8 3 1 The Port Forwarding E
528. ut changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get
529. utual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup LLC based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the v
530. uxi O 2y XEL OU sw2 CN localhost emailAddress selina sun zyxel cn MIIDZTCCas6gawIBagIBAaDANBokqhkiGSwOBAQOF ADCBhDELMAkGALUEBhNCOO4x EDAOBGNVBAgTBOppYWSnU3 UxDTALBGNVBAcTBFdleGkxDjAMBQGNVBAOTBVpSUEVM MNOwwCgYDVOOLEwNzdzIxEjAQBGNVBANTCUxvY2 FsaG9 zaDEIMCAGCSqGS Ib3DOET ARYTc2VsallShLnNibkB6eXh1bC5jbj deF wOwN AON OWNZO3SNDNaF wOwNzi0Nj Ou NzQ3NDNaMIGENQswCOYDVOOGEwIDTJEQMASGA1UECBMHSmlhbmaTATENMAsGAL1UE BxMEV3V4aTEOMAvGALUECHMF Un1lYRUwxDDAKBGNVBAsTA3N3 MJ ESMBAGALUEAxMI bG93 YWxob3NOMS IwlAYJKoZ IT hvcNaAQkBFANzZUxpbmEuc3 VuQupSeGV sLrNunIGt MAOGCSqGS Ib3 DOEBAQUAASGNADCBIOKBGOC x23 QyHyzj Oyj GSVqOHnsVadI TF ZPC KVARZadmqMXiWE p2 BWL4t2cmLa3 ZT1WzSmvIBACNQKiPLATYYaDf nH RJ lhs1NF f2naqhLNXICsPqafn6jTtHOvGSHpOvKSdu9nL4NC2 AlKbSyf6v T RNIXkISwkZ2t5 JTZzS5rak3 6LRCQIDAQABO4HEMNIHHMBOGALUGDGOQUBBTBSubOsNkasoftDMiFD hP r AWkzCBsOYDVROJBIGpMIGmgBTBSubOsNkasoftDMiFD hPr sAWUk6GBiqsBhzcB HDELMNAKGALUEBHNCOO4xEDAOBGNVBAgTBOppYUSnU3 UxDTALBGNVBAacTBFdleGkx DIAMBGNVBAOTBVpSUEVMMOwwC gYDVOQOLEwNzdzIxEjAQBGNVBAMNTCUxvY2FsaG9z ADEINCAGCS AGS Ib3 DOEJARYTc2VsalShLnNibkB6eXhlbCSjboIBaDAMBgNVHRME BTADAQH MAOGCSqGS Ib3 DOEBBAUAASGBAI3 800rfqjGzZaLswWP8s nhmE4g1Ddaz T q8nxXC 6cNnpexXak0t9 lhrker qNuPkg581326Xm2 zp7kSufP4qWOFPUTN3m7E REF SJoIvn rK5s3V xvSNXs7WzelSIdmth2kBSbhS slVXjcRodc LUWOnMOUNc1NS 6wiznH6Qus3y lt The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 92 Trusted CA View LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field
531. vanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions e If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to an ETHERNET port e Try to access the P 2812HNU 51c using another service such as Telnet If you can access the P 2812HNU 51c check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the P 2812HNU 51c does not respond to HTTPS can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the P 2812HNU 51c 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default admin user name is admin and default admin password is 1234 The default user name is user and the default user password is user These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 Turn the P 2812HNU 51c off and on 3 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 30 1 on page 385 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 387 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting cannot Telnet to the P 2812HNU 51c See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser cannot access the P 2812HNU
532. ve VPN connections Use Refresh to display active VPN connections This screen is read only The following table describes the fields in this tab Figure 133 Security gt IPSec VPN gt Status IPSec Connections Status The status of IPSec Tunnel is displayed in this page You can trigger the IPSec Tunnel or change its status by clicking the button in the table ee ee aa Nain sate We UUT COSSO new connection 10 4 2 3 192 168 1 35 192 168 2 27 po aS P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 12 IPSec VPN The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 76 Security gt IPSec VPN gt Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays whether the VPN connection is up a yellow bulb or down a gray bulb Connection This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy Name Remote This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router Gateway Local This is the IP address of computer s on your local network behind your Addresses P 2812HNU 51c Remote This is the IP address of computer s on the remote network behind the Addresses remote PSec router Action Click Trigger to establish a VPN connection with the remote network Refresh Click Refresh to display the current active VPN connection s 12 5 IPSec VPN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in thi
533. ve to save and go to the next screen Figure 21 Profile Confirm Save Confirm Save gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 gt Network Type Infrastructure gt Network Mode 802 11b q gt Channel Auto gt Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately Otherwise click the Activate Later button If you clicked Activate Later you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it Note Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time Figure 22 Profile Activate 0 Your network has been configured successfully Activate Now Activate Later When you activate the new profile the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings When the wireless link is established the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection Open your Internet browser enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER If you are able to access the web site your new profile is successfully configured If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen select the profile you are using and click Edit Check the details you entered previously Also refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide or contact your network administrator if n
534. vers through which the request passed in reverse sequence Once the session is set up session traffic is sent between the UAs directly bypassing all the proxy servers in between The following figure shows the SIP and session traffic flow between the user agents UA 1 and UA 2 and the proxy servers this example shows two proxy servers PROXY 1 and PROXY 2 Figure 99 SIP Call Through Proxy Servers PROXY 1 PROXY 2 oj H SIP SIP SIP amp RTP UA 1 UA 2 The following table shows the SIP call progression Table 65 SIP Call Progression UA 1 PROXY 1 PROXY 2 UA 2 Invite Invite 4 100 Trying Invite te 100 Trying 4 180 Ringing 4 180 Ringing lt 180 Ringing em __ 200 OK e _ _ 200 OK ee __ 200 OK ACK nmn RTP lt 6 EP lt 4 n fE 200 OK ss 222 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 9 Voice 1 User Agent 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 1 This message is an invitation to User Agent 2 to participate in a SIP telephone call Proxy 1 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request 2 Proxy 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 2 Proxy 2 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request 3 Proxy 2 sends a SIP INVITE request to User Agent 2 4 User Agent 2 sends a response back to Proxy 2 indicating that the phone is ringing The response is relayed back to User Agent 1 via
535. vice categoryS Otherwise choose an existing interface by selecting the checkbox to enable it vPI 0 255 o VCI 32 65535 34 Select DSL Link Type Eo is for PPPoE IPoE and Bridge Ea O pppoaA O IPoA Encapsulation Mode LLC SNAP BRIDGING v Service Category Non Realtime VBR Y Peak Cell Rate cells s 1415 Sustainable Cell Rate cells s 1414 Maximum Burst Size cells 1414 Select Connection Mode Default Mode Single service over one connection VLAN MUX Mode Multiple Vlan service over one connection MSC Mode Multiple Service over one Connection Enable Quality Of Service Enabling packet level QoS for a PVC improves performance for selected classes of applications QoS cannot be set for CBR and Realtime VBR QoS consumes system resources therefore the number of PVCs will be reduced Use Advanced Setup Quality of Service to assign priorities for the applications O Enable Quality Of Service Back Apply Save P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 2 3 1 1 Internet Connection Settings for PVC 1 1 Click Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection to configure WAN connection settings for PVC 1 Click Add Internet Connection 3G Backup Wide Area Network WAN Service Setup Choose Add or Remove to configure a WAN service over a selected interface Current Mode is PTM ATM WAN Active WAN Mode is selected with the switch on the
536. when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above ona medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 an
537. wing conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related e 4 If you include any Windows sp
538. with incoming packets in srTCM e A packet arrives The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet in bytes e After a packet is transmitted a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket e f there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket the P 2812HNU 51c checks the EBS bucket The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket Otherwise the packet is marked red No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped Two Rate Three Color Marker The Two Rate Three Color Marker trTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets Committed Burst Size CBS and Peak Burst Size
539. word is used to authenticate the ACS Connection This shows the connection request URL Request URL The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the P 2812HNU 51c Apply Save Click this button to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 21 3 The TR 064 Screen TR 064 is a LAN Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum TR 064 is built on top of UPnP It allows the users to use a TR 064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user specific parameters such as the username and password Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt TROG4 to open the following screen Figure 168 TR 064 Enable TRO64 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 113 TR 064 LABEL DESCRIPTION Enanble TR064 Select the check box to activate management via TR 064 on the LAN Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the P 2812HNU 51c P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 333 Chapter 21 Remote Management 21 4 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices Your P 2812HNU 51c supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the P 2812HNU 51c through the netw
540. xample Your DSL interface status should also be Up and display the transmission rates ZyXEL None Refresh Interval 3 ee User Name admin System Uptime 0 days 0 hours 0 minutes Model Number P 2812HNU Sic Current Date Time 01 Jan 2000 00 05 54 MAC Address 00 23 f8 41 71 b4 System Mode Routing Bridging Firmware Version 1 00 BLL 0 b7 CPU Usage N 2 00 DSL Firmware Version d21k5 Memory Usage E WAN 0 Information Mode ATM IPoE IP Address 0 0 0 0 interface Status IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 WAN 1 Information Rate Mode PTM IPOE Bae Phas IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ip boet M i WAN 3 Information Mode PTM IPOE 100M Full IP Address 172 13 3 119 WLAN Up 150M IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 WAN 2 Information Mode PTM PPPOE More Status IP Address 172 16 1 23 WAN Service Statistics LAN Statistics Route Info Client List ETH IPowW Message 2 Click the WAN Service Statistics link under More Status in the Status screen P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 The WAN Service Ststistics screen displays Check if any packets are transmitted or received through the two WAN connections you just configured WAN Services Statistics SS a A E A 0 0 0 0 592 z atmo ipoe_0_8_35 0 0 0 9 ptm0 100 ipoe_0_0_1 100 0 0 0 0 176416 592 0 a l ptm0 300 RemoteMgmt 300 464040
541. you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234 1 5 1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it When the POWER LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the device restarts P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c 1 6 LEDs Lights The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs Figure 7 LEDs on the Device ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 2 ETHERNET S ETHERNET 4 WLANIWPS DSL INTERNET ZyXEL P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 2812HNU 51c None of the LEDs are on if the P 2812HNU 51c is not receiving power Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLO STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR SYS Green On The P 2812HNU 51c is receiving power and ready for use Blinking The P 2812HNU 51c is self testing Red On The P 2812HNU 51c detected an error while self testing or there is a device malfunction O
542. ype Infrastructure T ca ZyXEL_MIS 6 62 Network Mode 802 11g T ca ZyXEL_YZU 6 62 Channel 6 T ZyXEL_test 6 60 Security vVPA PSK gp SSID_Example3 6 6 56 MAC Address 00 A0 C5 CD 1F 64 T CPE_5257_00 11 54 REE Me T diink4300 6 so Scan Connect 2 The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks Click Scan if you want to search again If no entry displays in the Available Network List that means there is no wireless network available within range Make sure the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide Chapter 2 Tutorials 3 When you try to connect to an AP with security configured a window will pop up 4 prompting you to specify the security settings Enter the pre shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting Use the Next button to move on to the next screen You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen or the Exit button to return to the Site Survey screen Figure 13 ZyXEL Utility Security Settings Security Settings gt Encryption Type ikir gt gt Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Back Next _ Exit The Confirm Save window appears Check your settings and click Save to continue Figure 14 ZyXEL Utility Confirm Save gt Network Name SSID SSID_Example3 gt Network Type Infrastructure gt Network Mode 802
543. z has WIR ESTAS CH SBR RAS RR JERRTE gt ZR ARKE TS rte Be EAR gt ADERE E RER bE BONE o PODER ER AE AS as REET IRE gt EXC BIMGEAR gt HAEEREN a fake ate ESE ZS ae DPR REK SEE Re Bees FF EB IR SY EB SZ F RAZ Ri E Z Ho FRR ET FEE IE a RN SERRE FEAE e jaye WWD TEMG gt a ZOE Bp Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device has been designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian CES 003 P 2812HNU 51c User s Guide 513 Appendix Legal Information Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications Go to http www zyxel com Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s pa

ZyXEL P-2812HNU-51c User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents